SR-2000 Um 843GB 193160 GB 1039-1 PDF

843GB
Table of Contents
General Precautions.......................................................................... 2
Safety Precautions ............................................................................ 2
1D and 2D Code Reader
SR-2000 Series Part 1 Basic Operation
User's Manual Rev.6.0 Chapter 1 Before Using the Product

1-1 Checking the Package Contents ....................................................... 3
Read this manual before use. 1-2 Part Names........................................................................................ 3
Keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. 1-3 System Configuration and Setup Flow .............................................. 4
Chapter 2 Connection and Wiring

2-1 Connection and Wiring ...................................................................... 5
2-2 Wiring to a PC ................................................................................... 6
2-3 Wiring to a PLC or Peripheral............................................................ 6
2-4 Wiring to a Sensor or Switch ............................................................. 6
Chapter 3 Mounting
3-1 Before Mounting ................................................................................ 7
3-2 Mounting Methods ............................................................................. 7
3-3 Position Adjustment........................................................................... 9
Chapter 4 Tuning
4-1 Tuning.............................................................................................. 11
Symbols 4-2 Reading Check ................................................................................ 11
4-3 Initial Power-on Operation Setup..................................................... 11
The following symbols alert you to important messages. Be sure to read these
messages carefully.
Chapter 5 AutoID Network Navigator Functions and Operations (Basic)
It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
DANGER
serious injury. 5-1 Connecting ...................................................................................... 12
It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death 5-2 Reading Settings ............................................................................. 12
WARNING
or serious injury.
5-3 Communication Settings.................................................................. 13
It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor 5-4 Sending Settings ............................................................................. 14
CAUTION
or moderate injury.
5-5 Saving Settings/Quick Setup Codes................................................ 15
It indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in product damage
NOTICE
as well as property damage.
Part 2 Detailed Information
Important It indicates cautions and limitations that must be followed during
operation.
Chapter 6 AutoID Network Navigator Functions and Operations (Advanced)
Point It indicates additional information on proper operation. 6-1 Change Field of View ...................................................................... 16
6-2 Read Multiple Codes ....................................................................... 16
6-3 Read multiple codes in a Grid ......................................................... 17
Reference It indicates tips for better understanding or useful information.
6-4 Read Multiple of the Same Code/Same Type of Code.................... 17
6-5 Change the Sort Order of Region number....................................... 18
Indicates the reference pages in this manual or the reference pages in
separate manuals. 6-6 Determine the Success/Failure of Reading for Each Area .............. 18
6-7 Read Codes in Always On Mode..................................................... 19
6-8 Read Barcodes in Specific Orientations .......................................... 19
6-9 Increase Responsiveness to Print Changes.................................... 20
Introduction 6-10 Read DotCode................................................................................. 20
6-11 Ensuring Determined Ranges (Vertical-Horizontal) and Depth ....... 21
This user's manual describes the connection/wiring procedure, setting
6-12 Confirm Speed Traceability ............................................................. 22
instructions, and precautions for using the "SR-2000 Series 1D and 2D Code
6-13 Reading at a Specific Speed and Depth.......................................... 22
Reader". Please read this manual thoroughly before using the SR-2000 Series to
6-14 Depth-directional Reads .................................................................. 23
ensure optimum performance. Keep this manual handy for quick future reference.
6-15 Reading Codes on the Side of Rotating Cylindrical Objects ........... 24
6-16 Adjust the Light Emission Timing .................................................... 25
6-17 Change Reading Behavior .............................................................. 25
6-18 Control Multiple Readers ................................................................. 26
6-19 Advanced Multi-head Mode............................................................. 26
6-20 Check Print Quality.......................................................................... 27
6-21 Edit Read Data ................................................................................ 28
6-22 Changing the Sort Order of Data..................................................... 28
6-23 Control the I/O Terminals ................................................................ 29
6-24 Performing an Encoder Input........................................................... 30
6-25 Performing an Encoder Output........................................................ 31
6-26 Detecting Possibility of a Timing Input............................................. 32
6-27 Save Captured Images.................................................................... 32
6-28 Output Read Data to CSV Files....................................................... 33
6-29 Compare the Read Data (Preset Data Comparison)....................... 34
6-30 Suppress Data Output ..................................................................... 34
6-31 Lock SR-2000 Series Buttons ......................................................... 34
6-32 Connect Using Port 23 .................................................................... 35
6-33 Creating Changeover Function Files ............................................... 35
6-34 Save Changeover Function Files .................................................... 36
6-35 Send Changeover Function Files .................................................... 36
1 GB SR-2000 UM
6-36 Connect to AutoID Network Navigator over Ethernet...................... 37 16-3 Reading Codes with Unknown Positions....................................... 114
6-37 Allocate IP Addresses to Multiple Devices ...................................... 38 16-4 Changeover ................................................................................... 114
6-38 Using the Lighting attachment (SR-20AL)....................................... 39
6-39 Use the Polarizing Filter (For all lights-ON) OP-88256 ................... 39
Chapter 17 Specifications
6-40 Check the Reading Statistics Information ....................................... 39
6-41 Identify the reader ........................................................................... 40 17-1 Specifications ................................................................................ 116
17-2 Dimensions.................................................................................... 117
17-3 Troubleshooting............................................................................. 119
Chapter 7 Checking Reading Results and Operations
17-4 ASCII Codes.................................................................................. 120
7-1 Check the Read Data ...................................................................... 41 17-5 Precautions on Proper Use ........................................................... 120
7-2 Send Commands............................................................................. 41 17-6 Software License Agreement ........................................................ 120
7-3 Acquire image files stored on the SR-2000 Series (Image Vew) .... 41 17-7 Copyright indications ..................................................................... 121
7-4 View Live Images (MultiMonitor) ..................................................... 42
7-5 Acquire files stored on the SR-2000 Series (File View) .................. 42
7-6 Output Read Results as a Report ................................................... 43
General Precautions
Chapter 8 Checking and Restoring Settings
• Do not use this product for the purpose to protect a human body or a part
8-1 Checking SR-2000 Series Settings ................................................. 44 of human body.
8-2 Restoring Settings (AutoID Network Navigator) .............................. 44 WARNING • This product is not intended for use as explosion-proof product. Do not
8-3 Restoring Settings (Quick Setup Code) .......................................... 44 use this product in hazardous location and/or potentially explosion
atmosphere.
• You must verify that the SR-2000 Series are operating correctly in terms of
Chapter 9 Detailed Explanation functionality and performance before the start and the operation of the
CAUTION SR-2000 Series.
9-1 Reader Display Details.................................................................... 45 • We recommend that you take substantial safety measures to avoid any
damage in the event of a problem occurring.
9-2 AutoID Network Navigator Details................................................... 46
9-3 List of AutoID Network Navigator Settings ...................................... 47 • KEYENCE never warrant the function or performance of the SR-2000
Series if it is used in a manner that differs from the SR-2000 Series
9-4 Read Behavior................................................................................. 49 specifications contained in this instruction manual of if the SR-2000
9-5 Reading Test ................................................................................... 54 NOTICE Series are modified by yourself.
• When the SR-2000 Series is used in combination with other instruments,
9-6 Master/Slave Function..................................................................... 55 functions and performance maybe degraded, depending on operating
9-7 Code Quality Verification................................................................. 58 conditions and the surrounding environment.
9-8 Matching level ................................................................................. 68
9-9 Preset Data Comparison ................................................................. 68
9-10 Scripts ............................................................................................. 69 Safety Precautions
9-11 Command replacement ................................................................... 70
Part 3 Communication Safety Precautions on LED Product
Chapter 10 Communication Types

• Do not control or adjustment other than those specified in herein. It may
result in hazardous radiation exposure. Follow the instruction mentioned
10-1 SR-2000 Series Communication Types .......................................... 72 below, otherwise, injury to human body (eyes and skin etc.) may result.
10-2 Data Communication Format .......................................................... 73 • Do not stare at the LED light and specular reflected light.
• LED emission from this product is not automatically stopped when it is
CAUTION disassembled. Never do disassemble, modify, repair this product.
• Do not view the LED light with optical instruments (for example, eye
Chapter 11 Serial and Socket Communication loupes, magnifiers, microscopes, telescopes, binoculars etc.) Do not view
the LED light directly with optical instruments (for example, eye loupes,
11-1 Serial Communication ..................................................................... 75 magnifiers, microscopes, telescopes, binoculars etc.) within a distance of
100 mm. It may pose an eye hazard.
11-2 Socket Communication (TCP, UDP) ............................................... 75
Chapter 12 Command Communication

12-1 Command Communication.............................................................. 76
12-2 Reading and Tuning Commands..................................................... 76
12-3 SR-2000 Series Configuration Commands ..................................... 78
Chapter 13 PLC Link

13-1 PLC Link Overview.......................................................................... 89
13-2 Settings ........................................................................................... 89
13-3 Memory Maps.................................................................................. 91
13-4 Operation Examples........................................................................ 93
13-5 PLC Link Error................................................................................. 95
Chapter 14 EtherNet/IP
14-1 EtherNet/IP Overview...................................................................... 96
14-2 Cyclic Communication..................................................................... 97
14-3 Message Communication.............................................................. 103
14-4 Reference Programs ..................................................................... 106
Chapter 15 PROFINET
15-1 PROFINET Overview .................................................................... 109
15-2 Cyclic Communication................................................................... 109
Part 4 Specifications and Application Examples
Chapter 16 Application Examples

16-1 Reading Operation ........................................................................ 114
16-2 Reading Moving Codes ................................................................. 114
GB SR-2000 UM 2
1-1 Checking the Package Contents Model
SR-20AH
Name
High-resolution lens
Package content
Attachment
Qty.
1
Appearance
attachment
Model Name Package content Qty. Appearance
SR-2000/2000W 1D and 2D Code Reader Reader unit 1
Screw 2
OP-88256 Polarization filter Polarization 1

(For all lights-ON) filter
Instruction 1 1D and 2D Code Reader
SR-2000 Series
Instruction manual
Introduction
Read this instruction manual before using the product in order to achieve
maximum performance.
Keep this instruction manual in a safe place after reading it so that it can be
used at any time.
96M14742 Precautions on Proper Use
NOTICE
Do not use a voltage other than that described in the specifications with
the SR-2000 Series. Doing so may cause damage to the unit.
Be sure to turn off the power to devices attached to the SR-2000 Series
when you plug in or unplug the cables. Failure to do so may cause damage
to the SR-2000 Series.
Do not disassemble or modify the SR-2000 Series. Doing so may cause
damage to the unit.
Place cables as far away as possible from high-voltage lines and power
lines. Otherwise, electrical noise can be generated that may cause a
product failure or malfunction.
The SR-2000 Series is a precision instrument. Do not impact or drop the
instrument. Pay particular attention when transporting or installing the unit.
Do not carry the SR-2000 Series by holding its cables. This may cause cable
breaks or damage to the unit due to the impact of bumping each other.
Do not allow water, oil, dust, or other foreign substances to stick to the
scanner. This may cause read errors. Use a soft, dry cloth to wipe any
substance from the scanner. (Do not use a cloth dipped in alcohol or other
cleaning agent.)
Do not turn off the power of the SR-2000 Series while accessing files. The
internal data may be corrupted.
Symbols Precautions on Regulations and Standards
manual
The following symbols alert you to important messages. Be sure to read
these messages carefully. CE Marking
It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or Keyence Corporation has confirmed that this product complies with the
DANGER
serious injury. essential requirements of the applicable EU Directive, based on the
WARNING
It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death following specifications.
or serious injury.
Be sure to consider the following specifications when using this product
It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor in the Member State of European Union.
CAUTION
or moderate injury.
It indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in product damage z EMC Directive
NOTICE
as well as property damage. Applicable standards EMI : EN61326-1, Class A
EMS : EN61326-1
Important It indicates cautions and limitations that must be followed during operation.
The length of cable connected to the power supply connector must
be less than or equal to 30 m.
Point It indicates additional information on proper operation.
This product is intended to be used in an industrial electromagnetic
environment.
Reference It indicates tips for better understanding or useful information.
These specifications do not give any guarantee that the end-product with
Indicates the reference pages in this manual or the reference pages in separate manuals. this product incorporated complies with the essential requirements of
EMC Directive. The manufacturer of the end-product is solely responsible
Safety Information for SR-2000 Series for the compliance on the end-product itself according to EMC Directive.
General Precautions CSA Certificate

Do not use this product for the purpose to protect a human body or a part This product complies with the following CSA and UL standards and has
of human body.
DANGER This product is not intended for use as explosion-proof product. Do not been certified by CSA.
use this product in a hazardous location and/or potentially explosion Applicable standard : CAN/CSA C22.2 No.61010-1
atmosphere.
UL61010-1
You must verify that the SR-2000 Series are operating correctly in terms of
functionality and performance before the start and the operation of the Be sure to consider the following specifications when using this product
CAUTION SR-2000 Series.
We recommend that you take substantial safety measures to avoid any
as a product certified by CSA.
damage in the event of an assumed problem occurring. Overvoltage category
KEYENCE never warrant the function or performance of the SR-2000 Use this product under pollution degree 2.
Series if it is used in a manner that differs from the SR-2000 Series
specifications contained in this instruction manual of if the SR-2000 Use this product at the altitude of 2000 m or less.
Series are modified by yourself. Indoor use only.
NOTICE When the SR-2000 Series is used in combination with other instruments,
functions and performance maybe degraded, depending on operating When using this product, use the following power supply.
conditions and the surrounding environment.
If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer.
CSA or UL certified power supply that provides Class 2 output as
the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired. defined in the CEC (Canadian Electrical Code) and NEC (National
Electrical Code), or CSA or UL certified power supply that has been
Safety Precautions on LED Product evaluated as a Limited Power Source as defined in CAN/CSA-C22.2
No. 60950-1/UL60950-1.
Do not preform controls or adjustments based on any procedures unless
otherwise specified in the instruction manual. Doing so may cause
Ensure the external circuits to be connected to the SR-2000 Series are
hazardous exposure of LED light. Follow the instructions mentioned in SELV circuits.
this manual. Otherwise, injury to the human body (eyes and skin) may
result.
Do not stare into the LED light or its reflection from a mirror-like surface. KC mark (Republic of Korea)
Do not disassemble, remodel or repair this product. The LED light
CAUTION Class A Equipment
emission from this product is not automatically stopped when it is
disassembled. This product is a industrial electromagnetic wave generating device (Class
Do not look at the LED light with an optical instrument (such as loupe,
magnifying glass, microscope, telescope or binoculars). Do not look at A) and is intended for use in all establishments other than domestic.
the LED light with an optical instrument (such as loupe, magnifying
glass, microscope, telescope or binoculars) within a distance of 100
mm. Doing so may hurt your eyes. Ͳ 匏͑匶匶͙͑ 櫋怺殯͑愯暧皻柦匶沖沲 ͚
決͑匶匶垚͑櫋怺殯͙͑Ͳ͑匏͚͑͑洊沖砒洇穯匶匶嵢昢͑砖廪沖͑嬖垚͑斲殯沖垚͑決͑洖
汊渂汞穞柢匶͑愚岂彶͑͑͝儆洛歾汞͑滆櫳櫖昢͑斲殯穞垚͑冉汊͑徯洇求嵢͑穯城埪͑͟
FCC Regulations
This product complies with the following regulations specified by the FCC.
Screw 6
Applicable regulation: FCC Part 15 Subpart B ClassA
΀ΡΖΣΒΥΚΠΟ͑ ΚΤ͑ ΤΦΓΛΖΔΥ͑ ΥΠ͑ ΥΙΖ͑ ΗΠΝΝΠΨΚΟΘ͑ ΥΨΠ͑ ΔΠΟΕΚΥΚΠΟΤͫ͑ ͙͚͢ ΅ΙΚΤ͑ ΕΖΧΚΔΖ
ΞΒΪ͑ΟΠΥ͑ΔΒΦΤΖ͑ΙΒΣΞΗΦΝ͑ΚΟΥΖΣΗΒΔΖ͑͝ΒΟΕ͙͚͑ͣ͑ΥΙΚΤ͑ΕΖΧΚΔΖ͑ΞΦΤΥ͑ΒΔΔΖΡΥ͑ΒΟΪ
ΚΟΥΖΣΗΖΣΖΟΔΖ͑ΣΖΔΖΚΧΖΕ͑͝ΚΟΔΝΦΕΚΟΘ͑ΚΟΥΖΣΗΖΣΖΟΔΖ͑ΥΙΒΥ͑ΞΒΪ͑ΔΒΦΤΖ͑ΦΟΕΖΤΚΣΖΕ
ΠΡΖΣΒΥΚΠΟ͟
1 E SR-2000-IM
Ethernet port 1
cover
Option
Model Name Package content Qty. Appearance

SR-H6W Setup software DVD-ROM 1
(AutoID Network
Navigator)
OP-87224/ Control cable Cable 1

87225/87226 (2 m/5 m/10 m)

87354/87355 (NFPA-compliant) (2 m/5 m/10 m)

D-sub connector type
OP-87230/ Ethernet cable Cable 1
OP-88304/ L-shaped control cable Cable 1

OP-88307/ L-shaped control cable Cable 1

D-sub connector type
OP-88301/ L-shaped Ethernet cable Cable 1
OP-51580/86941 USB cable Cable 1

(2 m/5 m)
OP-87866 Mounting bracket Mounting 1

bracket
Screw (M4) 4
OP-88002 Adjustable bracket Mounting 1

bracket
Screw (M4) 4
OP-88176 Polarizing filter Polarization 1

(for spare) filter
Screw 6
SR-20AL Lighting attachment Lighting 1

attachment
Screw (M3) 2
681GB 3 GB SR-2000 UM
1-2 Part Names 1-3 System Configuration and
Top
Setup Flow
(2)
System Configuration
(3)
SR-2000 Series systems have the following configurations.
(1) (4) During setup

(5)
Bottom (6)
USB
(7)
ETHERNET
POWER
(8) Ethernet
AutoID Network
USB SR-2000 Series Navigator
* You cannot connect to AutoID Network Navigator through the RS-232C

No. Name Description interface.
(1) Scanner Section that reads codes.
Indicates whether the reading has succeeded or failed,
During use
(2) Status indicating LED
setup software connection status, etc.
(3) Display Shows reading results or reading data. RS-232C
(4) ENTER button Button used to confirm functions.
(5) SELECT button Button used to select functions. Ethernet PC PLC
(6) Ethernet port Port for connecting the Ethernet cable.
(7) Control port Port for connecting the control cable.
(8) USB port Port for connecting the USB cable for setting. SR-2000 Series I/O terminal
Sensor PLC
When not using the Ethernet cable, be sure to attach the Ethernet port cover.
Be sure to attach the USB port cover during operation.
NOTICE
Failure to attach the port cover cannot satisfy the specifications of the
protective structure.
Setup flow
State of the status indicating LED (2) by the unit operating status
1 Check the package contents.
When the unit is normally operating "1-1 Checking the Package

Unit state LED state Contents" (Page 3)
Turned
Powered off
Off
2 Wire the reader and mount it on a surface.
Immediately after powered on Lit white
Blinking "2-1 Connection and
IP address unallocated (status BOOTP)
blue Wiring" (Page 5)
Connected to AutoID Network Navigator Lit blue
Reads successfully Lit green 3 Power the reader.
Reads unsuccessfully or gets unsuccessful result
Lit red
of verification
When the unit reads a quick setup code

Unit state LED state 4 Tune the reader.
Reading Lit blue
"4-1 Tuning" (Page 11)
Configures settings successfully Lit green
Configures settings unsuccessfully Lit red
When the unit is in automatic timing adjustment 5 Use AutoID Network Navigator to set up the SR-2000 Series.
Unit state LED state

"5-1 Connecting" (Page 12)
Waiting for a trigger Lit blue
Reads successfully Lit green Start operation.

Reads unsuccessfully Lit red
When the unit has an error

Unit state LED state
Blinking
Has an error
yellow
* For details of unit errors, refer to "17-3 Troubleshooting" (page 119)
GB SR-2000 UM 4
2-1 Connection and Wiring Wire color Name Description
Signal
direction
Initial assignment AWG
Brown 24 V 24 VDC Input - 26

Blue 0V Power GND - - 26
Connection and Wiring
Orange RXD (RD) RS-232C Receive Input - 28
Connecting the control cable and wiring Yellow TXD (SD) RS-232C Send Output - 28
Purple SGND RS-232C GND - - 28
1 Align the protrusion in the cable connector with the notch in the Green IN1 Input signal 1 Input Reading start 26
control port. Gray IN2 Input signal 2 Input - 28
White and blue IN COM Input common - - 28
Pink OUT1 Output signal 1 Output Reading OK 28
Light blue OUT2 Output signal 2 Output Reading ERROR 28
White OUT3 Output signal 3 Output BUSY 28
Black OUT COM Output common - - 28
Black tube FG Frame ground - - -
• Be sure to turn power off before attempting to connect or disconnect the

2 Tighten the connector screw by turning it clockwise. control cable.
• Insert the connector straight so that it is not tilted and then tighten it
securely. Under-tightening can lead to a loose connector due to
vibrations, resulting in poor contact.
* After tightening it as much as possible by hand, tighten it further
NOTICE
approximately 90° - 120° using a tool such as pliers.
• Insulate unused wires individually.
Screw tightening torque: • Be sure to provide Class D ground for the FG wire.
1.5 to 2.0 N·m • The shield and FG wires of the control cable and the shield wire of the
Ethernet cable are electrically connected via the main unit housing. Be
sure to provide them with a common ground.
Connecting the Ethernet cable

1 Align the protrusion in the cable connector with the notch in the
3 Connect the wires according to usage. Ethernet port and connect the cable to the main unit.
z When the I/O terminals are not used
Brown 24 V
24 VDC
Blue 0V
Black tube FG 2 Tighten the connector screw by turning it clockwise.

The screw tightening torque should be within the range between 0.8 to
z NPN wiring
1.0 N·m.
Brown 24 V
Load
Pink/ OUT1 to 3
Light blue/White Screw tightening torque:
0.8 to 1.0 N·m
White and blue IN COM
24 VDC
Green/Gray IN1 to 2
Black OUT COM

• When connecting the connector, insert it so that it does not tilt, and then
push in and tighten the connector securely. Under-tightening can lead to a
Blue 0V loose connector due to vibrations, resulting in poor contact.
NOTICE • After tightening it as much as possible by hand, tighten it further
approximately 5° - 10° using a tool such as pliers.
• Do not bend the base of the Ethernet cable connector repeatedly. It may
Black tube FG
cause connection failure.
z PNP wiring
Connecting the USB cable
Brown 24 V 1 Confirm the orientation and insert the connector straight so that it is
not tilted.
Black OUT COM
Green/Gray IN1 to 2
POWER
24 VDC ETHERNET
USB
White IN COM
and blue
Load
Pink/ OUT1 to 3
Light blue/White
Blue 0V
When connecting, insert the connector straight so it does not tilt. Otherwise,
Black tube FG NOTICE
the connector pin may be damaged.
5 GB SR-2000 UM
2-2 Wiring to a PC Connecting to the MELSEC Series
QJ71C24N/-R2 SR-2000 Series
RD 2 Yellow TxD
RS-232C SD 3 Orange RxD
RS 7 Purple SGND
OP-87527/87528/87529/88307/88308/88309 CS 8
ER 4
Connect the cable to the RS-232C port of the PC. DR 6
z OP-87527/87528/87529/88307/88308/88309 pin arrangement SG 5
CD 1
5 4 3 2 1 D-sub 9-pin (female) D-Sub 9 pin (male)
DTE (terminal definition) M2.6 screw
#4-40 screw (male)

9 8 7 6 Connecting to the SYSMAC Series
Pin number Symbol Description Signal direction PLC SR-2000 Series
2 TXD (SD) RS-232C send Output SD 2 Yellow TxD
3 RXD (RD) RS-232C receive Input RD 3 Orange RxD
5 SGND RS-232C GND - RS 4 Purple SGND
CS 5
OP-87353/87354/87355/87224/87225/87226/88304/88305/ SG 9
D-Sub 9 pin (male)
88306 M2.6 screw
PC SR-2000 Series
Connecting to a peripheral manufactured by KEYENCE
RxD 2 Yellow TxD
TxD 3 Orange RxD • DV-90/N-42
GND(SG) 5 Purple SGND DV-90/N-42 OP-87527/87528/87529/
RTS 7 88307/88308/88309
CTS 8 SD 2 2 TxD
DTR(ER) 4 * This connection can be
RD 3 3 RxD made with the addition of
DSR(DR) 6 the OP-87533 conversion
ER 4 4
D-Sub 9 pin connector.
(female) SG 5 5 SGND * When using the N-42, set the
#4-40 screw DR 6 6 baud rate to 38400 bps or
lower.
RS 7 7
CS 8 8
Ethernet
Connect the OP-87230/87231/87232/88301/88302/88303 cable to the Ethernet
port of the PC. Ethernet
For the Ethernet communication settings, refer to "5-3 Communication
Settings" (page 13). Connect the OP-87230/87231/87232/88301/88302/88303 cable to the Ethernet
port of the PLC.
For the Ethernet communication settings, refer to "5-3 Communication
USB Settings" (page 13).
Connect the OP-51580/86941 cable to the USB port of the PC.
z Installing the USB driver
The first time that you connect the SR-2000 to a PC and turn on the SR-2000,
2-4 Wiring to a Sensor or
you will be prompted to install the driver.
Specify the USB driver inside the "SR-H6W" DVD-ROM to install it. Switch
2-3 Wiring to a PLC or Peripheral Example of wiring the reader to a photoelectric sensor
manufactured by KEYENCE
RS-232C z NPN
Connecting to the KV Series Photoelectric sensor (NPN)
KV-L21V/NC20L(port1) OP-87527/87528/87529/ Brown (red)

KV-N10L/NC10L 88307/88308/88309 IN1 Green Black (white)
RD 2 2 TxD INCOM White and blue Blue (black)
SD 3 3 RxD 24 VDC
ER 4 4
SG 5 5 SGND
z PNP
DR 6 6
Photoelectric sensor (PNP)
RS 7 7
CS 8 8 Blue (black)
IN1 Green Black (white)
KV-L21V/NC20L(port1) SR-2000 Series KV-L21V(port2) SR-2000 Series INCOM White and blue Brown (red)
KV-N10L/NC10L
24 VDC
RD 2 Yellow TxD SD 3 Yellow TxD
SD 3 Orange RxD RD 5 Orange RxD
RS 7 Purple SGND SG 1 Purple SGND Example of wiring the reader to a switch
CS 8
ER 4
DR 6 IN1 Green
SG 5 INCOM White and blue
D-Sub 9 pin
(female)
#4-40 screw
24 VDC
KV-NC20L(port2) SR-2000 Series
RD 4 Yellow TxD
SD 1 Orange RxD
SG 5 Purple SGND
Handheld programmer SR-2000 Series
RD 3 Yellow TxD
SD 5 Orange RxD
SG 4 Purple SGND
Modular Connector
GB SR-2000 UM 6
3-1 Before Mounting When using the optional mounting bracket (OP-87866)
Check the mounting conditions according to the following precautions. 1 Attach the optional mounting bracket to the SR-2000 Series.
Confirm that ambient light is not affecting the reader.

Prevent ambient light—from sources such as sunlight, other lights, and
photoelectric sensors—from entering the light receiving area of the SR-2000
Series. Ambient light may lead to unstable readings or incorrect readings.
Mounting bracket
Shield from
ambient light
Photoelectric Solution
sensor
Change sensor position
Confirm the reader's beam is unobstructed.

If the beams of light are obstructed, the barcode may become undetectable.
• Supplied screw size : M4
• Tightening torque : 0.5 N·m
Obstruction
2 Secure the mounting bracket.
Solution
Mounting screws are not included.
Light
Code Change the position of the obstruction

so that the path of ligaht is unhindered
Use a light shield or a similar object to ensure that the SR-2000 Series does
not receive strong light (direct or reflected) output from a laser marker or
NOTICE
similar device. The SR-2000 Series may be damaged if it receives this kind
of light.
• Mounting screw size : M5
3-2 Mounting Methods

Attaching the OP-88002
4 mm 3 5.0 N·m
Mounting
1 Secure the SR-2000 Series unit with screws. 1

Mounting screws are not included.
2
1
φ12
* Separately prepare a support pole

with a diameter of 12 mm.
• Mounting bracket : M4
• Supplied screw size : 0.5 N·m
• Mounting screw size : M4 Removing the Polarizing Filter (OP-88176/88256)

• Tightening torque : 0.5 N·m
• Screw hole depth of the SR-2000 Series : 5 mm 1 Remove the 6 screws from the polarizing filter.
7 GB SR-2000 UM
2 Press the bottom latch on the polarizing filter to remove it.
Reassembling the Polarizing Filter
When the polarizing filter is removed, the filter may come off as shown below.
Follow the steps below to reassemble it before use.
1 Fit the filter into the frame.
Reading distance
15°
Install the SR-2000 series, placing its scanning surface at the 15° tilt to the surface
of the 2 dimensional code/barcode to read.
Point • Do not place it at the right angle to the 2 dimensional code/barcode. 2 Use your finger to push the packing onto the 6 protruding points.
The reflection at the right angle may cause the reading to be unstable.
• Normally, use the unit with the polarizing filter attached. The filter can
be removed when a sufficient amount of light needs to be obtained
such as for long-distance reading or for reading fast-moving codes.
Installing the Polarizing Filter (OP-88176/88256)
1 Insert the hooks on the top of the polarizing filter into the notches on
the top of the SR-2000 series device.
Install the filter to the read surface of the SR-2000 series device.
Attaching the Lighting Attachment (SR-20AL)
1 Remove the 6 screw from the polarizing filter then, remove the polar-
izing filter.
2 Attach the lighting attachment (SR-20AL).
2 Secure the filter with the 6 included screws

• Tightening torque : 0.5N·m
Attaching the SR-20AH
8 to 16°
• Supplied screw size: 0.5 N·m
35 to 70mm
Code
* The SR-20AH is exclusively for use with the SR-2000.

GB SR-2000 UM 8
3-3 Position Adjustment SR-2000 + SR-20AH (High-resolution type)
Distance
Unit: mm
80
60
Field of View and Installation Distance
40 2048 x 1536
The SR-2000 Series provides a range of installation distances and fields of 20 1280 x 1024
view depending on the type of the reader. Confirm the type of the reader and 0
its field of view. 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
View (Horizontal)
View W
Typical example Unit: mm
2048 x 1536 (pixel) 1280 x1024 (pixel)
Distance
Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical
View H 35 12 9 7 6
45 16 12 10 8
60 22 16 13 11
70 26 19 16 13
Installation distance
Minimum Resolution (Typical)

• 2048 × 1536 (pixels)
View H = View W × 0.75 (W:H=4:3) Applicable code type
• 1280 × 1024 (pixels)
View H = View W × 0.80 (W:H=5:4) • Symbol A
2D code : QR, MicroQR, DataMatrix (ECC200), GS1 DataMatrix
SR-2000 (Full range type) Barcode : CODE39, ITF, NW-7 (Codabar), CODE128, GS1-128,
JAN/EAN/UPC, CODE39 Full ASCII
Distance
Unit: mm • Symbol B
2000
2D code : PDF417, Micro PDF417, GS1 Composite (CC-A, CC-B, CC-C)
1600 Barcode : GS1 DataBar, CODE93, 2of5 (Industrial 2of5), COOP 2of5,
Trioptic CODE39, Pharmacode
1200
800 SR-2000 (Full range type)

400 2048 x 1536
Distance (mm)
1280 x 1024 Unit: mm
2000
0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
1800
View (Horizontal)
1600
Typical example Unit: mm
2048 x 1536(pixel) 1280 x 1024(pixel)
Distance 1400
Width Height Width Height
100 32 24 20 16
1200
200 65 49 41 32
340 111 83 69 55
500 164 123 103 82 1000
700 230 173 144 115
850 280 210 175 140 800
1000 329 247 206 164
1400 461 346 288 230 600
Symbol A
1600 527 395 329 263
2D code
1800 594 445 371 297 400 Barcode
2000 660 495 412 330
Symbol B
3000 990 742 618 495 200 2D code
4000 1320 990 825 660
Barcode
SR-2000W (Super wide-view type) 0
0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.40 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.60
Distance Resolution
Unit: mm
1000
Symbol A Unit: mm Symbol B Unit: mm
800
Distance 2D code Barcode Distance 2D code Barcode
600
100 0.04 100 0.06
400 2048 x 1536
100 to 200 0.06 0.082 100 to 200 0.082 0.082
200 1280 x 1024 100 to 340 0.10 100 to 300 0.125
0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 100 to 500 0.15 0.09 100 to 500 0.21 0.125
View (Horizontal) 100 to 700 0.21 0.125 100 to 600 0.25 0.15
100 to 850 0.25 0.15 100 to 750 0.31 0.19
Typical example Unit: mm 100 to 1000 0.29 0.18 100 to 1000 0.41 0.25
2048 x 1536(pixel) 1280 x 1024(pixel) 100 to 1400 0.41 0.25 100 to 1200 0.49 0.29
Distance
Width Height Width Height
100 to 1600 0.47 0.29 100 to 1400 0.57 0.34
50 57 43 36 28
150 144 108 90 72 100 to 1800 0.53 0.32 100 to 1700 0.69 0.41
250 231 173 144 115 100 to 2000 0.58 0.36 100 to 2000 0.81 0.49
350 317 238 198 158 100 to 3000 0.87 0.54 100 to 3000 1.21 0.73
390 352 264 220 176
100 to 4000 1.16 0.71 100 to 4000 1.62 0.97
500 447 335 279 223
650 577 433 361 288
750 664 498 415 332
900 794 595 496 397
1000 881 661 550 440
1500 1314 989 821 657
9 GB SR-2000 UM
SR-2000W (Super wide-view type) * Postal (Japan Postal code (Japan Postal), IMB (Intelligent Mail Barcode))
• SR-2000 Unit: mm • SR-2000W Unit: mm
Distance (mm)
Unit: mm Distance Postal Distance Postal
1000
100 0.082 50 0.12
900 100 to 300 0.20 50 to 100 0.20
100 to 550 0.36 50 to 150 0.29
800
100 to 750 0.49 50 to 200 0.37
700 100 to 1000 0.65 50 to 250 0.46
600
Point Possible reading distances for the following standardized bar widths
500
are shown below.
Bar width
400
Japan Postal code: 0.5 mm
Symbol A Intelligent Mail Barcode: 0.381 mm
300
2D code Possible reading distance
200 Barcode • SR-2000
Symbol B Japan Postal code: 350 to 750 mm
100 2D code Intelligent Mail Barcode: 300 to 550 mm
Barcode • SR-2000W
0 Japan Postal code: 100 mm to 250 mm
0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70 0.80 0.90 Intelligent Mail Barcode: 100 to 200 mm
Resolution
* Applied scan range
2048×1536
Symbol A Unit: mm Symbol B Unit: mm
Distance 2D code Barcode Distance 2D code Barcode
* DotCode
50 0.063 50 0.082
0.082 0.082 • SR-2000 Unit: mm • SR-2000W Unit: mm
50 to 150 0.126 50 to 100 0.125
50 to 250 0.21 0.125 50 to 180 0.21 0.125 Distance DotCode Distance DotCode
50 to 350 0.28 0.17 50 to 220 0.25 0.15 100 0.082 50 0.12
50 to 390 0.31 0.19 50 to 280 0.32 0.19 100 to 300 0.20 50 to 100 0.20
50 to 500 0.40 0.24 50 to 370 0.41 0.25 100 to 550 0.36 50 to 150 0.29
50 to 650 0.51 0.31 50 to 450 0.50 0.30 100 to 750 0.49 50 to 200 0.37
50 to 750 0.59 0.36 50 to 500 0.55 0.33 100 to 1000 0.65 50 to 250 0.46
50 to 900 0.70 0.43 50 to 770 0.84 0.5
50 to 1000 0.78 0.48 50 to 1000 1.08 0.65
50 to 1500 1.16 0.71 50 to 1500 1.61 0.97
* You can use the "Installation Guide" of AutoID Network Navigator to calculate
the installation distance and the field of view.
SR-2000 + SR-20AH (High-resolution type)

Distance (mm)
Unit: mm
80
60
40
20
Symbol A
2D code
0
0.010 0.020 0.030 Resolution
Symbol A Unit: mm
Distance 2D code Barcode
35 0.012
35 to 45 0.015
0.082
35 to 60 0.020
35 to 70 0.025
GB SR-2000 UM 10
4-1 Tuning When tuning is complete, the reading rate test mode screen is displayed.
What Is Tuning?
With just a simple operation, the SR-2000 Series automatically adjusts the reading This completes the tuning procedure.
parameters to the optimal values based on the target codes and stores these
parameters in its internal memory. This function is called "Tuning." Point • The pointer position is an approximation of the center position of the
This chapter explains how to use the unit's buttons to complete tuning. field of view. The center may be offset depending on the distance.
Make adjustments while watching the unit's display screen.
* For details on how to complete tuning using AutoID Network Navigator, refer to • For details on how to complete tuning using AutoID Network
Navigator, refer to "5-2 Reading Settings" (page 12).
"5-2 Reading Settings" (page 12).
Operation Procedure
1 Turn on the SR-2000 Series.

4-2 Reading Check
* Refer to "4-3 Initial Power-on Operation Setup" (page 11) for more informa-
tion on how to power the reader on for the first time.
Display
2 Align the green pointer with the code.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Displays the reading rate, which indicates the number of

(1) Reading rate
times the code could be read among 10 scans
3 Perform the following procedure. (2) Matching level Displays the reading stability (0 to 100)*1
If you press the [ENTER] button on this screen, the live view of
the SR-2000 Series will be displayed.
(3) Live View display

(1)
Switch to the MENU screen.
*1 For details on the matching level, refer to "9-8 Matching level" (page 68).
(2)
Switch to the Tuning screen.

4-3 Initial Power-on Operation
Setup
(3) Display content
Switch to the Auto Focus Selection screen
The SR-2000 series displays the following information when the power is turned on
(4) for the first time.
Use the following methods to configure the IP address.
ON/OFF selection Switch to the Bank Selection screen
(1) Press [ENTER] bottom twice to select ENT when the device starts with an IP
address of 192.168.100.100.
(2) Refer to "5-1 Connecting" (page 12) to configure IP addresses over USB.
(3) Refer to "6-37 Allocate IP Addresses to Multiple Devices" (page 38) to
(5)
configure IP addresses over Ethernet.
Select Bank Execute tuning.

Select a bank or
smart selection
The LED flashes and tuning starts.
Normally mount the reader on a surface

such that the reader is level.
If reading fails, try to set the reader at an
angle and complete tuning.
11 GB SR-2000 UM
5-1 Connecting 5-2 Reading Settings
Installing AutoID Network Navigator Tuning

Run "AutoID Launcher.exe" inside the "AutoID Network Navigator" folder of the
SR-H6W, and then install the program by following the instructions on the screen.
1 Click [Start monitor].
* Refer to the AutoID Network Navigator Specifications "17-1 Specifications" The images scanned by the SR-2000 Series will be displayed in real time.
Watch the images to confirm the code positions.
(page 116).
Important • To install AutoID Network Navigator, log on as a user with

Administrator rights.
• Install ".Net Framework 3.5 SP1" before you install AutoID Network
Navigator. You do not have to install it again if it is already installed.
• If the UAC (User Account Control) dialog box is displayed during the
installation, click [Continue].
• Exit all active applications before starting the installation. The
installation of the software may be impeded by security software.
• To uninstall AutoID Network Navigator, double-click the
corresponding program in the list shown in the following location.
From the [Control Panel] screen, click [Uninstall a program].
Opening AutoID Network Navigator and Connecting to

the Reader 2 Click [Auto focus].
The focus of the SR-2000 Series is adjusted automatically.
1 Connect the OP-51580/86941 cable to the USB port of the PC.
2 Double-click the "AutoID Network Navigator" shortcut on the

desktop.
If the following information is displayed, the connection has been established.
Point
3 Click [Start tuning].
• To connect to the reader from AutoID Network Navigator, you can use The SR-2000 Series automatically adjusts the reading parameters to the
the following two methods:
(1) Connect through the USB interface. optimal values based on the target code.
Reading settings are adjusted when the tuning complete message is
(2) Connect through the Ethernet interface.
displayed.
Normally connect to the reader through the USB interface. If you want to
connect to the reader through the Ethernet interface, refer to
"6-36 Connect to AutoID Network Navigator over Ethernet" (page 37). Reading Check
• When you connect to the reader through the USB interface, you can
only connect to one SR-2000 Series unit per PC. To set up two or Reading rate test
more SR-2000 Series units, connect to one unit at a time.
1 Click the “ ” button, which is accessible from [Test] - [Reading].
2 The reading rate is displayed in the location indicated below.
GB SR-2000 UM 12
3 Move the code within the field of view to check that the code can be
read stably.
5-3 Communication Settings
4 Clicking " " will finish the reading rate test.
RS-232C Connection
Point The "Cell size," "Code size," and "Resolution" displayed during the
reading rate test are approximate values calculated from the image
data. 1 Click the [RS-232C] tab.
When using the SR-20AH, check the box shown below. Doing so will display the
2 Configure the following items to match the PC/PLC that you will
cell size and code size based on the magnification ratio of the SR-20AH. connect to.
Test modes
Measures and displays the reading rate, which indicates the
(1) Reading Rate Test
number of times the code could be read among 10 scans
(2) Tact Test Measures and displays the time required for reading
Displays an approximation of the reading depth by virtually
(3) Depth Test
changing the distance from the current mounting distance
Represents the traceable target speed based on the
(4) Speed test Reference • For details on RS-232C, refer to "11-1 Serial Communication"
successful number of continuous reads.
Code quality verification Displays the code quality verification results of images
(page 75).
(5) • If you will use the PLC link function, refer to "13-1 PLC Link
test scanned using specified parameter banks.
Overview" (page 89).
Point If you want to configure the code reading settings, refer to the following
topics.
• To widen the field of view:
Ethernet Connection
"6-1 Change Field of View" (page 16)
• To read multiple types of codes:
"6-2 Read Multiple Codes" (page 16)
1 Click the [Ethernet] tab.
• To read moving codes:
"6-13 Reading at a Specific Speed and Depth" (page 22) 2 Set the IP address and other values to those assigned to the SR-
2000 Series.
Important The measurement results of the depth test and speed test are only
guides. Perform performance conformation with actual work before
operation certainly.
3 Click [Start the setup wizard], and then configure the communication
settings by following the instructions on the screen.
Point If you want to change the subnet mask, change the following value to
one in the range of 8 to 30.
Example) 24 Æ 255.255.255.0
16 Æ 255.255.0.0
8 Æ 255.0.0.0
Reference
IP address Specify a unique IP address on the network.
Match this value with that of the device that you will
Subnet Mask
connect to.
Normally leave this setting at its default value. Only
Default Gateway use this setting in circumstances when you are
using a router.
13 GB SR-2000 UM
Setup Wizard 5-4 Sending Settings
You can easily configure the Ethernet settings by following the instructions in the
setup wizard. Send the settings that you have selected with AutoID Network Navigator to the SR-
2000 Series. Sending the settings changes the settings on the reader.
Example) TCP communication with a PC
1 Trigger input method Sending Settings

Select the reading trigger input method.
1 Click [Send Configuration].
The trigger input will be provided by a sensor or switch wired to
I/O terminal input
the SR-2000 Series.
The trigger input will be provided by way of commands sent
Command input
from the host (PC).
When the settings are being changed, the display of the

[Send Configuration] icon changes to that shown below.
2 When a message indicating that the transmission is complete is

displayed, click [OK].
3 When you finish configuring the settings, click the following button.
The communication between AutoID Network Navigator and the SR-2000
2 Destination for of read data Series will be disconnected.
This completes the setting procedure.

3 Communication protocol
Important • Communication between the SR-2000 Series and a PLC or other

communication device is enabled when the connection with AutoID
Network Navigator is disconnected.
• Note that data cannot be sent to a PLC or similar device while the SR-
2000 Series is connected to AutoID Network Navigator.
4 Detailed settings
Enter the IP address and port number of the PC that you will connect to, and
then click [Completed].

Reference • Use the [Table] tab to change the header or terminator.
• For information on communication other than that described above,
refer to the following topics.
• Detailed Ethernet settings
"11-2 Socket Communication (TCP, UDP)" (page 75)
• PLC link
"13-1 PLC Link Overview" (page 89)
• EtherNet/IP
"14-1 EtherNet/IP Overview" (page 96)
• PROFINET
"15-1 PROFINET Overview" (page 109)
• TCP Settings
GB SR-2000 UM 14
5-5 Saving Settings/ 3 Click [Print].
• Printout example
Quick Setup Codes
The AutoID Network Navigator settings can be saved as *.ptc files. This is useful
when you want to check the SR-2000 Series settings at a later time and when you
want to configure a newly purchased SR-2000 Series with the same settings.
Saving a Configuration File
1 Click the [Save] button.
2 Select the location in which to save the file, enter the file name, and
then click [Save].
Point • Reading configuration files
"8-2 Restoring Settings (AutoID Network Navigator)" (page 44)
• If you have configured settings for use in script programming such as
the edit data function, edit image file name function, or the OUT
terminal control function, a message regarding the saving of the
script file will be displayed.
Printing Quick Setup Codes

Create a quick setup code that is based on the settings changed in AutoID
Network Navigator. You can change the settings on the SR-2000 Series by having
it read the printed code.
Point • When a printer with low print quality is used, the cells in the 2D code
1 Click the [Quick Setup Code Creation] button. may bleed and become unreadable. Be sure to use a printer with 300
dpi or greater for printing.
• For details on how to read quick setup codes, refer to
"8-3 Restoring Settings (Quick Setup Code)" (page 44).
• "Quick setup code" does not include preset data.
• "Quick setup code" does not include script files.
• "Quick setup code" does not include command replacement file.
2 If necessary, enter comments.

Remarks This comment will be added to the quick setup code printout.
15 GB SR-2000 UM
6-1 Change Field of View 6-2 Read Multiple Codes
SR-2000 Series field of view sizes
Default value 1280 × 1024 pixels
Minimum value 320 × 96 pixels 1 Click [Auto focus].
Maximum value 2048 × 1536 pixels
2 Draw a region around each code to limit the tuning area.
Widening the Field of View
1 Change [Image capture range] to "2048×1536."
2 Execute tuning.
Limiting the Field of View
123 123 4 Select [Entire area] to read the codes in the entire image region.
Click [Detailed Display] to display the maximum number of reads for each
code. Change the values in the right-most column and click OK to change the
maximum number.
1 Change [Image capture range] to "User setting."
2 The image capture range window will be displayed. Click [Capture].
3 Use the mouse to limit the image capture range by dragging it, and
then click [OK].
4 Execute tuning.
Reference • The wider you make the field of view, the longer the reading time will
be.
• The narrower you make the field of view, the shorter the reading time
will be.
GB SR-2000 UM 16
6-3 Read multiple codes in a 6 Select [Selected area], and then click [OK].
Grid
1 Click [Auto focus].
2 Right-click the on-screen image. Click [Add multiple areas].
7 The configuration is complete once the following screen appears.
3 Enter the proper value into [Quantity] under [Placement settings].
6-4 Read Multiple of the Same

Code/Same Type of Code
4 Drag the area so that all codes are within the extent. Click [OK] once
you have finished making the adjustment. 1 Click [Auto focus].
2 Draw a region around each code.
17 GB SR-2000 UM
4 The following message appears once the tuning process completes.
Click [OK].
3 Select the sort method and click [Execute] to change the number
sorting.
* Use the center coordinate for sorting. You can do this easier by using the
procedure described in "6-3 Read multiple codes in a Grid" (page 17)
together.
5 The configuration is complete once the following screen appears.
AscendingOrder using Y Descending Order using X

Center Coordinate Center Coordinate
Important Each region must be clearly defined to read multiple of the same code/ DescendingOrder using Y Descending Order using X
same type of code. Center Coordinate Center Coordinate
6-5 Change the Sort Order of

Region number.
6-6 Determine the Success/
Failure of Reading for Each
1 Right-click the on-screen image. Click [Sort areas].
* Execute this operation when not operating in Test mode or when triggers
Area
are active.
1 Enable multiple code reading according to the 6-3 or 6-4 procedure.
2 Click .
The region numbers are displayed as shown below.
2 Click the desired region number. Click [U] or [V] to move to the
desired number. Press [OK].
For example, to change from number 3 to number 4, click [3] and then [V].
GB SR-2000 UM 18
3 Go to the [Table] tab, and set [Misc] - [Multiple code output format] to 3 Run the tuning process.
[Per area]. Selection of the polarizing filter uses the value selected at always on mode
(Automatic adjustment by tuning is not performed)
4 Set [Timing Mode] under [Operation] to [Level trigger] and set

[Reading Mode] to [Continuous].
Output result
5 Set [Input Polarity] under [I/O] to [Norm. dosed], set [Function] under
[IN1 terminal] to [Timing], and select the [Power-on trigger] radio button.
12345,ERROR,12345[CR] 12345,12345,ERROR[CR]
6-7 Read Codes in Always On

Mode 6 Click [Send Configuration].
1 Open [Bank] and then set [Lit at all times] to [Enable].

Point When always on mode is being used, operation is as follows.
Select the lighting pattern.
• Regardless of the bank setting, the exposure time operates below 700μs.
• The intensity of LED lighting is weakened for 1 second every 3 seconds.
6-8 Read Barcodes in Specific

Orientations
Ex.: Configure the software to read barcodes only when in a vertical orientation.
OK ERROR OK ERROR
1 Click [Code direction (1D)] under [Common] in the desired [Bank].

Deselect the Horizontal barcode check box.
19 GB SR-2000 UM
6-10 Read DotCode
1 Press the [ ] button and open the [Symbology] tab.
2 Select the "20:DotCode" check box.

With DotCode selected, other codes cannot be selected.
3 Select "20:DotCode" under [Code-specific setting] and then click

[Details].
Point • When 1 to 3 boxes are checked among 4 boxes, reading is performed

at ±45°from the setting direction.
• When all 4 boxes are checked, reading is performed at 360°.
6-9 Increase Responsiveness

to Print Changes
4 Enter the numbers of rows and columns of DotCode and then click
[OK].
Number of columns (long side)

1 Press the [ ] button and select the [Smart] check box under
[Target bank] Click [OK].
Number of rows
5 Click [OK].
6 Execute tuning.
After tuning, check that the code can be read stably in the test mode.
Point • If reading multiple DotCodes, up to 10 codes can be read.

• Be sure to specify the area for each code before reading multiple
DotCodes ([Selected area]). With [Entire area] selected, reading
cannot be performed properly.
• Refer to "6-2 Read Multiple Codes (Page 16)" and "6-3 Read
2 Run the tuning process. multiple codes in a Grid (Page 17)".
14 parameter banks are generated (bank 1 to bank 14).
GB SR-2000 UM 20
6-11 Ensuring Determined Ranges 4 Enter, [Depth: 50 mm][Height: 100 mm], and [Width: 200 mm].
(Vertical-Horizontal) and Depth
Depth
Vertical
Horizontal
Ex.: Vertical: 100 mm, Horizontal: 200 mm Depth: 50 mm
1 Click [Tuning Consultant] under [Codes to read].
5 Adjust the SR-2000 series to the configured tuning distance. The

current distance to the target appears in green. Click [Start tuning].
2 Click [Start Monitor]. Place a code at a distance of 200 mm or less

and then click [Auto focus] to measure the cell size. Once this
completes, click [Next]
Within 200 mm 6 The adjustment procedure is complete when tuning successfully

completes.
* Refer to "9-4 Read Behavior" - " Assisted tuning" (page 51) if advice
messages appear.
The recommended installation distance is indicated with reference to the
tallest work.
3 Click [Next].
Refer to "6-13 Reading at a Specific Speed and Depth" (page 22) for more
information on moving codes.
21 GB SR-2000 UM
6-12 Confirm Speed Traceability 6-13 Reading at a Specific
Speed and Depth
1 Select the desired bank to tune.
2 Click [Speed].
Depth
Speed
Ex.: Speed: 60 m/min Depth: 50 mm
2 The monitor starts. Place a code at a distance of 200 mm or less and

then click [Auto focus] to measure the cell size. Once this completes,
click [Stop monitor] and then [Next].
3 Click [Play]. The speed will be measured when the code is moved
while the SR-2000 is emitting light. The following screen appears.
Consider adjusting the SR-2000 series device to the following suggested

values.
• Two Images
Read errors are more likely to occur if the current read conditions are
changed.
When reading is not good, adjust the light emission timing by using the
3 Click [X-direction] under [Direction].
timing sensor. Refer to "6-16 Adjust the Light Emission Timing" (page 25).
• Three or More Images
This state is ideal. Operation can continue without problems as long as
changes to conditions are not significant.
Important The results of this test mode are merely suggestions. Use this
information to help you determine if any potential operational changes
will have a negative impact on operation.
4 Enter [60 m/min] under [Speed].

Enter the distance between codes and the read frequency if known.
GB SR-2000 UM 22
5 Enter [Depth: 50 mm].
6-14 Depth-directional Reads
Speed
Ex.: Speed: 60 m/min
6 Adjust the SR-2000 series to the configured tuning distance. The

current distance to the target appears in green. Click [Start tuning].

7 The adjustment procedure is complete when tuning is successfully

completed.
messages appear.
The recommended installation distance is indicated with reference to the
tallest work.
3 Click [Z-direction] under [Direction].
Important The tuning result is obtained when only one bank is operated.
23 GB SR-2000 UM
4 Enter [60 m/min] under [Speed].
Enter the distance between codes and the read frequency if known.
6-15 Reading Codes on the Side of
Rotating Cylindrical Objects
Ex.: Rotating speed: 60 rpm, Diameter: 100 mm
5 Enter [Vertical] under [Reader orientation].

Enter a suitable value for [Installation angle] under [Installation condition 1 Click [Tuning Consultant] under [Codes to read].
details].

* Reader Orientation
Horizontal: Direction of movement and SR-2000 scanning direction are
parallel
Vertical: Direction of movement and SR-2000 scanning direction are
perpendicular Within 200 mm
6 Run the tuning process.
7 The following message appears once the tuning process completes

successfully.
messages appear.
3 Click [Rotating] under [Direction].
4 Enter [60 rpm] under [Rotational speed] and [100 mm] under [Diameter].
Also enter the Takt time now.
GB SR-2000 UM 24
5 Set [Reader orientation] to [Horizontal]. 2 Press [OK] to start tuning.
Setting this to [Width] to perform the calculation with the lateral code
movement as a factor.
* Calculation is performed with the readable degree of rotation set to 90°. 3 Enter the timing for the same conditions of actual operation.
6 Run the tuning process.
7 The following message appears once the tuning process completes

successfully.
messages appear.
4 The following screen appears once tuning completes. The timing

input time is the minimum duration of time to input the timing signal.
Click [Apply the settings and finish].
When the timing signal is input more than once, the shortest trigger ON delay
is set.
When it is configured to the burst mode, the burst capture interval is also
configured.
Important The tuning result is the result of using 90° as the readable degree of
rotation. The readable degree of rotation varies depending on print
quality and material. Use this information to help you determine if any
potential operational changes will have a negative impact on operation.
6-16 Adjust the Light Emission

Timing
* In burst mode, adjust the burst scan interval, too.
1 Click [Operation], then [Timing], [Trigger delay], and then [Trigger

delay Adjustment].
Point After configuration, input a timing signal lager than “timing input
time”appeared in 4.
6-17 Change Reading Behavior

* Send the configuration first if the following message appears.
Reading Mode
Change the reading behavior for a single trigger input.
Single In this mode, a single code is read while the trigger input is on.
In this mode, multiple codes are read consecutively while the
trigger input is on.
Continuous
* You cannot specify any bank. Multiple code settings do not apply
to the operation.
In this mode, a single code is read by scanning multiple times while
Burst read
the trigger input is on.
25 GB SR-2000 UM
Data Transmission 6-19 Advanced Multi-head Mode
Change the timing in which the read data and the OUT terminal results are output.
The read data and the OK/ERROR signal will be output immediately
Send after read
after the code is read.
The read data and the OK/ERROR signal will be output when the
Send after timing off
trigger input turns off, not immediately after the code is read.
Use the Advanced Multi-head
Timing Mode If there is not enough view with one unit, use the Advanced Multi-head to secure
Change the reading behavior according to the input time of the trigger signal. the necessary view.
While the trigger input is on, the LED lights and the SR-2000 Series Configuration Procedure
Level trigger is reading.
When a code is read, the LED turns off and the data is transmitted. • Master
On the rising edge of the trigger input, the LED lights only for the Set the [Ethernet] IP address.
One-shot trigger specified time. The SR-2000 Series is reading during this time.
When a code is read, the LED turns off and the data is transmitted.
Duplicate Reading Prevention

This function is only used when the reading mode is set to "Continuous". This
function prevents duplicate reading of the same code.
Duplicate Reading Set the [Operation] - [Master-Slave] operation settings, Group name and
The same code will not be read for the specified length of time. device ID.
Prevention Interval
Reference For details on reading behavior, refer to "9-4 Read Behavior" (page 49)
6-18 Control Multiple Readers
• Slave
Master/Slave Set the [Ethernet] IP address.
The master outputs its read data to the host device.

The slaves output their data to the master.
Operation Setting
Not used Use this setting when you will not control multiple readers.
Use this setting when you will install multiple readers on multiple
Multi Drop
lines and collect all the output data in a single reader. Set the [Operation] - [Master-Slave] operation settings, Group name and
Use this setting when you will install multiple readers for reading a device ID.
Multi Head
single target and collect all the output data in a single reader.
Usable with SR-2000 series devices only. This Multi-head mode is
Advanced Multi-head capable of reading multiple codes and editing read data scripts for
slave units.
Group name
Normally do not change this setting.
Only use when you want to configure multiple master/slave groups on the same
network.
Unit ID
Check this box to assign the reader as the master unit. * Set the Group name to the same as the master device.
Use as Master
Clear this check box to use the reader as a slave unit. * Set the device ID to a different ID from the master device and other slave
You can specify an ID (1 to 31) for use in distinguishing slaves from devices.
Slave ID
each other.
Reference Refer to "9-6 Master/Slave Function" (page 55).

Append Information
Add group name The "Group name" will be appended to the read data.
The "Unit ID" will be appended to the read data.
Add Master/Slave ID Master: 0
Slave: 1 to 31
Point • Specify a unique ID for each slave.

• The ID of the master is 0.
Reference For details on the master/slave function, refer to "9-6 Master/Slave

Function" (page 55)
GB SR-2000 UM 26
6-20 Check Print Quality Code Quality Verification Measurement Test Mode
1 Select the applicable bank for which the tuning has completed.
2 Click [Code quality verification].
Matching Level
The matching level is a numeric value that indicates how easily the SR-2000
Series read a code. The higher the value, the easier it is to read the code. (The
value ranges from 0 to 100.)
98 74
Matching Level
Set whether or not to use the matching level.
Judgment
Set the matching level threshold. The UNSTABLE signal can be
Verification threshold output from the OUT terminal when the reading results are below
the threshold.
The matching level will be appended to the read data.
Append matching level
Example) <Read data>:<matching level>
Reference For details on the matching level, refer to "9-8 Matching level" (page 68)
Code Quality Verification

The code quality verification function verifies the 2D code scanned with the SR-
2000 Series according to a marking quality evaluation specified by a third-party 3 Click [Play]. Once reading is performed, the following display will
institution. appear if the code quality verification is successful.
A F
Code quality verification

You can select from the following verification standards:
• ISO/IEC 15415
• ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM DPM-1-2006)
• ISO/IEC 15416
• SAE AS9132
• SEMI T10-0701
• ISO/IEC 16022
Set the threshold for the verification result. The UNSTABLE signal
Verification threshold can be output from the OUT terminal when the reading results are
below the threshold. 4 The verification result display for a DataMatrix code and QR code
The verification grade will be appended to the read data. can be switched to that of a code quality verification standard
Append grade
Example) <Read data>:<verification grade> selected from the following list.
You can change the verification grade expression.
Select expression of
• Alphabet
grades
• Numeric
Append detailed You can append the detailed verification result when an "Append
verification result grade" check box is selected.
Important Note that the code quality verification function is designed to evaluate
the printing quality of the standard-compliant 2D codes in the images
scanned with the SR-2000 Series. This function cannot be used as an
official 2D code verification device.
Point To perform a more accurate code quality verification measurement test,
use a bank for which tuning has been performed with the code quality
Reference For details on the code quality verification function, refer to "9-7 verification function enabled.
Code Quality Verification" (page 58)
Important • The code quality verification measurement test mode supports the
following standards.
ISO/IEC 15415, ISO/IEC TR 29158(AIM DPM-1-2006), ISO/IEC 15416
Code verification of ethical drugs in Japan
• Code quality verification results vary depending on the settings for
the selected bank, installation condition of the SR-2000 Series, etc.
27 GB SR-2000 UM
6-21 Edit Read Data 6-22 Changing the Sort Order of
Data
Data Addition Function

1 Click [Auto focus].
You can append the following items to read data.
2 Draw a region around each code.
Symbology The read code type
Symbol ID The AIM symbol identifier
The number of scans from the time when the trigger turned on to
Read count
the time when reading finished
The length of time from when the trigger turned on to when reading
Read time
finished
The number of the parameter bank that was used when reading
Parameter bank
succeeded
Region number Region number corresponding to the read data
Code vertex The coordinates of the vertex of the read code
Code center The coordinates of the center of the read code
ECC level (UEC) The unused error correction ratio* 1
Time The time when the code was read* 2
Image file name The file name of the captured image
*1 The average value will be appended when multiple codes are read for one
scan. 3 Click [Start tuning].
*2 To use this function, an SNTP server is required.
Data Editing (Script)

With the SR-2000 Series, you can edit the read data to output in the desired format
by programming scripts.
Reference For details on scripts, refer to "9-9 Preset Data Comparison" (page
68)
Format 4 The following message appears once the tuning process completes.
Check [Selected area]. Click [OK].
The character that is used to delimit the blocks of data when data is
Partition mark appended
Default value: ":"
The character that is used to delimit the blocks of data when
Inter-delimiter multiple codes are read
Default value: ","
Reference • When you want to limit the number of digits output from the read
data enable [Output length limitation] under [Code] on the [Bank]
tab, and then set the following items.
• "Mode"
• "Output length"
• "Starting position"
Example) 5 Select [Multi-code reading results] and click [Trigger].

• "Mode" = Forward Reading data is displayed in the bottom right.
• "Output length" = 5
• "Starting position" = 2
The second digit from the front
4 9 1 2 3 4 5 6
Number of digits output: 5
GB SR-2000 UM 28
6 Click [Output order setting]. For example, if you want to output data
in order of area, click [Area number] Æ [U] several times to move
6-23 Control the I/O Terminals
[Area number] to the top. Click [OK].
Input Terminals (IN Terminals)

Input Polarity
Norm. open The input is normally off.
(normally open) When a signal is applied, the input turns on.
Norm. closed The input is normally on.
(normally closed) When a signal is applied, the input turns off.
Required Input Duration

The time from the point when a signal is applied to the IN terminal to the point
when operation begins.
IN1 Function and IN2 Function

Set the operation when a signal is applied to the IN terminal.
Disable This terminal's function will be disabled.
Timing Reading will be executed.
Reading will be executed in order to register master data for use in
Preset
a preset comparison.
Test The specified test mode will start.
Capture An image will be captured with the SR-2000.
If a PLC link error has occurred, the reader will recover from the
Clear PLC link error
error.
Reading will be locked such that it is not executed even if a trigger
7 Click [Trigger] to confirm that the sequence has changed. Trigger lock
signal is applied.
Quick setup A quick setup code will be read.* 1
Tuning Tuning will be executedd.* 1
Timing input start Starts the read when the timing signal rises.
Timing input stop Stops the read when the timing signal rises.
Encoder input start Starts the read via encoder input.
Encoder input stop Stops the read via encoder input.
Encoder input start and
Starts and stops the read via encoder input.
stop
Data output Outputs the read data when the timing signal rises.
Encoder (output) Outputs the read data via encoder input.
Encoder (start and output) Starts the read and outputs the read data via encoder input.
Encoder (stop and output) Stops the read and outputs the read data via encoder input.
8 Click [Complete].
Encoder
(start and stop and output)
Starts/stops the read and outputs the read data via encoder input.
Operates in accordance with the configuration of the command

Command replacement
replacement function.
*1 The trigger signal must be applied continuously until the operation is finished.
Power-on trigger
When the SR-2000 Series turns on, the IN terminal signal will be turned on once.
You can use this setting when "Input Polarity" is set to "Norm. closed" to keep the
signal turned on continuously when the SR-2000 Series turns on.
z Norm. open (normally open) and Norm. closed (normally closed)
operation
Norm. open (normally open)
• Normal
Timing input
ON
Reading operation
Norm. closed (normally closed)

• Normal
Timing input
ON
Reading operation
• Power-on trigger setting
Timing input
ON
Reading operation
Point • To prevent chattering, increase "Required Input Duration".

• Regardless of the "Timing Mode" setting, "Test," "Capture," "Trigger
lock," and "Quick setup" input functions always operate as if this
setting is "Level trigger."
29 GB SR-2000 UM
Output Terminals (OUT Terminals) 6-24 Performing an Encoder
OUT1 Function to OUT3 Function Input
The signals turn on under the following conditions.
OK Reading success
ERROR Reading error
STABLE Greater than or equal to the threshold*1 The signal of the encoder used for position detection is used for timing input.
UNSTABLE Less than the threshold*1 Maximum detectable frequency: 500 Hz
Successful reading for the registration of master data for use in
PRESET OK
preset comparison
TUNING OK Tuning success 1 Set [IN * Function] of [I/O] to [Encoder].
SCRIPT CONTROL When controlling OUT terminals with scripts
NG (Comparison NG) NG Comparison in preset comparison
TRG BUSY During trigger input*2

Forced trigger lock/during trigger input or testing by way of main
LOCK BUSY
unit button operations
While quick setup codes are being read, during test mode, while
MODE BUSY
saving to ROM, during the timing automatic adjustment
ERR BUSY Error occurrence (buffer full or reader error)
CONFIG BUSY AutoID Network Navigator control
READY Notification of the timing input ready state
2 Select [Start], [Stop], or [Start & stop] for [Encoder].
SR-2000 reading*3
EXT. LIGHT
3 Set [Number of start pulses] [Number of stop pulses] [Number of
*1 This corresponds to the matching level threshold or code quality verification pulses in the off state] in [Encoder settings].
threshold.
*2 While this signal is on, the next reading operation will not be received. 4 Click [Send Configuration].
This signal also turns on in the following situations:
During the start-up period, during preset data registration, while images are
being sent to an FTP server, during tuning, during test mode, while
monitoring, while images are being saved, while quick setup codes are being
read, and during script execution
*3 Use this to synchronize the reader with an external light. This function can
only be assigned to OUT3. Timing chart
Output Duration (1) (2) (3) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (1) (2) (3) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (1) (2) (3) (1)
Pulse
Set the duration for which output will be generated from the OUT terminal. Number of Number of
start pulses stop pulses
Default value: 500 ms
Scanning +
TRG BUSY at Power-On decoding
Use this function to turn on the "TRG BUSY" signal from the time when the power is (1) (2) (1) (2) (3) (1) (2) (3) (4) (1) (2) (1) (2) (3) (1) (2) (3) (4) (1)
turned on until the time that stable operation is possible. When stable operation is Pulse
Number of Number of Number of stop pulses
possible, this signal turns off. off state pulses start pulses
Scanning +
decoding
Point * The number of off state pulses does not operate immediately after startup.
• The following commands/sets of commands cannot be assigned to
the same terminal: "OK/ERROR/STABLE/UNSTABLE/PRESET OK/
TUNING OK/SCRIPT CONTROL/REFERENCE NG", "TRG BUSY/LOCK
BUSY/MODE BUSY/ERR BUSY/CONFIG BUSY", "READY", and
"EXT.LIGHT".
• If a subsequent output instance occurs during the output duration,
this output will be given priority.
Period of time set for output ON time
ON
OUT1
(OK)
ON
OUT2
(NG) Period of time set for output ON time
• If multiple output instances occur during the output duration, the

output will be turned off for 10 ms, and then the subsequent signal
will be turned on. If output instances occur continuously, the output
turns on for at least 10 ms before it turns off and then turns on again.)
ON
OUT1 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms
(OK)
Period of time set for output ON time
• The BUSY signal (TRG BUSY/LOCK BUSY/ MODE BUSY/ERR BUSY/

CONFIG BUSY) operation is shown below.
Event occurrence Event end
Event occurrence
TRG BUSY/
LOCK BUSY/
ON
MODE BUSY/
ERR BUSY/
CONFIG BUSY Period of time set for output ON time
• Regardless of the value set for Output Duration, BUSY signals remain
on until the corresponding BUSY operation is finished.
• If multiple BUSY signals are set for a single output terminal, the signal
will remain on until all the BUSY operations are finished.
GB SR-2000 UM 30
6-25 Performing an Encoder Usable Reading Modes and Protocols
Output Reading modes

Reading modes Encoder output
Single 3
Continuous1 -
The signal of the encoder used for position detection is used for data output Burst 3
timing control. Script 3
The number of pulses is counted from the start of reading, and the data is output
when the set number is reached. Protocol
Point • Maximum detectable frequency: 500 Hz Protocol Encoder output
Select and adjust a rotary encoder whose speed is less than or equal
to this value. Non-procedure 3
• Select a rotary encoder that is driven by a 24 VDC power supply. TCP/UDP 3
MC protocol -
SYSWAY -
1 Set [IN* Function] of [I/O] to [Encoder]. KV STUDIO -
EtherNet/IP -
PROFINET -
Master/Slave
Reading modes Encoder output
Multi Drop -
Multi Head -
Advanced Multi-head 3
2 Select [Output] for [Encoder].

Other
The following functions can be used but are not linked with the encoder output.
Encoder output
Reading rate test -
Read time test -
Ethernet data (FTP) -
Command response -
Trigger on delay - 1
OUT terminal output - 2
3 Set [Number of output pulses] in [Encoder settings]. *1 Regardless of the trigger on delay setting, pulses are counted from the
point in time that the timing signal is identified.
*2 Regardless of the encoder output setting, data is output from the OUT
terminal immediately after reading finishes.
Timing chart
When reading is successful When reading failed
Timing input
Code
(1) (2) (3) (4) (1) (2) (3) (4)
Pulse
Number of Number of
output pulses output pulses
Scanning + decoding
Read data ERROR

Data communication
* Reference: With the [Start & stop & output] encoder setting
Code
(1) (2) (1) (2) (3) (1) (2) (1) (2) (1) (2) (1) (2) (3) (1) (2) (1) (2)
Number of Number of Number of Number of

start pulses stop pulses start pulses stop pulses
Pulse
(1) (2) (3) (4) (1) (2) (3) (4)
Number of output pulses Number of output pulses
Scanning + decoding
Read data ERROR
Data communication
Important If the set number of output pulses has passed when reading finishes,
the data is output immediately.
31 GB SR-2000 UM
6-26 Detecting Possibility of a 6-27 Save Captured Images
Timing Input
Saving Images in Real Time

The READY terminal notifies the state in which the timing input is possible (the
state that is not “BUSY state”). Send by FTP
Images captured by the SR-2000 Series will be sent to the FTP server in real time.
1 Set [OUT *] of [I/O] to [READY].
Example) Sending images to the FTP server when a reading error occurs
1 Select "Send by FTP" under [Error Images].
2 Set the IP address of the FTP server to send data to.

Set the user name and password to match an account on the FTP server.

Timing chart
POWER (24 VDC) Importing Images Saved on the SR-2000 Series to a PC

Timing input
Save to RAM
BUSY *
Images captured by the SR-2000 Series will be saved to its RAM.
READY
Example) Saving images to RAM when a reading error occurs
* BUSY : TRG BUSY/ LOCK BUSY/ MODE BUSY/ ERR BUSY/ CONFIG BUSY
BUSY *
1 Select "Save to RAM" under [Error Image].
READY 2 Click [Send Configuration].
* BUSY : TRG BUSY/ LOCK BUSY/ MODE BUSY/ ERR BUSY/ CONFIG BUSY File View
To acquire the files saved to the SR-2000 Series RAM, use "File View."
For details on how to use File View, refer to "7-5 Acquire files stored on the SR-
2000 Series (File View)" (page 42)
Changing the Image Quality of Saved Images

Format
You can select Bitmap or JPEG.
z Quality (JPEG)
Select the JPEG quality. "10" gives the highest quality. "1" gives the lowest qual-
ity.
Binning
You can sub-sample the image to reduce the file size.
"No binning" gives the largest image.
"1/64" gives the smallest image.
Changing the Image Save Mode

Image save mode
The last image captured during reading will be saved.
Save final bank image
Normally use this mode.
Save specified number
The specified number of images will be saved counting from the
of images after timing
time when the trigger turns on.* 1
ON
Save specified number
The specified number of images will be saved counting backwards
of images before timing
from the time when the trigger turns off.* 1
OFF
*1 Images will be saved as the "capture image."
The saved image is determined when the reader judges whether reading was
successful or a reading error occurred.
GB SR-2000 UM 32
z Save final bank image
Image File Name
The image file name is set in the following format:
Timing input
Image type
Code Saved file number _ _ Bank No. .bmp
identifier
OK ERROR
OK/ERROR • Saved file number: 3-digit image file serial number
• Image type identifier character : Character that indicates the image type
1 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 1 2
Scan bank
S Successfully read images
Images that will be saved Images that will be saved
N Comparison NG images
E Read error images
z Save specified number of images after timing ON
W Unstable images
• In single/burst read mode
C Captured image
Timing input
• Bank No: Bank number used to obtain the image.
Code Example) File name for successful read with bank No. 1
ERROR 001_S_01.bmp
OK/ERROR
Point • You can use script programming to change the names of saved image
Scan bank 1 2 3 1 2 … 3 1 2 files.
The set number of images to save is continuously saved after the trigger input "9-10 Scripts" (page 69)
turns on. • The saved file number is from 000 to 999. The number after 999 is 000.
If you restart the reader, the numbers will start from 000 again.
• If an image is saved with an existing saved file number, the old image
• In continuous read mode will be overwritten with the new one.
Timing input
Code
OK/ERROR
The 1st code
OK
The 2nd code
6-28 Output Read Data to CSV
Reading Reading Reading
Reading
success
Reading
success Reading Reading Reading ...
Files
error error success (Same code) (Same code) error error success
Scan image These images are The image was These images are
intended images to
save as 1 read
scanned while the
duplicate reading
intended images to
save as 1 read
Appending Read Data to *.CSV Files through the FTP
operation. The images prevention function operation. The images
are saved depending was enabled. This are saved depending Interface
on the settings. image is not saved. on the settings.
You can use the FTP interface to append read data to files on the server.
z Save specified number of images before timing OFF

• In single/burst read mode 1 On the [Table] tab, expand [Ethernet], and then expand [Ethernet
Timing input
data (FTP)].
Code
2 Change [Send read data to FTP] to [On].
OK/ERROR
ERROR
3 Set [Remote FTP server IP address], [Remote FTP server user
account name], [Remote FTP server user account password], and
1 2 3 1 2 … 3 1 2 [File name].
Scan bank
The set number of images to save is saved retroactively, starting with the
image last scanned after the trigger input was turned off.
• In continuous read mode
Timing input
Code The 1st code The 2nd code

OK
OK/ERROR
Reading Reading
Reading Reading Reading success success Reading Reading Reading ...
error error success (Same code) (Same code) error error success
Scan image These images are The image was These images are
intended images to scanned while the intended images to
save as 1 read duplicate reading save as 1 read
operation. The images prevention function operation. The images
are saved depending was enabled. This are saved depending
on the settings. image is not saved. on the settings.
Point • The name of the file saved differs depending on whether reading was
successful or a reading error occurred.
• When the settings are configured to read multiple codes, when one 4 Click [Send Configuration].
code is read successfully, its image is judged to be the OK image.
5 Exit AutoID Network Navigator.
33 GB SR-2000 UM
6-29 Compare the Read Data 6-30 Suppress Data Output
(Preset Data Comparison)
Silent Mode
You can compare the read data to give OK and NG outputs.
The master data for this comparison is called "preset data." By using "silent mode," you can suppress the output of read data in the following
situations.
z Output terminal operation Output will still turn on from the OUT terminals in the normal manner. The main
unit's display will also appear in the normal manner. Use this mode when you do
Reading successful and the read data matches the "preset data" OK not need the read data.
Reading successful and the read data does not match the "preset
Comparison NG Reading success (comparison OK)
data"
Comparison NG
Reading error ERROR
Reading error
Stable
Compare Read and Registered Data Unstable
Preset OK
1 On the [Misc] tab, set [Type] to [Normal]. Test mode
2 Under [Preset Data], register the master data against which to Tuning
compare the read data.
1 On the [Misc] tab, select the check boxes under [Silent Mode] that
correspond to the situations in which you want to suppress data
output.
Reference Timing diagram

Timing input
3 On the [I/O] tab, assign "Comparison NG" to one of the output

Code
terminal functions from [OUT1 Function] to [OUT3 Function]. Scanning + decoding

Data communication
OK ERROR
OK/ERROR output
TRG BUSY output
Compare Sequential Data

When you are reading codes in a sequence, you can check that numbers in the
read data are changing sequentially.
6-31 Lock SR-2000 Series
001 002 003 009
Buttons
OK OK OK NG By locking the operation of the SR-2000 Series' [ENTER] button, you can limit the
operation of the SR-2000 Series.
1 On the [Misc] tab, set [Type] to [Sequential].

1 On the [Misc] tab, select the "Lock" check box under [ENTER but-
2 On the [I/O] tab, assign "NG (Comparison NG)" to one of the output ton].
terminal functions from [OUT1 Function] to [OUT3 Function].
When you specify this setting as above, the following image will be shown on the
SR-2000 Series display, and the ENTER button will be locked.
Read a Code to Register Comparison Data (Preset
Data)
1 On the [I/O] tab, change [IN2 Function] to [Preset Input].

Point To unlock the button on the SR-2000 Series directly, hold down the
2 Click [Send Configuration]. [ENTER] button and the [SELECT] button for at least 4 seconds.
Hold down the [ENTER] button and the [SELECT] button for at least 4
3 Exit AutoID Network Navigator. seconds again to lock the [ENTER] button.
4 Reading starts when a signal is applied to the IN2 terminal, and the
code that is read will be registered as the preset data.
Reference • For details on preset data comparisons, refer to "9-9 Preset Data
Comparison" (page 68)
• You can also use commands to register the preset data.
"12-2 Reading and Tuning Commands" (page 76)
GB SR-2000 UM 34
6-32 Connect Using Port 23 3 Open the terminal.
1 Open [Table], then [Ethernet], and then [Command communication].

Change the settings as follows. 4 Send the “BSAVE,1” command. The first file is created.
5 Create the second file.

Change only the parameters necessary from the first file.
* To change only the bank, select only the [Bank Settings] check box under
[Reset settings to defaults] and then click [Yes].
Example Communication
7 Send the “BSAVE,2” command. The second file is created.
6-33 Creating Changeover

Function Files
1 Create the first file.
"Configure Tuning", "Communication settings", and "Misc parameters".
8 Repeat steps 5-7 to create up to 8 files.

To create a new file, change the number in the “BSAVE,[?]” command to a
value between 3 and 8.
35 GB SR-2000 UM
6-34 Save Changeover Function 6-35 Send Changeover Function
Files Files
1 Open [File View] and then [Configuration file]. 1 Open [File View] and then [Configuration file].
2 Create a folder to store the files. 2 Open the folder where the files are stored.
3 Select [CONFIG1.PTC] to [CONFIG8.PTC] under [File View]- 3 Select [CONFIG1.PTC] to [CONFIG8.PTC] in the folder.
[Configuration file]. Drag and drop files to the File View.
Drag and drop the files to the created folder.
4 Script files can also be sent and used.

Important Do not change file names. Manage files through different folders. Select [FMTSET1.LUA] to [FMTSET8.LUA] in the folder.
Drag and drop files to the File View.
4 To use scripts, select [FMTSET1.LUA] to [FMTSET8.LUA] under

[Script file] in the [File View]. Drag and drop the files to the created
folder.
Important Do not change file names. Manage files through different folders.
GB SR-2000 UM 36
6-36 Connect to AutoID Network Reset IP Address
Navigator over Ethernet 1 Follow the following button procedure.
Refer to "4-3 Initial Power-on Operation Setup" (page 11)" for more information
on turning on the power for the first time.
Connection Method
1 Connect the Ethernet cable of the SR-2000 Series to a PC.
2 Configure the network settings of the PC.
z Configuring Windows 7 network settings

(1) Click the [Start] button, and then click [Control Panel].
(2) Type "adapter" in the search box, and then click [View Network
Connection].
(3) Right-click "Local Area Connection," and then click [Properties] on

the menu that appears.
(4) Click "Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)," and then click
[Properties].
(5) Select [Use the following IP address], and then set the IP address
and subnet mask as shown below.
IP address 192.168.100.1
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
(6) Click [OK] to close all the windows.

The "Please Connect to PC" message appears after the SR-2000 series device
is restarted.
* If a firewall or security program is running on the PC, disable them
temporarily.
3 Double-click "AutoID Network Navigator" on the desktop.
4 Click [Connect over Ethernet].

If the SR-2000 Series is detected automatically, the connection has been
established.
* If the above procedure doesn't detect the SR-2000 Series

• An IP address other than "192.168.100.xxx" may be assigned to the SR-2000
Series that you are attempting to connect to. Follow the procedure shown
below to connect to the reader.
37 GB SR-2000 UM
2 Click the [Register] button, and click [Ethernet] button.
6-37 Allocate IP Addresses to
Multiple Devices
Multiple units of the SR-2000 series device can be connected to an Ethernet hub
in their default state. IP addresses can be configured as a batch process.
Device Configuration
Ethernet
3 Click the [Set Reader IP Address] button.

PC
Hub
Configuration Procedure
1 As illustrated in the device configuration figure, connect the SR-2000

series devices to a PC.
2 Open [AutoID Network Navigator].

The following message appears. Click [Yes].
4 Click [OK].
If the following information is displayed, the connection has been established.
Click [Edit] to set a desired IP address.
* If a USB device has been detected first, click [+ (Plus button)], then [Ethernet],
and then [Auto Search].
5 Click [Register].
Reference Broadcast packets are sent out into the network when the SR-2000
series device is connected to the PC.
SR-2000 Series will restart, so the RAM information will be deleted.
3 The following message appears. Click [OK].

Click [Edit] to change an IP address.
4 The IP address allocation is complete once the following screen

appears.
GB SR-2000 UM 38
6-38 Using the Lighting 6-39 Use the Polarizing Filter
attachment (SR-20AL) (For all lights-ON)
OP-88256
1 Remove the 6 screws from the polarizing filter and then remove the
polarizing filter.
1 Remove the 6 screws from the polarizing filter and then remove the
polarizing filter.
2 Attach the lighting attachment (SR-20AL).
2 Attach OP-88256.
3 Select [Enable all lighting] for [Start monitor].

This can also be used with Polarizing filter enabled/Polarizing filter disabled.

3 Select [Enable all lighting] for [Start monitor].

This can also be used with Polarizing filter enabled/Polarizing filter disabled.
In this case, the lighting effect is halved.
4 Click [Start monitor] Æ [Auto Focus].
6-40 Check the Reading

Statistics Information
Use the Web monitor function of the SR-2000 Series.
4 Click [Start monitor] Æ [Auto Focus]. 1 Start the browser.
5 Click [Start tuning]. 2 Input the IP address of the SR-2000 in the URL field of the browser.
When the connection is successful, the following appears.
Point • The Web monitor function cannot be used if [Table]-[Misc]-[Web

monitor setting]-[Web monitor] is set to “Disable”.
• If [Table]-[Misc]-[Web monitor setting]-[Password authentication] is
set to “Enable”, the Web monitor function can be used after entering
the user name and password.
39 GB SR-2000 UM
6-41 Identify the reader
There are 2 items to set for reader identification.

• Reader name
• Reader description
Reader name
Used as the configuration file name of AutoID Network Navigator.
Reader description
Used for the following.
• Identifying the reader with the setting command response
• Appending the reader description with scripts
• Identifying the reader with the WEB Server function.
GB SR-2000 UM 40
7-1 Check the Read Data 7-3 Acquire image files stored
on the SR-2000 Series
Terminal (Image Vew)
Image View
1 Click [Terminal].
2 Turn on the sensor (switch) wired to the SR-2000 Series.* 1

When reading is successful, the read data is displayed.
1 Click [Image View].
The following screen is displayed.
*1 You can also start reading by clicking [LON] in the terminal.
7-2 Send Commands
Terminal
1 Click [Terminal].
2 Type a command in the command input field, and then press Enter.
The newest images are displayed at the top of the screen.

The following icon is displayed next to the latest image.
* For details on commands, refer to "12-1 Command Communication" (page

76).
41 GB SR-2000 UM
7-4 View Live Images 7-5 Acquire files stored on the
(MultiMonitor) SR-2000 Series (File View)
Installing MultiMonitor Installing File View

Run "AutoID Launcher.exe" inside the "AutoID Network Navigator" folder of the Run "AutoID Launcher.exe" inside the "AutoID Network Navigator" folder of the
SR-H6W, and then install the program by following the instructions on the screen. SR-H6W, and then install the program by following the instructions on the screen.
Starting MultiMonitor Starting File View

1 Use the Ethernet interface to connect the SR-2000 Series and a PC, 1 Use the Ethernet interface to connect the SR-2000 Series and a PC,
and then configure the network settings to enable communication.
and then configure the network settings to enable communication.
2 Double-click the "MultiMonitor" shortcut on the desktop.
2 Double-click the "File View" shortcut on the desktop.
When you start "MultiMonitor," the SR-2000 Series units on the network will be
detected automatically.
3 When you start "File View," the SR-2000 Series units on the network
will be detected automatically.
Sending and Receiving Files

Receiving files (PC Å SR-2000)
Use the mouse to drag the displayed files.
Point • You cannot run MultiMonitor and AutoID Network Navigator at the
same time.
• If you want to view SR-2000 Series Live View images during
operation, use "MultiMonitor."
• To use MultiMonitor, connect the SR-2000 Series and the PC through
the Ethernet interface. You cannot use MultiMonitor with a USB Sending files (PC Æ SR-2000)
connection.
• The maximum display length of read data is 54 bytes. Drag configuration files and script files.
Point • You cannot run File View and AutoID Network Navigator at the same
time.
• To use File View, connect the SR-2000 Series and the PC through the
Ethernet interface. You cannot use File View with a USB connection.
• If you send a file with the same name as an existing file, the existing
file will be overwritten.
GB SR-2000 UM 42
7-6 Output Read Results as a 4 Below is an example of how the saved file will display when it is
opened.
Report
Report Output Function

With AutoID Network Navigator, you can output reports based on the installation
guide results, tuning results, and test results.
Creating Report Data
Installation guide results output

Open the installation guide. Then you can enter information about the code,
working distance, etc.
Use the "Installation Guide" screen to output report data.
Tuning results output

After tuning the SR-2000 Series, click this menu command to output the report
data.
Test results output

After completing tests with SR-2000 Series, click this menu command to output
the report data.
Report Output
1 Go to [File], select [Report], and then click [SR-2000].
2 Drag the report data to this dialog box.
3 Click [Output Report].
43 GB SR-2000 UM
8-1 Checking SR-2000 Series 2
3
Turn on the SR-2000 Series.
Press the SR-2000 Series buttons as shown below.

Settings
Receiving Settings
1 Use a USB cable (OP-51580/86941) to connect the SR-2000 Series

and a PC.
2 Start AutoID Network Navigator.

If the following information is displayed, the procedure is finished.
Check the settings.
Reference For details on saving settings and issuing quick setup codes,
refer to "5-5 Saving Settings/ Quick Setup Codes" (page 15).
8-2 Restoring Settings

(AutoID Network Navigator)
Send Configuration to a New SR-2000 Series
1 Follow steps in [8-1] to connect to AutoID Network Navigator.
2 Right-click the reader, and then click "Switch Reader Configuration"

on the menu that appears.
3 Select a saved configuration file (*.ptc).
4 A confirmation message asking you whether you want to apply the

settings will be displayed. Click "Yes."
When the completion message is displayed, the configuration is complete.
Reference Refer to "6-35 Send Changeover Function Files" (page 36) for more
information on using the changeover function.
4 When the SR-2000 Series LED lights, scan all the quick setup codes.
8-3 Restoring Settings

(Quick Setup Code) 5 Select [SAVE] on the following display to finish applying the settings.
Reading Quick Setup Codes
1 Prepare the printed quick setup codes.
Point • For details on how to print quick setup codes, refer to "5-5 Saving
Settings/ Quick Setup Codes" (page 15).
• If it is difficult to read the codes, select [LIVE] in step 4, and then
configure the settings while viewing the captured images.
GB SR-2000 UM 44
9-1 Reader Display Details
List of Displays
Operation screen
When the SR-2000 Series turns on, the start screen displays, and then (1) read
data display appears.
(1) Read data (2) Live View (3) OK/ERR counts (4) I/O terminals (5) Communication
display display display status display
MENU screen
1 Tuning 2 Reading rate 3 Trigger 4 Timing 5 Change 6 Display 7 Exit

test reading adjustment settings settings
Code position Reading rate Reading screen Bank selection

adjustment screen display
Currently
Reading in adjusting
Tuning execution Live View progress
Adjustment
successful
5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6

RS-232C communication IP address Reset Quick setup code LED pointer Rotate display Exit
initialization (BOOTP) reading settings
6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-6 6-7

RS-232C settings IP address display Subnet mask MAC address System version Model display Master/slave
display display display display ID display
(1) Read data display This is the normal display screen. It displays the read data of the SR-2000 Series.* 1
(2) Live View This screen displays the captured image of the SR-2000 Series. The part at the center of the field of view is displayed.
This screen displays the OK and ERROR counts output by the SR-2000 Series.
(3) OK/ERR counts display
When the power is turned off, the counts are reset.
(4) I/O terminals display This screen displays the status of the IN terminals and OUT terminals.
(5) Communication status display This screen displays the Ethernet and RS-232C communication status.
*1 Data that exceeds 30 bytes in size cannot be displayed. Only alphanumeric characters
and some symbols can be displayed. Characters that cannot be displayed are shown as
black squares ().
[1] Tuning Use this menu to execute tuning.

[2] Reading rate test Use this menu to conduct the reading rate test.
[3] Trigger reading Press the ENTER button on this menu to check reading.
[4] Timing adjustment Use this menu to implement the timing automatic adjustment.
[5] Change settings Use this menu to read quick setup codes, initialize the RS-232C communication, and to configure other settings.
[6] Display settings Use this menu to view settings such as the RS-232C communication settings and the Ethernet IP address.
[7] Exit Exit the menu and return to "(1) Read data display."
45 GB SR-2000 UM
9-2 AutoID Network Navigator Menu Bar Details
Details File
New Create a new configuration file.
Open Open a configuration file.
Save Save (overwrite) the existing configuration file.
Screen
Save As Save the existing configuration file with a new name.
Save All Save all the open configuration files.
(1) Quick Setup Code Print a quick setup code.
(2) (4) Export Reader Configuration Output the list of settings to a .txt file.
Save the reader's serial number.
Save serial number
(3) (SR-D100 series only)
(5)
Output a report.
Report
"7-6 Output Read Results as a Report" (page 43)
Output the report data.
The items that you can output are shown below.
Output Report Data • Installation
• Tuning
• Test
"7-6 Output Read Results as a Report" (page 43)
(6) Exit End AutoID Network Navigator.
View
Reader View Show and hide the reader list.
Highlights the settings changed from the factory default
Highlight Configured Fields
configuration.
System
(1) Menu bar Open configuration files and view the version of the SR-2000 Series.
Register Reader Register a reader.
(2) Icons Start tools and send/receive configuration files.
Switch the settings of the selected reader to the details of
Displays a list of the readers detected by AutoID Network Switch Reader Configuration
(3) Reader list a configuration file.
Navigator.
Initializes the SR-2000 Series selected from (3) Reader list. To Delete Reader Delete the selected reader from the list.
(4) Setting initialization initialize an SR-2000 Series reader, click this button, select the items Assign a temporary IP address to a reader in order to
to initialize, and then send the settings. Temporary IP address setting
connect to it.
Configure the settings of the SR-2000 Series selected from (3) Confirm Firmware Version Display the version of the reader.
(5) Settings view
Reader list.
Update Firmware Update the reader firmware.
After you click [Monitor], which displays the live image captured by
the SR-2000 Series, you can perform the following operations. Transfer
(6) Monitor screen Use the slider on the right to change the brightness. Retrieve Configuration Receive the settings of the reader on the PC.
The scaling of the screen can be adjusted with the mouse wheel.
Send Configuration Send a configuration to the reader.
Right-click the mouse to edit the area.
Tools
Live View Display the live view.
Point While AutoID Network Navigator is running and is connected to the SR- "7-3 Acquire image files stored on the SR-2000
2000 Series, you cannot communicate between the SR-2000 Series and Image View
Series (Image Vew)" (page 41)
a PLC or other PC. If you want to communicate with a PLC or other PC,
exit AutoID Network Navigator. "7-5 Acquire files stored on the SR-2000 Series (File
File View
View)" (page 42)
Terminal "7-1 Check the Read Data" (page 41)
Icon Explanation Installation Guide

From the code size, you can check the reading distance
and field-of-view size of the reader being used.
Tool to create configuration commands for the SR-G100
New Create a new configuration file for the selected model. Configuration command
Series
creation tool
Open Open a configuration file. * Not used for the SR-2000 Series.
Settings
Save (overwrite) Save (overwrite) the existing configuration file.
Select the network card to use when establishing an
Select Network Card
Register Register a reader. Ethernet connection with AutoID Network Navigator.
Switch the settings of the selected reader to the settings in a Options Set the options for AutoID Network Navigator.
Switch settings
configuration file. Help
Delete Delete a registered reader. Manual This is a link to the manual.
Disconnect Disconnect a reader from AutoID Network Navigator. Display version information for AutoID Network
About
Navigator.
Use the "temporary IP address setting" function to connect to a
Temporary IP address
reader through the Ethernet interface.
setting
* This is not used for the SR-2000 series.
[Settings] - [Options]
Print quick setup code Print a quick setup code.
Search Readers on Set whether to automatically search for readers when
Application Startup AutoID Network Navigator starts.
Reader List Display Set whether to automatically register the reader after the
Automatic Registration
"Search Readers on Application Startup" function.
Lamp status Description
Set the communication timeout for AutoID Network
Green Registered reader Communication Timeout Navigator. When you cannot establish connections with
Blue Registered reader is communicating with AutoID Network Navigator* 1 the "5sec" setting, change this to "10sec."
Gray Disconnected Set whether to start the terminal at the same time that
Terminal on Live View Startup
Live View opens.
Registered reader is incapable of communicating with AutoID Network
Red When the specified time elapses, communication
Navigator Automatic Reader
between AutoID Network Navigator and the registered
*1 With this status, it is not possible to communicate through the Ethernet or RS-232C inter- Disconnection
reader will be disconnected.
faces between the SR-2000 Series and a PLC or other PC.
Set whether to receive reader settings when
Receive Settings upon
Point • You can disconnect a reader by clicking its lamp icon. communication is resumed after automatic reader
Reconnect
disconnection.
Multi-byte text string encoding Selects the encoding method used when codes contain
• Right-click an SR-2000 Series reader to use a variety of commands method multi-byte text strings.
such as registering the reader and switching its settings. Set whether to make the PC buzzer sound at the time of
Buzzer (SR-2000)
read operation. (SR-2000 series only)
GB SR-2000 UM 46
9-3 List of AutoID Network Item name
Byte swapping
Default value
Disable
Setting range
Disable or Enable
Details
Setting for use in swapping
the DM storage order.
Navigator Settings PROFINET

Device name sr-2000 -
Data handshake Disable Disable or Enable -
*1 MC protocol (RS-232C), SYSWAY (RS-232C), KV STUDIO (RS-232C), MC protocol (Ethernet), OMRON
(Ethernet), KV STUDIO (Ethernet), EtherNet/IP, or PROFINET
*2 The setting range varies depending on the PLC link type.
[Table] Tab *3 Excluding 9013, 9014, 9015, 9016, 5900, 5920 and 44818
RS-232C Format
Item name Default value Setting range Details Item name Default value Setting range Details
Select whether to enable or The characters to be added
RS-232C Header (0 to 5 characters)
Enable Enable or Disable disable RS-232C in front of the data
communication
communication. The characters to be added
Terminator 0D (0 to 5 characters)
Baud Rate 115200 bps 9600 bps to 115200 bps - at the end of the data
Data Bits 8 bit 7 bit or 8 bit - The delimiting character to
None, Even parity, or Odd Partition mark 3A (1 character) use when multiple codes are
Parity Even parity - read
parity
Stop Bit 1 bit 1 bit or 2 bit - The delimiting characters to
Inter-delimiter 2C (0 to 5 characters)
use when adding data
Communication None, PASS/RTRY, or
None - Composite delimiter (0 to 5 characters) -
method ACK/NAK
Append data size Disable Disable or Enable -
Ethernet Append checksum Disable Disable or Enable -
SR-2000 IP settings Operation

Item name Default value Setting range Details Trigger input
The IP address of the SR-
IP address 192.168.100.100
2000 Series. Item name Default value Setting range Details
Subnet Mask 24 8 to 30 - None, Reading rate test, or
Test mode on startup None -
Default Gateway 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 - Read time test
When this setting is enabled, Level trigger or
Timing Mode Level trigger -
the connection will be One-shot trigger
terminated when there is no One-shot trigger
Keep Alive Enable Enable or Disable
communication with the duration 100 3 to 2550 -
remote device for a period of (x 10 ms)
60 consecutive seconds. Use hexadecimal characters
Timing ON
Command communication 4C4F4E(LON) (1 to 32 characters) to specify the command that
command
Communication The communication method will be used to start reading.
TCP Not used, TCP, or UDP Use hexadecimal characters
method used to receive commands.
Timing OFF
Port (Waiting) 9004 1024 to 65535*1 - 4C4F4646(LOFF) (1 to 32 characters) to specify the command that
command
will be used to stop reading.
Login authentication Disable Disable or Enable -
Use this setting to execute the
User name admin - One-character
Disable Disable or Enable timing ON command without
Password - timing recognition
header and terminator characters.
Ethernet data (server) Configures the delay time from
Timing on delay
Communication The server operation setting 0 0 to 2550 when the timing signal turns
TCP Not used or TCP (x 1 ms)
method for socket communication. on until when the read starts.
Port (Waiting) 9004 1024 to 65535*1 - Timing off delay
Configures the delay time from
Ethernet data (client) 0 0 to 2550 when the timing signal turns
(x 1 ms)
off until when the read stops.
Communication The socket operation setting
Not used Not used, TCP or UDP Reading behavior
method for socket communication.
Remote IP address 1 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 The remote IP address. Single, Continuous, Burst
Reading Mode Single
read or Script
Remote port 1 9004 1024 to 65535 -
Set the timing with which to
This setting is used when the Send after read or
Data Transmission Send after read send the data after a code is
Remote IP address 2 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 same data is output to an Send after timing off
read.
additional PC or PLC.
Duplicate Reading
Remote port 2 9004 1024 to 65535 Prevention Interval 10 0 to 255 -
Connection request Disable Disable or Enable (x 100 ms)
Host connection error The "Host Connection Error 4552524F52 The code to output when a
Read Error String (0 to 8 characters)
due to client Disable Disable or Enable (E12)" appears when a (ERROR) reading error occurs.
connection failure connection fails. Burst Interval
0 0 to 255 -
Send read data to FTP (x 1 ms)
Send read data Save the read data as a file Shorten bank transition Enable Disable or Enable -
Disable Disable or Enable
to FTP on the FTP server. Code reads per region Enable Disable or Enable -
Remote FTP server IP Read multiples of the
0.0.0.0 The remote IP address.
address same code/same type Disable Disable or Enable -
Remote FTP server of code
user account admin - Master/slave
name
Do not use, Multi-drop, Multi- Master/slave operation
Remote FTP server Operation Setting Do not use
head, Advanced Multi-head setting.
user account admin -
password Group name GROUP01 (1 to 16 characters) -
Enable this function when the Unit ID 0 0 to 31 -
Passive mode Disable Disable or Enable FTP server operates passive Number of read data
1 1 to 8 -
communication. in Multi Head mode
Use this setting to append Alternate
Append to preceding read data to preceding data Begin with successfully Sequential or Begin with
Enable Disable or Enable Order -
data sent through the FTP interface read bank successfully read bank
within .txt files. Matching level judgment function
Change directory Disable Disable or Enable - Matching level OK/NG
Directory name data - Disable Disable or Enable -
judgment
Keep Matching level
Disable Disable or Enable - 70 0 to 99 -
connected threshold
File name data.txt - Code quality verification
Host connection error The "Host Connection Error ISO/IEC15415
due to client Enable Disable or Enable (E12)" appears when a Disable Disable or Enable -
verification
connection failure connection fails. ISO/IEC
*1 Excluding 9013, 9014, 9015, 9016, 5900, 5920, and 44818 15415 verification Disable Disable, D, C, B, or A -
threshold
Field network/PLC link ISO/IEC TR 29158
(AIM DPM-1-2006) Disable Disable or Enable -
verification
Item name Default value Setting range Details
ISO/IEC TR 29158
PLC communication *1 Select the protocol to use in (AIM DPM-1-2006) Disable Disable, D, C, B, or A -
Not used
protocol communicating with the PLC. verification threshold
Remote IP address 0.0.0.0 The remote IP address. ISO/IEC TR29158
Remote port 5000 1024 to 65535 - (AIM DPM-1-2006)
*2
Disable Disable or Enable -
DM front address 0 - Minimum reflectance
*2 calculation
Control region address 0 -
SAE AS9132
Response region *2 Disable Disable or Enable -
0 - verification
address
SAE AS9132
Use this setting to operate Disable Disable or Enable -
PLC link verification threshold
Do not use Do not use or Use timing input with the PLC's
timing input SEMI T10-0701
bits. Disable Disable or Enable -
verification
UDP port number 5000 1024 to 65535*3 -
ISO/IEC 15416 code
Node address 1 0 to 65535 -
quality verification, - -, CUSTOM, or ALL -
Output length 64 1 to 1000 - target code selection
Timing/Data wait ISO/IEC 15416 code
10 0 to 99 -
(x 10 ms) quality verification Disable Disable, D, C, B, or A -
Retry duration 5 1 to 10 - threshold
EtherNet/IP ISO/IEC 16022
Disable Enable or Disable -
Data handshake Disable Disable or Enable - verification
Input assembly data ISO/IEC 16022
500 40 to 1400 Size of the data to send. Disable Disable, D, C, B, or A -
size (send) verification threshold
Output assembly Select expression of
500 4 to 1400 Size of the data to receive. Alphabet Alphabet or Numeric *1
data size (receive) grades
Append detailed
Disable Disable or Enable *1
verification result
47 GB SR-2000 UM
Item name Default value Setting range Details Saving images
Append values Disable Disable or Enable *1
Code quality verification calibration Saving images
Disabled, Polarizing filter
Code quality Item name Default value Setting range Details
Disable enabled, Polarizing filter -
verification calibration Method for saving images
disabled, Always on OK Image Disable *1
with the "OK" output function.
Calibration Brightness 80 0 to 184 -
Method for saving images
Edit data NG Image Save to RAM *1
with the "NG" output function.
Data edit
Disable Disable or Enable Select whether to use scripts. Method for saving images with
by script Error Image Save to RAM *1
the "ERROR" output function.
Additional data Method for saving images with
Time Disable Disable or Enable - Unstable Image Save to RAM *1 the "UNSTABLE" output
Code classification Disable Disable or Enable - function.
Symbol ID Disable Disable or Enable - Method for saving images
Captured Image Save to RAM Save to RAM or Send by FTP
Parameter bank Disable Disable or Enable - when they are captured.
Read count Disable Disable or Enable - Format JPEG Bitmap or JPEG -
Code vertex Disable Disable or Enable - Quality (JPEG) 5 1 to 10 -
Code center Disable Disable or Enable - Binning 1/4 Full, 1/4, 1/9, 1/16, or 1/64 -
ECC level (UEC) Disable Disable or Enable - Save new images, Save
number of specified images
Matching level Disable Disable or Enable - Image save mode Save final bank image after timing signal is on, Save -
ISO/IEC 15415 Disable or Enable (total number of specified images
Disable -
verification result grade) before timing signal is off
ISO/IEC TR 29158 Number of images to
Disable or Enable (total 32 1 to 32 -
(AIM DPM-1-2006) Disable - save
grade)
verification result Edit image file name by
SAE AS9132 script Disable Disable or Enable Select whether to use scripts.
Disable Disable or Enable (total) -
verification result (FTP transmission only)
SEMI T10-0701
Disable Disable or Enable - FTP settings*2
verification result IP address 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 The remote IP address.
ISO/IEC 15416 code User Account admin -
Disable or Enable (total
quality verification Disable -
grade) Password admin -
result
ISO/IEC 16022 Disable or Enable (total Passive mode Disable Disable or Enable -
Disable - Change directory Disable Disable or Enable -
verification result grade)
Image file name Disable Disable or Enable - Directory name image 1 to 32 characters
Read time Disable Disable or Enable - Keep
This is the master/slave group connected
Group name Disable Disable or Enable
name.*2 Host connection error The "Host Connection Error
Master/Slave ID Disable Disable or Enable This is the master/slave unit ID.*2 due to client Enable Disable or Enable (E12)" appears when a
connection failure connection fails.
Region number Disable Disable or Enable -
Comparison *1 Disable, Save to RAM, or Send by FTP
*2 This item is set when you assign "Send by FTP" to one of the image saving methods.
Comparison method Normal Normal or Sequential -
Misc
Origin 1 1 to 7089 -
Length 494 0 to 494 -
This is the data to compare
Preset data (0 to 494 characters) Item name Default value Setting range Details
against.
Set this value when the Output data on button Enable Disable or Enable -
Increment 1 -9999 to 9999 comparison method is Filling size 0 0 to 999 -
"Sequential." Filling character 20 -
*1 This is displayed when you select an "Append grade" check box on the [Code quality verification] screen of Silent Mode - *1 -
the [Operation] tab. Multiple-code output
Standard Standard, Per bank, Per area -
*2 This is displayed when the master/slave function is enabled. format
Reader READER (1 to 8 characters)
I/O terminals Reader description (0 to 32 characters)
ENTER button Unlock Unlock or Lock -
Input terminal common Manual lighting, Auto lighting,
Pointer lighting Auto lighting or Only light when capturing -
Item name Default value Setting range Details images
Input Polarity Norm. open Norm. open or Norm. closed - Rotated Rotate 0 degrees, Rotate 180
The length of time that trigger Do not rotate -
Required Input display degrees
1ms 1 ms, 2 ms, or 10 ms input must be left on until Display LED lighting Enable Enable/Disable
Duration
reading starts.
Specify command response string
Represents the number of
Number of pulses at No specification, Detailed
1 1 to 10000 pulses until the read starts via
encoder started Basic command response, User-specified, Set the responses to
encoder input. Not specified
response string Echo back, Command commands.
Represents the number of replacement
Number of pulses at
1 1 to 10000 pulses until the read stops via
encoder stopped Success response
encoder input. 4F4B(OK) (1 to 8 characters) *2
string
Number of pulses at
0 0 to 10000 - Failure response string 4552(NG) (1 to 8 characters) *2
encoder off state
Represents the number of SNTP
Number of encoder IP address of the SNTP server
0 0 to 10000 pulses until the read data is SNTP server address 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
output pulses used to synchronize the time.
output via encoder input.
IN1 function Time zone +9.00 -12:00 to +13:00 -
Function Timing *1 - Update cycle (min) 1 1 to 99 -
Set this value when "Start test Web monitor Setting
Reading rate test or Read
Test mode Reading rate test mode" is assigned to the input Web monitor Enable Disable or Enable -
time test
terminal.
Password
Bank used to Set this value when "Capture" is Disable Disable or Enable -
1 1 to 16 authentication
capture images assigned to the input terminal.
User name user 0 to 12 characters -
Startup state Disable Disable or Enable -
Password pass 0 to 12 characters -
IN2 function Monitor
Function Disable *1 -
Before image filter or
Set this value when "Start test Displayed image After image filter -
Reading rate test or Read After image filter
Test mode Reading rate test mode" is assigned to the input Do not rotate or Rotate by 180
time test
terminal. Rotate image Do not rotate -
degrees
Bank used to Set this value when "Capture" is
1 1 to 16 Tuning
capture images assigned to the input terminal.
Auto polarizing filter
Startup state Disable Disable or Enable - Enable Disable or Enable -
adjustment
Output Terminal
Limit the code search
TRG BUSY at Power- conditions on the basis of the
Enable Disable or Enable - Code search Limit Limit or Do not limit
On tuning result in order to
Output Duration shorten the decode time.
50 1 to 255 -
(x 10 ms) Contrast adjustment Standard, HDR, HDR2,
HDR -
OUT1 Function OK *2 *3 *4 - method Contrast zoom
OUT2 Function ERROR *2 *3 *4 - Automatic contrast
Enable Enable or Disable -
TRG BUSY, LOCK adjustment
OUT3 Function BUSY, MODE BUSY, *2 *3*4 *5 - Assisted tuning
ERR BUSY Assisted tuning is enabled
Assisted tuning Disable Enable or Disable
External Light Output Set this value when "EXT. when executed.
Norm. open Norm. open or Norm. closed
Polarity LIGHT" is assigned to OUT3. Speed (m/min) 20 0 to 600 -
*1 Disable, Timing input, Preset input, Test mode startup, Capture image, Clear PLC link error, trigger lock, Takt time (ms) 0 0 to 10000 -
Batch reading of codes, Execute tuning, Timing input start, Timing input stop, Encoder input start, Encoder No movement, Longitudinal
input stop, Encoder input start and stop, Command replacement, Data output, Encoder output, Encoder start movement, Lateral
Movement pattern No movement -
and output, Encoder stop and output, Encoder start and stop and output movement, Rotational
*2 OK, ERROR, STABLE, UNSTABLE, PRESET OK, TUNING OK, SCRIPT CONTROL, and NG (Comparison NG) movement
*3 TRG BUSY, LOCK BUSY, MODE BUSY, ERR BUSY, and CONFIG BUSY Tuning distance 0 0 to 5000 -
*4 READY Recommended
*5 EXT. LIGHT installation distance 0 0 to 5000 -
(near)
Recommended
installation distance 0 0 to 5000 -
(far)
Minimum cell size of
the code (in 0.01 mm 0 0 to 10000 -
units)
Code orientation
restriction
Rotation speed (rpm) 20 0 to 1000 -
Diameter (mm) 100 0 to 1000 -
GB SR-2000 UM 48
Item name Default value Setting range Details z Tuning options
Reader orientation Horizontal Horizontal, Vertical -
Front, Skew angle, Pitch
[Tuning] tab
Installation angle type Front -
angle
Installation angle (°) 0 0, 15, 30, 45, 60, 75 -
Code position variation
0 0 to 2000 -
range
Near distance to target 50 50 to 5000 -
Far distance to target 5000 50 to 5000 -
*1 Verification OK, Read OK, Read error, Stable reading (OK/Comparison NG), Unstable reading (OK/Compari-
son NG), Preset Result, Test mode, Tuning, or Comparison NG
*2 This item is set when the basic command response string is set to "User setting."
Search Settings
You can use the search box shown in the following image to search for items in the
list of settings.
Normally select "High quality." To set the upper limit for exposure
Brightness mode
time, select “High speed”.
Enter this value when [Brightness mode] is set to "High speed."
Exposure upper limit
Set the upper limit for the exposure time.
Select whether to use an image filter during tuning.
Image filter * When you complete tuning for 1D barcodes, there are limits
placed on the types of image filters.
Use this setting to read codes with black/white inversion.
Inverse Read
Normally select "Auto."
Select whether to use internal lighting.
Internal Lighting
Normally select "Enable."
External Lighting If you will synchronize tuning with external lighting, select "Enable."
Select the radio button to enable successful tuning determination
Criteria
when the code number is at or less than the specified number.
Select the radio button to enable Smart Tuning.
Applicable bank
"6-9 Increase Responsiveness to Print Changes" (page 20)
9-4 Read Behavior [Symbology] tab
Tuning
Tuning
This function uses either SR-2000 Series button operations or AutoID Network
Navigator operations or I/O terminal to automatically adjust to the optimal values
the parameters for reading the target codes, and then saves these parameters in
the internal memory.
Tuning operation methods

The following three operation methods are available.
(1) SR-2000 Series button operations "4-1 Tuning" (page 11)
(2) AutoID Network Navigator operations "5-2 Reading Settings" (page 12)
(3) Operations with the corresponding function assigned to an input terminal
"6-23 Control the I/O Terminals" (page 29)
Select the codes for which the reader will be tuned.
Symbology
You can shorten the tuning time by limiting the types of codes.
Point When an input terminal is used to activate tuning, parameter bank
number 1 is automatically overwritten with the tuning result. Set the conditions to read during tuning for each type of code.
Code-specific setting Examples of these conditions are "Length" and "Quiet zone scale
factor."
Setting tuning conditions Tuning Procedure Using Device Buttons

Use AutoID Network Navigator to set the tuning conditions. Click the following Refer to "4-1 Tuning" (page 11).
button to display the [Tuning Options] screen.
Point • If the following screen is displayed when you tune in custom mode, it
means that other settings are already being used with the selected
bank. To overwrite the existing settings, press the [ENTER] button. If
you want to save the new settings to a different bank, press the
[NEXT] button to select a bank that displays "Empty," and then press
the [ENTER] button.
49 GB SR-2000 UM
Details of Tuning Results Alternate order
• Sequential
If you use AutoID Network Navigator to tune the reader, the following results will be
Codes are read by switching between parameter banks in order starting with
displayed.
number 1.
• Tuning results
• Begin with successfully read bank
When reading is successful, the same parameter bank will be the first one used
for the next reading operation.
By using this function, you can shorten the read time when the print quality
changes in units of lots.
Reading Parameter bank Reading Parameter bank

order No. order No.
1 1 1 3
2 2 2 1
• Image filters and color codes
The plotted points of the tuning results indicate the following filter results. Reading
3 3 Success
3 2
Color Filter name Color code (RGB)
: Black Disable 0,0,0 4 4 4 4
: Yellow-green Equalize 68,192,0
: Green Expand 0,130,58
: Light blue Shrink 0,183,238 Point If you are using the "Begin with successfully read bank" setting, this
: Blue Open 0,67,238 will be returned to the sequential order when:
: Purple Close 171,0,242 • The power supply turns off.
• Test mode starts.
: Pink Median 241,0,198 • The reset command (RESET) is sent.
: Orange Unsharp Mask 255,138,0 • The alternate settings are changed.
Alternate Parameter bank display

Parameter bank In AutoID Network Navigator, parameter bank settings are displayed as shown
below.
The parameter bank is used to configure read parameters such as the exposure
time and enabling/disabling the use of image processing filter. These parameters
are stored in items called "parameter banks" or "banks." The SR-2000 Series has
16 parameter banks.
The following are the main items stored in parameter banks.
• Code type
• Lighting conditions
• Exposure time
• Image filter usage
Alternate function
Automatically switches between and reads multiple registered parameter banks.
This operation is referred to as the alternate function.
With the alternate function, you can stably read codes even if they have varying
printing conditions.
Point • The alternate function requires processing time in order to find the
optimal parameter bank. (The processing time depends on the
decode timeout.)
• The alternate function is disabled by default. This function is enabled
when a parameter bank is configured. Setting name
• The alternate function is disabled when:
Common
•The alternate function is disabled for all parameter banks.
•You use commands or a field network to read using a specific Set whether to use the alternate function during reading. When
parameter bank. Alternate Alternate is set to "Disable," the corresponding parameter bank will
not be used in reading.
For a specific parameter bank, set the number of times to capture
Repeat read attempts
Alternate function operations images or decode until the alternate function is used.
Decode timeout Set the upper limit of the decode time. If decoding cannot complete
(x10 ms) within this period, the next scan will begin.
Start reading
Configures the region number used with a bank. If 0 is specified,
Region number
the bank is use in all regions.
Select parameter bank
Inverse read Set whether to read codes with black/white inversion.
Reverse read Set whether to read codes that have been flipped right to left.
Scanning Code orientation (1D) Configures the orientation in which barcodes are read.
Set the base angle for a tilt angle range to limit reading. When
DataMatrix is set, the finder pattern rotates until it appears as an "L".
Decoding
Base tilt angle When the QR code is set, the corner without a finder pattern will
become the bottom right corner and 0 degrees. The angle rotates
NO YES
in the clockwise direction (counterclockwise for Reverse read).
Was reading Set the tilt angle range to limit reading. Specify the value as ±X
YES Tilt angle range
Within internal bank successful within degrees to the base tilt angle.
retry count? decode timeout
period? Code
Advanced configuration of code types, number of read digits, and
NO Code detail setting
settings per code type.
NO
Output length limitation Use this setting to limit the number of output digits of the read data.
Is trigger input off? Mode Select the direction in which to limit the number of output digits.
Length of output Set the number of valid output digits.
YES Starting index of output Set the starting output digit.
Read error Reading success ECI output Add "\" and "ECI (6-digit number)" in the beginning of the read data.
GB SR-2000 UM 50
Light STEP2 Code Transfer Conditions
Use internal lighting Use the built-in LED of the SR-2000 Series.
Enter code transfer conditions.
If you connect an external light to the SR-2000 Series, enable this You can choose any of 3 transfer patterns.
Use external lighting
setting.
For the respective patterns, enter the setting values.
Polarizing filter Use the built-in polarizing filter of the SR-2000 Series.*1
When you do not use a transfer pattern, you do not have to enter the setting
Scan
values. If the code cannot be read using the monitor, the minimum cell size can be
Exposure (μs) Set the exposure time that is used when scanning images. manually input.
Gain Set the gain that is used when scanning images.
Contrast adjustment • Longitudinal movement and Lateral movement
Configures the contrast adjustment method.
method
Enter the movement speed and the distance between codes.
Advanced Configures advanced imaging parameters.
Filter
Image filter n Set the image filter type.
Image filter n count Set the image filter count.
*1 When “Always ON” is selected, regardless of the setting value of the
exposure time, it operate less than 1000 μs.
Multiple Code Settings

• Codes to read: Configures the maximum number of codes to read during one
cycle of timing signal input.
• Detailed settings: Configures the code read limit per code type, successful read
determination when the code number is at or less than the specified number.
• Rotational movement
Always On Mode Enter the rotational speed, (target) tact time, and diameter.
Enables/disables Always On mode. Configures the lighting pattern when enabled.
Assisted tuning
* Calculation is performed with the readable degree of rotation set to 90°.
STEP3 Code Positional Conditions

Enter the code vertical, horizontal, and height conditions.
This is a function to configure field of view, reading depth, and target line speed When you check [Advanced Installation Conditions], you can enter the distance
settings. and angle at which the SR-2000 series can be installed.
Do Setting according to the following 4 steps.
STEP1 Code Measurements

Press [Start monitoring] Place a code at a distance of 200 mm or less and then
click [Auto focus] to read the code type and the minimum cell size.
The measured values are used to calculate settings that correspond to the field of
view, depth, and line speed.
* About vertical width

When the sticking positions of the labels vary or the work moves without
width aligning, input the variation of the code position viewed from the
reader.
Within 200 mm
* Far distance to target
The far distance to target indicates the

distance 'X' you can install the SR-2000
series to the most tallest work.
X mm
51 GB SR-2000 UM
STEP4 Tuning Make an adjustment again by setting burst mode and reducing the scan
interval.
The result of calculation is the “tuning distance”.
Install the SR-2000 series at the calculated “tuning distance”.
It is recommended to install it with a precise measurement by using a scale or

similar. Use the current (standard) distance as the reference value.
After adjusting the installation position, start tuning.
Read Behavior
The SR-2000 series performs the following processes for read operation:
(1) Trigger input processing : Trigger input is verified and lighting is
controlled.
(2) Scanning + image transfer : The image is scanned within the specified
exposure time and the image is transferred.
(3) Decoding processing : The captured image is filtered and the code
is recognized (decoding processing).
(4) Data communication processing: The decoded results are output as data.
Since (2) and (3) above are operated based on the settings registered with the
parameter bank, operation is repeated using the alternate function until a code is
read or an instruction to finish read operation is given (timing OFF).
Specify the following operations for the above processing:

Point The tuning distance indicated is the direct distance from the SR-2000 • Timing Mode Choose from level trigger or one-shot trigger.
series to the code. • Timing to send data Choose from Send after read" or "Send after trigger
input OFF.
Important After implementation of the assisted tuning, perform confirmation of • Read mode Specify Single, Continuous, Burst read or Script.
stable reading of actual work.
Timing diagram
This section describes the steps of basic operations of the SR-2000 Series.
Hints Operating conditions are as follows:
When the tuning results in unstable reading, hints are displayed to solve the unstable • Timing Mode : Level trigger
reading. Choose one of the hints displayed and make an adjustment according to it. • Timing to send data : Send after read
• Read mode : Single
• Installation adjustment • Parameter bank : Set 3 banks, alternate mode
Adjust the distance at which the SR-2000 series is installed again. Timing input
Bank 1 Bank 3
Parameter bank operation
Bank 2 Bank 1
Scanning + image transfer A D D

B C B C B C B C
Decoding processing E E F
Read data
Data communication
A: Input time constant + Trigger on delay

B: Exposure time for each parameter bank
C: Image transfer time*1
D: Scan interval
Remove the polarizing filter E: Decode timeout period set for each parameter bank
F: Decoding time when reading is successful
Remove the polarizing filter, and make an adjustment again in a brighter condition.
• The above is the image when reading is successful. For read error, B, C, D, and
E are repeated continuously and read error data is output when the trigger input
is turned off.
• In modes other than burst read mode, the next scan processing starts at the
same time as the decoding processing.
To protect the body, there is an operational limit that restricts the exposure time per
unit of time to 5% or less.
• Setting *1 The image transfer time depends on the size of the image capture range.
Make an adjustment again by setting the scan range smaller and making the • Image transfer time guidelines
decode process faster. 1280 × 1024 pixels Approx. 14 ms
2048 × 1536 pixels Approx. 20 ms
GB SR-2000 UM 52
Timing Mode Data Transmission
Level trigger Send after read
While the trigger input is on, the LED lights and reading begins. The read data and the OK/ERROR signal will be output immediately after the code
When a code is read, the LED turns off and the data is transmitted. is read. Normally use this mode.
If a code cannot be read before the trigger input turns off, a reading error occurs.
z Timing diagram
z Timing diagram*1
The details are the same as those explained under "Timing Mode."
Timing input
Code The read data and the OK/ERROR signal will be output when the trigger input
turns off, not immediately after the code is read.
Scanning + decoding
z Timing diagrams*1
Data communication
OK ERROR • Level trigger
OK/ERROR output
TRG BUSY output
Timing input
One-shot trigger Code
On the rising edge of the trigger input, the LED lights only for the specified time. Scanning + decoding
Reading is attempted during this time.
Data communication
When a code is read, the LED turns off and the data is transmitted. ERROR
OK
If a code cannot be read during the one-shot trigger duration, a reading error OK/ERROR output
occurs.
TRG BUSY output
z Timing diagram*1
• One-shot trigger
Timing input
Timing input
Code
Code
One-shot trigger duration One-shot trigger duration
One-shot trigger duration One-shot trigger duration
Scanning + decoding
Scanning + decoding
Data communication
ERROR Data communication
OK ERROR
OK/ERROR output OK
OK/ERROR output
TRG BUSY output
TRG BUSY output
Differences between the level trigger and the one-shot *1 The timing diagrams indicate examples with the factory default configuration
trigger of the "Reading Mode" setting. For the sake of simplicity, the input time con-
stant and the Trigger on delay have been omitted.
Reading Reading success Reading error
While the trigger

When the code can be When the code cannot Reading Mode
Level trigger read while the trigger be read before the
input is on
input is on trigger input turns off
Single
During the
When the code can be When the code cannot
One-shot trigger
specified time from
read during the one-shot be read during the one-
In this mode, a single code is read while the trigger input is on.
the rising edge of Normally use this mode.
trigger duration shot trigger duration
the trigger input
*1 The timing diagrams indicate examples with the factory default configurations of
z Timing diagram*1
the "Reading Mode" and "Data Transmission" settings. For the sake of simplicity, When reading is successful When reading failed
the input time constant and the Trigger on delay have been omitted.
Timing input
Point Code
• When the trigger input is on for a length of time greater than or equal
to the input time constant, the SR-2000 Series starts reading. Scanning + decoding
• The "TRG BUSY" output turns on when the rising edge of the trigger
input is recognized and remains on until the code reading is complete Data communication
or the trigger input is turned off. OK ERROR
• Ensure that the trigger input remains on for a length of time sufficient OK/ERROR output
to facilitate reading.
• Set the one-shot trigger duration to a length of time sufficient to TRG BUSY output
facilitate reading.
• The one-shot trigger duration can be set to a value from 30 to 25500 Continuous
ms.
• The one-shot trigger duration is only a setting. The reading time may In this mode, multiple codes are read consecutively while the trigger input is on.
not match this value due to factors such as the communication load.
Data is transmitted each time that a code is read.
• When a code is read at an interval shorter than the OK/NG/ERROR
output ON time, the output turns off even if the output ON time of the z Timing diagram*1
previous output signal has not elapsed, and a new output signal turns
on for the specified output ON time. If the same output terminal
operations occur successively, the previous output signal turns off,
and then the new output signal turns on 10 ms later. Timing input
• In order to recognize the trigger input turning on, it must turn on for a
length of time greater than or equal to the input time constant. Code
• In order to recognize the trigger input turning off, it must turn off for a
length of time greater than or equal to the input time constant. Scanning + decoding
• When using a fast-tact, high-speed pulse signal as the trigger input,
set the on/off time of the pulse signal to a value that is greater than or Data communication
OK ERROR
equal to the input time constant. OK/ERROR output
• Let the input time constant be a and the trigger input off time be b.
The trigger input off state is not recognized if a is greater than b. TRG BUSY output
Ensure that a is less than or equal to b.
a
Trigger input
b
53 GB SR-2000 UM
Burst read
In this mode, multiple codes are first scanned and then processed while the
9-5 Reading Test
trigger input is on. Use this mode to increase your ability to read moving codes.
• Scan count: 32 max.
• Scan interval: Can be set to a value between 0 and 255 ms
Reading Rate Test Mode
* The actual scan interval is the scan interval plus the image transfer time. This test mode scans codes and measures the reading rate according to the
number of times that the codes were read correctly.
z Timing diagram*1
The result is output once per 10 decodes.
Timing input z Output format
1st 2nd 3rd Nth
Scanning + image transfer A D D D … D
B C B C B C B C Read data : Bank number : a% : Matching level
E E E
Decoding processing a = Reading rate as a value from 0 to 100
1st 2nd 3rd Nth
Data communication Read data z Operation

• AutoID Network Navigator [Reading] tab
A: Input time constant + Trigger on delay • Using a command
B: Exposure time • Assigning the function to an input terminal
C: Time to transfer image
D: Burst interval
E: Pre-decoding image buffer
Read Time Test Mode
This test mode measures the amount of time that it takes to read a code.
• If multiple parameter banks have been registered, scanning is completed using
The amount of time required from the start of reading until the completion of
the alternate function. reading is measured, and then the result is output.
• When decoding is completed, scanning processing is stopped even when the If decoding fails, the result is 0 ms.
number of scans has not reached 32. The result is output when decoding is completed successfully 10 times or when
• If decoding fails, the processing moves to the next decoding after expiration of decoding fails.
the decode timeout period of each parameter bank. z Output format
*1 The timing diagrams indicate examples with the factory default configurations Read data : Bank number : now=ams : max=bms : min=cms
of the "Timing Mode" and "Data Transmission" settings. For the sake of a: Latest read time
simplicity, the input time constant and the Trigger on delay have been omitted. b: Maximum read time
c: Minimum read time
Point z Operation
• If codes that have the same symbology and content are being read in
series with the "Continuous" setting, adjust the time that codes take • AutoID Network Navigator [Takt] tab
to pass the reader so that this time is longer than the "Duplicate • Using a command
Reading Prevention Interval" setting. • Assigning the function to an input terminal
• With “Multi 1”, reading with bank designation is not allowed.
• With “Multi 1”, multiple code settings not apply to the operation.
Depth Measurement Test Mode
Reference Regarding the trigger input time in burst read mode This test mode performs a pseudo-measurement of a depth approximation by
In burst read mode, both scan processing and decoding processing changing the focus from the current installation position.
are executed, but decode processing takes more time. Therefore, The measurement result of the depth test is only a guide. Perform performance
even when the scan processing is finished, there will be a time period conformation with actual work before operation certainly.
where decoding processing is not yet finished. If the trigger input turns
z Operation
off with the decoding processing unfinished, a reading error will occur
even if images of readable codes have been scanned. • AutoID Network Navigator [Depth] tab
Ensure that the trigger input remains on for a length of time sufficient to
complete of decoding.
Speed Test Mode
Example) The trigger input turns off prior to the completion of decoding
processing. This test mode is used to measure the simulated potential target speed by
If, as shown below, the trigger input turns off with the performing continuous reads with the selected bank.
decoding processing necessary for scanning unfinished, a The measurement result of the speed test is only a guide. Perform performance
reading error will occur even if readable images were present. conformation with actual work before operation certainly.
z Operation
Timing input Timing OFF
Image that can be read

• AutoID Network Navigator [Speed] tab
Scanning + image transfer 1st 2nd 3rd 7th 32nd
A D D D … D D D
B C B C B C B C B C Reference • When a test mode starts, the data addition function is disabled.
Decoding processing …
1st 2nd 3rd 6th
Data communication
ERROR Code Quality Verification Measurement Test Mode
This test mode is used to perform the code quality verification with the selected
Script bank and display the verification result according to the standard.
In this mode, reading continues according to the script contents while the trigger Applicable standards: ISO/IEC15415, ISO/IEC TR 29158, ISO/IEC 15416 and
input is on. As an example, use this mode when controlling to continue or stop Code verification of ethical drugs in Japan
reading according to the data output.
z Operation
* A read error is not judged.
• AutoID Network Navigator [Code quality verification] tab
z Timing diagram
Timing input
Scanning + decoding
InvokeNextShot(n)
For details, refer to the separate document "SR-2000/1000/750/700 Series Script

Reference.
GB SR-2000 UM 54
9-6 Master/Slave Function Usable Reading Modes and Protocols
Reading modes
The master-slave function has 3 modes of operation including multi-drop link
mode, multi-head mode, and advanced multi-head mode. This section describes Reading mode Multi drop link Multi head Advanced Multi-head
the overview of each mode. Single 3 3 3
Continuous - - 3
Multi drop link mode Burst 3 - 3
Script - - 3
With this mode, one Master unit collects the read data of multiple units (up to 32
units) of SR-2000 Series operating with different purposes and sends the data to Protocols
the host. Protocol Multi drop link Multi head Advanced Multi-head
Because the host only has to communicate with the SR designated as Master, the Non-procedure 3 3 3
host does not need to consider communication with multiple units. Thus, the TCP/UDP 3 3 3
system load is reduced with the simple program. Also for PLC, only one MC protocol 3 3 3
communication unit is necessary to control multiple units. This enables the simple SYSWAY 3 3 3
device configuration. KV STUDIO 3 3 3
EtherNet/IP - 3 3
PROFINET - 3 3
SR Series Compatibility Chart

Series Multi drop link Multi head Advanced Multi-head
SR-2000 3 3 3
SR-1000 3 3 -
SR-750 3 3 -
Point • Specify a unique ID for each slave.

• The ID for the master is 0.
• When using the "master/slave function," both "Ethernet" and "RS-
232C" can be selected for data output from the master. However,
Master unit sends data of Slave units to the host. Ethernet connections must be made between the master and slaves.
• You can make multiple master/slave groups on the same network by
assigning different names to the groups.
Multi head mode/Advanced Multi-head Mode • Slave data cannot be received when the master is in the LOCK BUSY
state.
Use this mode when you do not know the position of a code on a target or when the Ex.: MENU screen appears on the display of the master device
target is larger than the field of view and the entire target cannot fit within the field • Delay or packet loss may occur if a network on which many devices
of view using one unit. are connected is under a large load.
Perform a thorough verification before operation.
Because multiple units (Multi head mode: Up to 8 units, Advanced Multi-head
• When using the master/slave function, the maximum size of the data
Mode: Up to 32 units) of SR-2000 Series can be handled as one device, the host that can be sent from a slave to the master is 1024 bytes.
does not need to consider communication with multiple units, and the program
becomes simple. Reference • The slave unit settings will not be reflected in the following items.
They depend on the master unit settings.
Host
"Header," "terminator," "data length," and "checksum"
PC
• Protocol used between the master and slave units: UDP
HUB The units communicate by way of Directed Broadcast.
Multi-drop Link Mode

Control methods
PLC
The following three methods are available for use to start reading.
(1) Trigger signal
Turn on the trigger signals for the master and slave units.
(2) Reading start command
Specify the ID number on and send a command to the master.
Slave unit (3) Trigger area when using PLC link
Master unit Master unit controls Slave units. Specify the ID number on and turn on the trigger area on the master.
Data format
• Normal
Header Read data Terminator
• When using the additional data settings
Header Read data : Group name : ID Terminator
Commands
Function Command name Parameters Response
Start reading %Tm-LON m=00-31: ID -
Start reading m=00-31: ID
%Tm-LON,b -
(bank specification) b:01 to 16
Stop reading %Tm-LOFF m=00-31: ID -
%Tm-OK,KEYENCE,SR-2000,v
Version confirmation %Tm-KEYENCE m=00-31: ID m = 00-31: ID
v: Version
%Tm-OK,CANCEL
Cancel reading %Tm-CANCEL m=00-31: ID
m = 00-31: ID
55 GB SR-2000 UM
Configuration procedure Multi-head Mode
z Master settings
Control methods
(1) Network settings (1) Trigger signal
Turn on the trigger signal for the master unit.
1 Open the [Ethernet] tab. (2) Reading start command
2 Enter the [IP address] and [Subnet Mask] settings to assign to Send a command to the master.
the master unit. (3) Trigger area when using PLC link
Turn on the trigger area on the master unit.
(2) Destination settings
Data format
• Ethernet
• Normal
1 Open the [Ethernet] tab, and then start the [Setup Wizard].
Header Read data Terminator
2 STEP 1 Select the trigger input method.
3 STEP 2 Select the output destination. • When using the additional data settings
4 STEP 3 Select the communication protocol.
Header Read data : Group name : ID Terminator
5 STEP 4 Configure connection destination settings such as the
[IP Address] and the [Port]. Commands
6 Exit the [Setup Wizard]. Function Command name Parameter Response
Start reading LON - -
• RS-232C Start reading
LON,b b: 01 to 16 -
(bank specification)
1 Open the [RS-232C] tab. Stop reading LOFF - -
2 Match communication settings such as the "Baud Rate" with Version confirmation KEYENCE -
OK,KEYENCE,SR-2000,v
v: Version
those of the host device. Cancel reading CANCEL - OK,CANCEL
(3) Master/slave function settings Configuration procedure

z Master settings
1 On the [Operation] tab, open the [Master/Slave] screen.
2 Configure the settings as shown below. (1) Network settings
1 Open the [Ethernet] tab.

2 Enter the [IP address] and [Subnet Mask] settings to assign to
the master unit.
(2) Destination settings

• Ethernet
1 Open the [Ethernet] tab, and then start the [Setup Wizard].
3 STEP 2 Select the output destination.
z Slave settings 4 STEP 3 Select the communication protocol.
(1) Network settings 5 STEP 4 Configure connection destination settings such as the
[IP Address] and the [Port].
1 Open the [Ethernet] tab. 6 Exit the [Setup Wizard].
2 Enter the "IP address" and "Subnet Mask" settings. • RS-232C
(2) Master/slave settings 1 Open the [RS-232C] tab.

2 Match communication settings such as the "Baud Rate" with
those of the host device.
2 Configure the settings as shown below. Specify a unique ID for
(3) Master/slave function settings
each slave.
2 Configure the settings as shown below.
Point Only read data is sent from slave units to the master unit.
Other data such as test mode and preset registration results is not
output.
GB SR-2000 UM 56
z Slave settings
Advanced Multi-head Mode
(1) Network settings Advanced Multi-head mode is different from Multi-head mode, see below. Select
the mode appropriate for the intended operation.
2 Enter the "IP address" and "Subnet Mask" settings. Point • The system must be configured with SR-2000 series devices to use
(2) Master/slave settings Advanced Multi-head mode.
• When using Advanced Multi-head mode, the following data cannot be
obtained from slaves.
1 On the [Operation] tab, open the [Master/Slave] screen. Read count
Image file name
2 Configure the settings as shown below. Specify a unique ID for Read time
each slave. Time
Differences Between Advanced Multi-head Mode and Multi-

head Mode
• Read mode
Read mode Advanced Multi-head Multi-head
Single 3 3
Multi 1 3 -
Burst 3 -
3 Click [Send Configuration]. Script 3 -
Timing diagrams • Multiple Code Read Setting

Example 1)
Number of read data elements: 2 Data transmission timing: Advanced Multi-head Multi-head
Send after read The total number of codes to be read by The total number of readers must be
master and slave devices must be configured on the master with the [Read
When reading is successful When reading failed configured on the master only with the Data Number] setting under [Multi-head].
Timing input Codes to read setting.
Reading OK
Master (ID0) operation
Reading OK
Slave (ID1) operation
Data communication [ID1] ERROR The read data is output when the reading Use the [Codes to read] setting under "Per
Communication [ID0]
between Master unit and Slave unit finishes (operation same as that by a Reader" to configure the number of codes
single unit reading more than one code). to be read by each reader.
For each read unit ID, the read data is sent to the host device through the master
unit.
Example 2)
Number of read data elements: 2 Data transmission timing:
• Scripts
Timing input Advanced Multi-head Multi-head
Configure script settings on the master Script settings must be configured for both
Master (ID0) operation only. Slave data can be edited on the master and slave devices.
Slave (ID1) operation master.
Data communication [ID0] [ID1] ERROR

Communication Slave device Slave device
between Master unit and Slave unit Hub Hub
If there are multiple read data elements and transmission is made after timing
turns off, the data is output starting from the smallest unit ID regardless of the
order in which the data was read.
Point • Set the data transmission timing on the master unit.
Set slave units to "Send after read."
• Set "Codes to read" to a value that is less than or equal to the total
number of readers to connect. If "Codes to read" is set to a value that Slave device Slave device
is larger than this, you will not be able to finish reading. Master Master
• When you use multi head mode, you can only select the "Error Image" device device
and "Captured Image" options for saving images.
• OUT terminal when using multi head mode
If only one of multiple units successfully performs reading, that one
unit will output OK and all other units will output ERROR. • PLC Links
Advanced Multi-head Multi-head
Read data will be in the same region for Read data will be in different regions for
both master and slave devices. master and slave devices.
Digits 1 and 2 of 2 ASCII code The timing input

Timing input count
D+04 output data characters 3 D+55 count for the master 3
for the master (ID:0)
*4 *2 *3 (ID:0) appears.
Digits 3 and 4 of 2 ASCII code D+56 -
Reserved area
D+05 output data characters 3 D+59
*4 *2 *3
...
Digits 1 and 100 of
2 ASCII code D+60 - ID:1 read data
D Digits 999 and 1000 of output data 3 ID:1
characters 3 D+109 *2 *3
+503 output data *4 *4
*2 *3 Digits 1 and 100 of
D110 - ID:2 read data
output data 3 ID:2
D+159 *2 *3
*4
....
Digits 1 and 100 of
D1560 - ID:31 read data
output data 3 ID:31
D+1609 *2 *3
*4
• OUT terminal (OK/ERROR)

Advanced Multi-head Multi-head
OK/ERROR judgment set in the Advanced OK/ERROR is output from the OUT terminal
Multi-head mode on the master device can for the master device and the slave device
be output from the OUT terminal. individually.
57 GB SR-2000 UM
z Master settings
9-7 Code Quality Verification
(1) Network settings
What is Code Quality Verification?
The Code quality verification function evaluates the level (High/Low) of total grade
2 Enter the [IP address] and [Subnet Mask] settings to assign to based on the verification result output and the set threshold by verifying the 2D
the master unit. code scanned with the SR-2000 Series according to the marking quality
evaluation specified by a third-party institution.
The SR-2000 Series provides the following 2D code verifications according to the
(2) Destination settings Code quality verification standards.
• Ethernet
Standards Description Code type
1 Open the [Ethernet] tab, and then start the [Setup Wizard]. This is the 2D code marking quality evaluation
standard established by International QR
2 STEP 1 Select the trigger input method. ISO/IEC 15415 Organization for Standardization.
This is mainly used to evaluate 2D codes
DataMatrix
PDF417
3 STEP 2 Select the output destination.
printed on labels.
This is the DPM (Direct Part Marking) 2D code
4 STEP 3 Select the communication protocol. marking quality evaluation standard
established by Automatic Identification
ISO/IEC TR 29158 QR
5 STEP 4 Configure connection destination settings such as the (AIM DPM-1-2006)
Manufacturers.
This is based on ISO/IEC 15415.
DataMatrix
[IP Address] and the [Port]. This was also standardized by International
6 Exit the [Setup Wizard]. Organization for Standardization in 2011.
CODE39
• RS-232C ITF
2of5(Industrial 2of5)
1 Open the [RS-232C] tab. COOP 2of5
These standards evaluate barcode print quality NW-7(Codabar)
2 Match communication settings such as the "Baud Rate" with as defined by the International Organization for CODE128
those of the host device. ISO/IEC 15416 Standardization.
GS1-128
These standards are primarily used to evaluate
barcodes printed for labels. GS1 DataBar
(3) Master/slave function settings
CODE93
JAN/EAN/UPC
1 On the [Operation] tab, open the [Master/Slave] screen. Pharmacode
2 Configure the settings as shown below. GS1 Composite
This is the DataMatrix code marking quality
evaluation standard established by SAE
SAE AS9132 DataMatrix
(Society of Automotive Engineers) and used by
the aerospace industry.
This is the DataMatrix code marking quality
evaluation standard established by SEMI
SEMI T10-0701 (Semiconductor Equipment and Materials DataMatrix
International) and printed on semiconductor-
related materials.
This is a DataMatrix code marking quality
ISO/IEC 16022 evaluation function. DataMatrix
It makes reference to ISO/IEC 16022:2000.

Important Note that this Code quality verification function is designed to evaluate
marking quality of the standards-compliant 2D codes of the images
z Slave settings scanned with the SR-2000 Series, but cannot be used as an official 2D
code verification device.
(1) Network settings
When you select ISO/IEC 15415, you can verify code quality of
Reference
standalone PDF 417 and MicroPDF417 codes.
2 Enter the "IP address" and "Subnet Mask" settings.
(2) Master/slave settings
Code Quality Verification Function Settings
Configuration procedure
2 Configure the settings as shown below. Specify a unique ID for
each slave.
1 On the [Operation] tab, click [Code quality verification].
2 Select all the check boxes of the items that you want to verify.
GB SR-2000 UM 58
Settings Calibration
Set the threshold for the verification result. The UNSTABLE signal The calibration is a correction function of the reflectance to acquire an accurate
Verification threshold can be output from the OUT terminal when the reading results are
below the threshold. verification result when performing the code quality verification.
The verification grade will be appended to the read data.
Performing the calibration determines the reference values of brightness for black
Append grade and white. Therefore, tuning suitable for the code quality verification can be
Example) <Read data>:<verification grade>
You can change the verification grade expression. performed.
Select expression of
• Alphabet
grades
• Numeric Preparation of the calibration card
Append detailed You can append the detailed verification result when an "Append
verification result grade" check box is selected. Prepare the card with either of the following methods.
• Purchase a commercially sold calibration card.
Point • The decode time is longer when the code quality verification function
is enabled. • Print the card using AutoID Network Navigator.
Complete tuning after enabling the code quality verification function <Printing method>
or set the decode timeout to the value that is required for reading. 1 On the [Operation] tab, click [Code quality verification], then select any
Use the read time test mode to confirm there are no problems with the of the following standards.
read time for operation. • ISO/IEC 15415 • ISO/IEC TR 29158 • ISO/IEC 15416 • ISO/IEC 16022
• If reading ends with part of the code outside of the SR-2000 field of
view, the verification result grade and the detailed verification result 2 Press [Calibration card display], and print the displayed PDF.
will both be displayed as hyphens (-).
• If you want to add the evaluation values used in the judgment of
verification results, select the following check boxes.
On the [Operation] tab, click [Code quality verification], and then
select the [Appended values] check boxes.
• When using code verification function of Japanese Prescription
Medications, after enter a check in a verification item, by selecting the
subjected code type enables limitation of the code type to be verified.
• When the print verification function is used with the Light always on
setting, the print verification grade may deteriorate depending on the
read timing.
• When the contrast adjustment is set to a setting other than
“standard”, print verification output may be incorrect. If tuning is
implemented after validation of the print verification function, the
contrast adjustment method set to the bank is “Standard”regardless
of other settings.
Important Print the card on matte paper in A4, A5 or letter size for use.
Criterion Performing the calibration

Evaluation by the Code quality verification function is made for the total evaluation 1 Set the calibration to [Enable], and press [Perform calibration].
grade.
Evaluation standards are as follows.
ISO/IEC 15415, ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM DPM-1-2006), ISO/

IEC 15416, ISO/IEC 16022 2 Mount the reader at the appropriate distance at which the code quality
verification is performed, and place the code of the calibration card in the
High: Verification result >= Threshold value center of the field of view.
Low: Verification result < Threshold value
SAE AS9132
High: Verification result = Pass
Low: Verification result = Fail
Important SEMI T10-0701 does not offer total evaluation grade and cannot
make evaluations.
This means that functions that can be used after evaluation
cannot be used with SEMI T10-0701.
Functions that Use Judgment Results 3 When the calibration has completed, the following display appears. Press
[OK] and send the configuration.
Functions that can use code quality verification
evaluation results
STABLE terminal output, UNSTABLE terminal output
STABLE terminal output: This is output when the total evaluation grade is the
threshold value or more.
UNSTABLE terminal output: This is output when the total evaluation grade is less
Procedure to perform the code quality verification
than the threshold value.
( "6-23 Control the I/O Terminals" (page 29))
1 Determine the lighting configurations and installation conditions to
Saving images of unstable reading perform the code quality verification
• For DPM: Use the SR-2000 Series main unit only or SR-20AL
When the total evaluation grade is less than the threshold value, scanned images
• For label: Use the SR-2000 Series main unit only or LDL-S5015/LDL-S7227
are saved according to the setting (If the FTP transmission is set, images are sent
(Manufactured by NISSIN ELECTRONICS CO.,LTD.)
to the connection destination.).
* For installation conditions, refer to “Key Points for Installation”.
( "6-27 Save Captured Images" (page 32))
* DPM (Direct Parts Marking) is the technique to directly mark codes on
Silent mode products by using methods such as laser marking or stamping.
When the total evaluation grade is more or less than the threshold value, data 2 Determine the code quality verification standard.
communication can be restrained using the silent mode.
Refer to "6-30 Suppress Data Output" (page 34)
3 Perform the calibration under the determined installation condition.
59 GB SR-2000 UM
4 Execute tuning, and create the parameter bank for the code quality
Key Points for Installation
verification.
* When the calibration is enabled, the brightness is fixed, and the tuning plot If you want to use the code verification function of the SR-2000 Series with
is shown as follows. precision, note the following points.
Applicable standards: • ISO/IEC 15415 • ISO/IEC 15416 • ISO/IEC 16022
Installation method (SR-20AL)
For the code quality verification, use the SR-20AL and mount lighting at an angle
of 90°.
In this situation, illuminate the whole SR-2000 Series internal lighting.
5 Use the code quality verification measurement test mode to confirm

the verification result. 40 to 150mm
Installation method (LDL-S5015/LDL-S7227)

Use the LDL-S5015/LDL-S7227 (made by NISSIN ELECTRONIC CO., LTD.) and
mount lighting at an angle of 45°. (If necessary, you can also mount lighting at an
angle of 30° to perform verification.)
In this situation, disable the SR-2000 Series internal lighting.
LDL-S5015/
LDL-S7227
6 The output data when the code quality verification result is

appended to the read data can be confirmed by pressing the LON
button on the Terminal tab and reading the code. Installation distance:
Y (mm)
Lighting angle: X(°)
LDL-S5015 LDL-S7227
2.5 mm 2.5 mm 7.5 mm 7.5 mm

2.3 mm
7.3 mm
" Output Order of Code Quality Verification Results" (page 62)
* When appending MR (Minimum Reflectance) of ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM DPM-

1-2006) to the appended data, enable the calibration, and set [Table]-[Code
quality verification]-[ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM DPM-1-2006) Minimum reflec-
tance calculation] to [Enable].
LDL-S5015/LDL-S7227 installation distance: Y mm
Lighting angle: X(°) LDL-S5015 LDL-S7227
45° 66 mm 90 mm
30° 44.7 mm 61.2 mm
Recommended lighting
Manufacturer: NISSIN ELECTRONIC CO., LTD.
Model Description
LDL-S5015 108 mm squared, 26 mm deep
LED illumination
LDL-S7227 162 mm squared, 34 mm deep
LED illumination power supply LPRD-30W 24 VDC power supply input, 2 channels
L-2BK 2 branches, 1 channel - 2 light
Branch cable
L-4BK 4 branches, 2 channels- 4 light
GB SR-2000 UM 60
Lighting patterns Data Formats of Code Quality Verification Results
z Standard lighting pattern
z ISO/IEC 15415
Setting
Append
Append detailed Append Data format example
grades verification values
result
Alphabet Read data: C
Alphabet 3 Read data: C (-)
Alphabet 3 Read data: C/A/C/B/A/B/-/-/A/A/A/B/A
z Special lighting patterns Read data: C(-)/A(-)/A(0.733)/C(-)/C(-)/B(-)/-(-)/-(-)/
Alphabet 3 3
When you have to set the lighting in a fixed direction, such as when reading a A(0.002)/A(0.002)/A(1.000)/B(-0.646)/A(-0.289)
Numeric Read data: 2.0
DPM code on a hairline background, install the lighting at an angle of 30°, and
Numeric 3 Read data: 2.0(-)
then use one of the following lighting patterns. Numeric 3 Read data: 2.0/4.0/2.0/3.0/4.0/3.0/-/-/4.0/4.0/4.0/4.0/3.0/4.0
Read data: 2.0(-)/4.0(-)/4.0(0.733)/2.0(-)/2.0(-)/3.0(-)/-(-)/
(1) (2) Numeric 3 3
-(-)/4.0(0.002)/4.0(0.002)/4.0(1.000)/3.0(-0.646)/4.0(-0.289)
z ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM DPM-1-2006)

Setting
Append
result
(3) (4) (5) (6) Alphabet Read data: C
Alphabet 3 Read data: C (-)
Alphabet 3 Read data: C/A/C/B/A/B/-/-/A/A/A/B/A
Read data: C(-)/A(-)/A(0.733)/C(-)/C(-)/B(-)/-(-)/-(-)/
Alphabet 3 3
A(0.002)/A(0.002)/A(1.000)/B(-0.646)/A(-0.289)
Numeric 3 Read data: 2.0/4.0/2.0/3.0/4.0/3.0/-/-/4.0/4.0/4.0/4.0/3.0/4.0
Other precautions Numeric 3 3
Read data: 2.0(-)/4.0(-)/4.0(0.733)/2.0(-)/2.0(-)/3.0(-)/-(-)/
-(-)/4.0(0.002)/4.0(0.002)/4.0(1.000)/3.0(-0.646)/4.0(-0.289)
• Ensure that there are five or more pixels per cell. z ISO/IEC 15416
If there are less than five pixels per cell, reduce the distance between the SR-
Setting
2000 Series and the codes, and then adjust the focus and tune the reader again.
Append
result
Alphabet Read data: C
Alphabet 3 Read data: C(-)
5
Alphabet 3 Read data: A/A/A/A/A/A/A/A/A/A
Read data: A(-)/A(1.000)/A(1.000)/A(0.938)/A(0.059)/
Alphabet 3 3
A(0.871)/A(0.930)/A(1.000)/A(0.797)/A(0.031)
• Position codes so that they are in the center of the field of view. Numeric 3 Read data: 4.0/4.0/4.0/4.0/4.0/4.0/4.0/4.0/4.0/4.0
Read data: 4.0(-)/4.0(1.000)/4.0(1.000)/4.0(0.934)/
Numeric 3 3 4.0(0.063)/4.0(0.867)/4.0(0.930)/4.0(1.000)/4.0(0.805)/
4.0(0.031)
z SAE AS9132
* Settings for Select expression of grades are not reflected.
Setting
Append
result
• Ensure that there are spaces equal to one half the code size or more both above Read data: P
and below the codes. 3 Read data: P(-)
3 Read data: F/P/P/F/P
3 3 Read data: F(-)/P(-)/P(0.632)/F(0.852)/P(0.005)
0.5
z SEMI T10-0701
* Settings for Select expression of grades, Append detailed verification result
１ and Append values are not reflected.
Setting
0.5 Append
• Install the reader so that the codes are upright (not rotated) relative to the result
screen. Read data: 0.561/0.096/0.490/0.529/3.115/3.136/0.068/
0.087/0.136/0.087/1.000
z ISO/IEC 15416 (GS1 Composite)

Setting
Append
result
Alphabet Read data:C:A:C
Alphabet 3 Read data:C(-):A(-):C(-)
Read data:C:A/A/A/A/A/A/A/A/A/A:C/C/C/A/A/A/A/C/C/A/A/
Alphabet 3 3
A/A
• Mount the reader on a surface such that the product is level with, not angled to, Read data:B(-):A(-)/A(1.000)/A(1.000)/A(0.938)/A(0.059)/
the codes. Alphabet 3 3
A(0.871)/A(0.930)/A(1.000)/A(0.797)/A(0.031):B(-)/
B(0.711)/B(0.711)/A(0.945)/A(0.055)/A(0.895)/A(0.945)/
B(0.711)/A(0.633)/A(0.012)/A(0.914)/B(0.750)/A(0.750)
Number Read data:2.8:4.0:2.8
Number 3 Read data:2.8(-):4.0(-):2.8(-)
Read data:2.1:4.0/4.0/4.0/4.0/4.0/4.0/4.0/4.0/4.0/4.0:2.1/
Number 3
3.0/3.0/4.0/4.0/4.0/4.0/3.0/4.0/4.0/4.0/4.0/4.0
Read data:3.4(-):4.0(-)/4.0(1.000)/4.0(1.000)/4.0(0.934)/
4.0(0.063)/4.0(0.867)/4.0(0.930)/4.0(1.000)/4.0(0.805)/
Number 3 3 4.0(0.031):3.4(-)/4.0(1.000)/4.0(1.000)/4.0(0.941)/
4.0(0.055)/4.0(0.793)/4.0(0.840)/4.0(1.000)/4.0(0.832)/
4.0(0.066)/4.0(0.914)/4.0(0.750)/4.0(0.750)
61 GB SR-2000 UM
z ISO/IEC 16022 z ISO/IEC 15416 (GS1 Composite)
Setting Abbreviated
Evaluation item names
Append names
Append detailed Append Data format example (1) Overall Composite Symbol ALL 1D & 2D
grades verification values (1) Overall ALL
result (2) Decode DEC
Alphabet Read data: C (3) EdgeDetermination EDGE
Alphabet 3 Read data: C (-) (4) Symbol Contrast SC
Alphabet 3 Read data: C/A/C/B/A/A/A (5) Minimum Reflectance MINR
1D
Read data: C(-)/A(-)/C(0.632)/B(0.069)/A(1.000)/A(0.118)/ (6) Minimum Edge Contrast MINE
Alphabet 3 3 (7) Modulation MOD
A(0.118)
Numeric Read data: 2.0 (8) Quiet Zone QZ
Numeric 3 Read data: 2.0(-) (9) Decodability DCD
Numeric 3 Read data: 2.0/4.0/2.0/3.0/4.0/4.0/4.0 (10) Defects DEF
Read data: 2.0(-)/4.0(-)/2.0(0.632)/3.0(0.069)/4.0(1.000)/ (1) Overall ALL
Numeric 3 3 (2) Decode DEC
4.0(0.118)/4.0(0.118)
(3) EdgeDetermination EDGE
(4) Symbol Contrast SC
(5) Minimum Reflectance MINR
Output Order of Code Quality Verification Results (6) Minimum Edge Contrast MINE
(7) Modulation MOD 2D
z ISO/IEC 15415 (8) Quiet Zone QZ
Abbreviated (9) Decodability DCD
Evaluation item names (10) Defects DEF
names
(1) Overall ALL (11) Codeword Yield CY
(2) Decode DEC (12) Codeword Print Quality CPQ
(3) Symbol Contrast SC (13) Unused Error Correction UEC
(4) Modulation MOD
(5) Reflectance Margin RM
z ISO/IEC 16022
(6) Fixed Pattern Damage FPD Abbreviated
(7) Format Information Damage FID *1 names
(8) Version Information Damage VID *2 (1) Overall ALL
(9) Axial Nonuniformity AN (2) Decode DEC
(10) Grid Nonuniformity GN (3) Symbol Contrast SC
(11) Unused Error Correction UEC *3 (4) Axial Nonuniformity AN
(12) Print Growth Horizontal PGH *3 (5) Unused Error Correction UEC
(13) Print Growth Vertical PGV (6) Print Growth Horizontal PGH
(7) Print Growth Vertical PGV
z ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM DPM-1-2006)
*1 Enabled only for QR and micro QR code "-" is displayed for DataMatrix,
Evaluation item names Abbreviated PDF417, MicroPDF417.
names
(1) Overall ALL *2 QR code Model 2 Version 7 and later versions are only enabled. "-" is dis-
(2) Decode DEC played for others.
(3) Cell Contrast CC *3 This item is not included in the total evaluation.
(4) Cell Modulation CM *4 Appended if both Calibration and Minimum reflectance calculation are set to
(5) Reflectance Margin RM Enable.
(6) Fixed Pattern Damage FPD
*5 The number of items displayed for UEC, evaluation item for SEMI T10-0701
(7) Format Information Damage FID *1
(8) Version Information Damage VID *2 varies according to the code size.
(9) Axial Nonuniformity AN
(10) Grid Nonuniformity GN
(11) Unused Error Correction UEC
(12) Print Growth Horizontal PGH *3
(13) Print Growth Vertical PGV *3
(14) Minimum Reflectance MR *4
z ISO/IEC 15416
Evaluation item names Abbreviated
names
(1) Overall ALL
(2) Decode DEC
(3) EdgeDetermination EDGE
(5) Minimum Reflectance MINR
(6) Minimum Edge Contrast MINE
(7) Modulation MOD
(8) Quiet Zone QZ
(9) Decodability DCD
(10) Defects DEF
z SAE AS9132
Evaluation item names Abbreviated
names
(1) Overall ALL
(2) Quiet Zone QZ
(4) Angular Distortion AD
(5) Module Fill MF
z SEMI T10-0701
Abbreviated
names
(2) Signal to Noise Ratio SNR
(3) Horizontal Mark Growth HMG
(4) Vertical Mark Growth VMG
(5) DataMatrix Cell Width DMCW
(6) DataMatrix Cell Height DMCH
(7) Horizontal Mark Move HMM
(8) Vertical Mark Move VMM
(9) Cell Defects CD
(10) Finder Pattern Defects FPD
UEC1 to
(11) Unused Error Correction *5
UEC10
GB SR-2000 UM 62
Verification Items Axial nonuniformity AN (Axial Nonuniformity)
Evaluates the distortion degree in vertical and
Description
ISO/IEC 15415 horizontal size of the code.
AN = abs (Xavg - Yavg)/((Xavg + Yavg)/2)
Xavg : Average cell size in horizontal
Decode success/failure DEC (Decode) Calculation
direction
formula
Evaluates whether decoding is possible or Yavg : Vertical cell size in horizontal
Description
not. direction
Calculation - A : less than 0.06
-
formula B : 0.06 to 0.08
Criterion - Criterion C : 0.08 to 0.10
D : 0.10 to 0.12
Symbol contrast SC (Symbol Contrast) F : more than 0.12
Evaluates the difference between the

Grid nonuniformity GN (Grid Nonuniformity)
maximum brightness value (Rmax) and
Description Evaluates the maximum position slip of each
minimum brightness value (Rmin) in the code Description
area. cell
SC = (Rmax-Rmin)/255 GN = Hmax/X
Calculation Calculation
Rmax : Maximum brightness value Hmax : Maximum position slip amount
formula formula
Rmin : Minimum brightness value X : Cell size
A : more than 0.70 A : less than 0.38
B : 0.55 to 0.70 B : 0.38 to 0.50
Criterion C : 0.40 to 0.55 Criterion C : 0.50 to 0.63
D : 0.20 to 0.40 D : 0.63 to 0.75
F : less than 0.20 F : more than 0.75
Modulation MOD (Modulation) UEC

Unused error correction
(Unused Error Correction)
Evaluates the variation degree in cell
Description Evaluates the ratio of error correction unused
brightness Description
at the time of decoding.
Each cell's MOD = 2 ½ (abs (R-GT)/SC)
R : Brightness value UEC = 1.0 - ((e + 2t)/(d - p))
Calculation
formula GT : Binarization threshold value e : Number of code words that cannot be
SC : Symbol contrast read
Calculation
t : Number of error code words
Criterion formula
d : Number of error corrected code
-
words
Reflectance margin RM (Reflectance Margin) p : Number of error detected code words
Evaluates the variation degree in cell A : more than 0.62
Description brightness with black and white of the correct B : 0.50 to 0.62
cell considered. Criterion C : 0.37 to 0.50
[White cell] D : 0.25 to 0.37
R >= GT → MARGIN = 2 ½ (R-GT)/SC F : less than 0.25
R < GT → MARGIN = 0
[Black cell] PGH
Print growth (horizontal)
Calculation R < GT → MARGIN = 2 ½ (GT-R)/SC (Print Growth Horizontal)
formula R > GT = → MARGIN = 0 Evaluates the mark cell growth in the
MARGIN : Margin of each cell horizontal direction.
R : Brightness value Description
This item is not included in the total
GT : Binarization threshold value evaluation.
SC : Symbol contrast
(D - 0.5)/0.15
Criterion Calculation D : On the horizontal clock pattern
formula Ratio of the number of pixels of mark
Fixed pattern damage FPD (Fixed Pattern Damage) cell
Evaluates the degree of the fixed pattern A : -0.50 to 0.50
Description damage (area on the right) dependent on the B : -0.70 to -0.50 or 0.50 to 0.70
code type. Criterion C : -0.85 to -0.70 or 0.70 to 0.85
D : -1.00 to -0.85 or 0.85 to 1.00
Calculation F : less than -1.00 or more than 1.00
-
formula
Print growth (vertical) PGV (Print Growth Vertical)
Evaluates the mark cell growth in the vertical
Criterion -
direction.
Description
evaluation.
FID
Format information damage (D - 0.5)/0.15
(Format Information Damage)
Calculation D : On the vertical clock pattern
Evaluates the format information damage formula Ratio of the number of pixels of mark
Description
degree of QR code. cell
A : -0.50 to 0.50
Calculation B : -0.70 to -0.50 or 0.50 to 0.70
-
formula
Criterion C : -0.85 to -0.70 or 0.70 to 0.85
D : -1.00 to -0.85 or 0.85 to 1.00
F : less than -1.00 or more than 1.00
Criterion -
VID
Version information damage (Version Information
Damage)
Evaluates the version information damage
Description degree of QR code (Model 2, version 7 and
later versions).
Calculation
-
formula
Criterion -
63 GB SR-2000 UM
ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM DPM-1-2006) Axial nonuniformity AN (Axial Nonuniformity)
Evaluates the distortion degree in vertical and
Description
Decode success/failure DEC (Decode) horizontal size of the code.
Evaluates whether decoding is possible or AN = abs (Xavg - Yavg)/((Xavg + Yavg)/2)

Description Xavg : Average cell size in horizontal
not. Calculation
direction
Calculation - formula
- Yavg : Vertical cell size in horizontal
formula
direction
Criterion -
A : less than 0.06
B : 0.06 to 0.08
Cell contrast CC (Cell Contrast)
Criterion C : 0.08 to 0.10
Evaluates the difference between the average D : 0.10 to 0.12
Description brightness value of bright cell (ML) and F : more than 0.12
average brightness value of dark cell (MD).
CC = (ML - MD)/ML Grid nonuniformity GN (Grid Nonuniformity)
ML : Average brightness value of bright Evaluates the maximum position slip of each
Calculation Description
cell cell
formula
MD : Average brightness value of dark
GN = Hmax/X
cell Calculation
Hmax : Maximum position slip amount
A : more than 0.30 formula
X : Cell size
B : 0.25 to 0.30
A : less than 0.38
B : 0.38 to 0.50
D : 0.15 to 0.20
F : less than 0.15
D : 0.63 to 0.75
F : more than 0.75
Cell modulation CM (Cell Modulation)
Evaluates the variation degree in cell UEC
Description Unused error correction
brightness (Unused Error Correction)
[White cell] Evaluates the ratio of error correction unused
CM = (R - GT)/(ML - GT) (When R ≥ GT) Description
[Black cell]
UEC = 1.0 - ((e + 2t)/(d - p))
Calculation CM = (GT- R)/(GT- MD) (When R < GT) -
e : Number of code words that cannot be
formula R : Brightness value
read
GT : Binarization threshold value Calculation
ML : Average brightness value of bright cell formula
d : Number of error corrected code
MD : Average brightness value of dark cell
words
Criterion - p : Number of error detected code words
A : more than 0.62
Reflectance margin RM (Reflectance Margin) B : 0.50 to 0.62
Evaluates the variation degree in cell Criterion C : 0.37 to 0.50
Description brightness with black and white of the correct D : 0.25 to 0.37
cell considered. F : less than 0.25
[White cell]
R >=GT → MARGIN = (R-GT)/(ML-GT) PGH
Print growth (horizontal)
R < GT → MARGIN = 0 (Print Growth Horizontal)
[Black cell] Evaluates the mark cell growth in the
-
Calculation R < GT → MARGIN = (GT-R)/(GT-MD) horizontal direction.
Description
formula R >=GT → MARGIN = 0 This item is not included in the total
MARGIN : Margin of each cell evaluation.
R : Brightness value (D - 0.5)/0.15
GT : Binarization threshold value D : On the horizontal clock pattern
Calculation
CC : Cell contrast formula Ratio of the number of pixels of mark
Criterion - cell
A : -0.50 to 0.50
Fixed pattern damage FPD (Fixed Pattern Damage) B : -0.70 to -0.50 or 0.50 to 0.70
Evaluates the degree of the fixed pattern Criterion C : -0.85 to -0.70 or 0.70 to 0.85
Description damage (area on the right) dependent on the D : -1.00 to -0.85 or 0.85 to 1.00
code type. F : less than -1.00 or more than 1.00
Calculation Print growth (vertical) PGV (Print Growth Vertical)

-
formula
Evaluates the mark cell growth in the vertical
direction.
Description
Criterion - evaluation.
(D - 0.5)/0.15
Calculation D : On the vertical clock pattern
FID formula Ratio of the number of pixels of mark
Format information damage
(Format Information Damage) cell
Evaluates the format information damage A : -0.50 to 0.50
Description
degree of QR code. B : -0.70 to -0.50 or 0.50 to 0.70
Criterion C : -0.85 to -0.70 or 0.70 to 0.85
Calculation D : -1.00 to -0.85 or 0.85 to 1.00
-
formula F : less than -1.00 or more than 1.00
MR
Minimum reflectance
(Minimum Reflectance)
Criterion -
Description Evaluates the minimum reflectance of the code.
Rcal × (SRcal/SRtarget) × (Mltarget/MLcal)
Rcal : Reflectance of the calibration card
VID
Version information damage SRcal : Brightness during calibration
(Version Information Damage)
(Exposure time × Gain)
Evaluates the version information damage
Calculation SRtarget : Brightness when reading the
Description degree of QR code (Model 2, version 7 and
formula actual workpiece
later versions).
MLtarget : Average white level when
reading the actual workpiece
Calculation
- MLcal : Average white level during
formula
calibration
A : ≥5%
Criterion
F : <5%
Criterion -
* Appended if both Calibration and Minimum reflectance calculation are set to Enable.
GB SR-2000 UM 64
ISO/IEC 15416 SAE AS9132
Decode success/failure DEC(Decode) Quiet zone QZ (Quiet Zone)

Evaluates whether decoding is possible or
Description Evaluates if multiple cells of quiet zone exist
not. Description
around the code.
Calculation
- -
formula Calculation
-
A : Success formula
Criterion
F : Failure
Criterion -
Number of edges EDGE (EdgeDetermination)
Determines whether the read number of
Description edges is equal to the assumed number of Symbol contrast SC (Symbol Contrast)
edges. Evaluates the difference between the
Calculation - maximum brightness value of dark cell (Dmax)
- Description
formula and minimum brightness value of bright cell
(Lmin) in the code area.
A : Match
Criterion (Lmin - Dmax)/255
F : Mismatch
Lmin : Minimum brightness value of
Calculation
Symbol contrast SC (Symbol Contrast) bright cell
formula
Dmax : Maximum brightness value of
dark cell
maximum brightness value (Rmax) and
Description
minimum brightness value (Rmin) in the code Pass : more than 0.20
Criterion
area. Fail : less than 0.20
Calculation
SC = Rmax – Rmin
formula - Angular distortion AD (Angular Distortion)
A : SC ≥ 70 % Evaluates the distortion degree from 90
B : SC ≥ 55 % Description degrees of the angle formed by the straight
Criterion C : SC ≥ 40 % line at L part.
D : SC ≥ 20 %
Calculation
F : SC < 20 % -
formula
MINR Pass : -7 to 7
Minimum Reflectance Criterion
(Minimum Reflectance) Fail : less than -7 or more than 7
Minimum reflectance among scanned
Description
waveforms Module fill MF (Module Fill)
Calculation Evaluates the distortion from the correct size
- - Description
formula of the cell size.
A : Rmin ≤ 0.5 Rmax
Criterion Calculation
F : Rmin > 0.5 Rmax Length of the side of cell/Module size
formula
MINE
Minimum edge contrast Pass : 0.60 to 1.05
(Minimum Edge Contrast) Criterion
Fail : less than 0.60 or more than 1.05
Minimum value of reflectance gap between
Description space (including the quiet zone) and an
adjacent bar
EC = Rs - Rb SEMI T10-0701
Calculation ECmin = Min(EC) -
formula Rs : Reflectance of space
Rb : Reflectance of space Symbol contrast SC (Symbol Contrast)
A : ECmin ≥ 15% Evaluates the difference between the average
Criterion
F : ECmin < 15% Description brightness value of background (GL) and
average brightness value of foreground (GD).
Modulation MOD (Modulation)
(GL - GD)/255
Ratio between the minimum edge contrast GL : Average brightness value of
Description Calculation
and the symbol contrast background
formula
Calculation GD : Average brightness value of
MOD = ECmin / SC foreground
formula
A : MOD ≥ 0.70 - Criterion 1 is the best.
B : MOD ≥ 0.60
Criterion C : MOD ≥ 0.50 Signal to noise ratio SNR (Signal to Noise Ratio)
D : MOD ≥ 0.40
F : MOD < 0.40 Evaluates the symbol contrast size against
Description
brightness variation.
Minimum quiet zone QZ (Quiet Zone) (GL - GD)/Max (DL, DD)
Evaluates whether the quiet zone width GL : Average brightness value of
Description background
conforms to the standards.
GD : Average brightness value of
Calculation Calculation foreground
- -
formula formula DL : Dispersion of background
A : Satisfied brightness value
Criterion
F : Not satisfied DD : Dispersion of foreground
brightness value
* The evaluation of GS1 DataBar Limited (including CC-A/CC-B) is dependent on Max() : Maximum value
the main unit setting. Criterion The greater, the better.
Decodability DCD (Decodability)
The decode margin is dependent on the code HMG
Horizontal mark growth
type. Evaluates the level of error between the (Horizontal Mark Growth)
Description
ideal line width pattern and the actual line Evaluates the expansion and contraction
width pattern. - Description degree of mark cell width of the timing pattern
Calculation on the upper part.
-
formula Med (MCW)/(Med (MCW) + Med (SCW))
Criterion - Calculation MCW : Mark cell width
formula SCW : Space cell width
Defects DEF (Defects) Med () : Median value
Description Evaluates color unevenness in an element. 0.5 is the best.
Criterion Small→Thin
Defects = ERNmax / SC
Large→Thick
Calculation ERN = (Gap between the maximum and
formula minimum values of reflectance in an element),
ERNmax = Max (ERN)
-
A : Defects ≤ 0.15
B : Defects ≤ 0.20
Criterion C : Defects ≤ 0.25
D : Defects ≤ 0.30
F : Defects > 0.30
65 GB SR-2000 UM
Vertical mark growth VMG (Vertical Mark Growth) ISO/IEC 15416 (GS1 composite) and ISO/IEC 15415 (PDF
Evaluates the expansion and contraction 417, MicroPDF417)
Description degree of mark cell height of the timing
pattern on the right.
Decode success/failure DEC(Decode)
Med (MCH)/(Med (MCH) + Med (SCH))
Calculation MCH : Mark cell height Evaluates whether decoding is possible or
Description
formula SCH : Space cell height not.
Med () : Median value Calculation
- -
0.5 is the best. formula
Criterion Small→Thin A : Success
Large→Thick Criterion
F : Failure
DMCW Number of edges EDGE (EdgeDetermination)

Average cell width
(DataMatrix Cell Width) Determines whether the read number of
Description edges is equal to the assumed number of
Description Evaluates the average cell width.
edges.
(UL + BL)/(2 ½ N)
Calculation -
Calculation UL : Number of upper side pixels -
formula
formula BL : Number of bottom side pixels
N : Number of horizontal cells A : Match
Criterion
F : Mismatch
Criterion -
Symbol contrast SC (Symbol Contrast)
DMCH maximum brightness value (Rmax) and
Average cell height Description
(DataMatrix Cell Height) minimum brightness value (Rmin) in the code
Description Evaluates the average cell height. area.
(RL + LL)/(2 ½ M) Calculation
SC = Rmax – Rmin
Calculation RL : Number of right side pixels formula -
formula LL : Number of left side pixels A : SC ≥ 70 %
M : Number of vertical cells B : SC ≥ 55 %
Criterion C : SC ≥ 40 %
Criterion - D : SC ≥ 20 %
F : SC < 20 %
HMM MINR
Horizontal misplacement Minimum reflectance
(Horizontal Mark Misplacement) (Minimum Reflectance)
Evaluates the misplacement of the mark cell Minimum reflectance among scanned
Description
Description center position of the timing pattern on the waveforms
upper part. Calculation
- -
¦MHi/(N ½ DMCW) formula
MHi : Amount of the horizontal A : Rmin ≤ 0.5 Rmax
Calculation misplacement of each cell on Criterion
F : Rmin > 0.5 Rmax
formula upper TP
N : Number of horizontal cells MINE
DMCW : Average cell width Minimum edge contrast
(Minimum Edge Contrast)
0 is the best. Minimum value of reflectance gap between
Criterion
(1 means the 1-cell misplacement.) Description space (including the quiet zone) and an
adjacent bar
VMM EC = Rs – Rb
Vertical misplacement
(Vertical Mark Misplacement) Calculation ECmin = Min(EC) -
Evaluates the misplacement of the mark cell formula Rs : Reflectance of space
Description center position of the timing pattern on the Rb : Reflectance of space
right. A : ECmin ≥15%
Criterion
¦MVi/(M ½ DMCH) F : ECmin < 15%
MVi : Amount of the vertical
Calculation misplacement of each cell on Modulation MOD (Modulation)
formula the right TP Ratio between the minimum edge contrast
Description
M : Number of vertical cells and the symbol contrast
DMCH : Average cell width Calculation
MOD = ECmin / SC
0 is the best. formula
Criterion
(1 means the 1-cell misplacement.) A : MOD ≥ 0.70 -
B : MOD ≥ 0.60
Cell defects CD (Cell Defects) Criterion C : MOD ≥ 0.50
D : MOD ≥ 0.40
Evaluates the number of pixels for which white
Description F : MOD < 0.40
and black judgment was wrong.
Calculation - Minimum quiet zone QZ (Quiet Zone)
Number of wrong pixels/All pixels
formula Evaluates whether the quiet zone width
Description
Criterion 0 is the best. satisfies the standards.
Calculation
- -
Finder pattern defects FPD (Finder Pattern Defects) formula
Evaluates the number of pixels for which white A : Satisfied

Description Criterion
and black judgment was wrong at the L part. F : Not satisfied
Calculation Number of wrong pixels at the L part/All pixels Decodability DCD (Decodability)
formula at the L part Decode margin dependent on the code type
Evaluates the level of error between the ideal
Description
Criterion 0 is the best. line width pattern and the actual line width
pattern. -
Calculation
-
UEC formula
(Unused Error Correction) Criterion -
Evaluates the ratio of error correction unused
Description Defects DEF(Defects)
UEC = 1.0 - ((e + 2t)/(d - p)) Description Evaluates color unevenness in an element.
e : Number of code words that cannot be Defects = ERNmax / SC
read Calculation ERN = (Gap between the maximum and
Calculation
t : Number of error code words formula minimum values of reflectance in an element),
formula
d : Number of error corrected code ERNmax = Max (ERN)
words -
p : Number of error detected code words A : Defects ≤ 0.15
B : Defects ≤ 0.20
1.00 : Error correction is not used at all. Criterion C : Defects ≤ 0.25
Criterion 0.00 : Decoding failed D : Defects ≤ 0.30
or error correction has been used up. F : Defects > 0.30
GB SR-2000 UM 66
Effective codeword ratio CY(Codeword Yield)
z ISO/IEC 16022 Verification
Description Ratio of successfully read codewords Decode DEC (Decode)
Calculation Evaluates whether decoding is possible or
- Description
formula not.
A : CY ≥ 71% - Calculation
B : CY ≥ 64% - -
formula
Criterion C : CY ≥ 57%
D : CY ≥ 50% A : Approved
Criterion
F : CY < 50% F : Failed
CPQ
Codeword print quality Symbol Contrast SC (Symbol Contrast)
(Codeword Print Quality)
Evaluates the difference between the code
Description Evaluates the print quality of codewords.
Description region brightness top 10% average (RL) and
Calculation bottom 10% average (RD).
- -
formula
Calculation
Criterion - SC = RL – RD / 255
formula
-
UEC A : SC ≥ 70 %
(Unused Error Correction) B : SC ≥ 55 %
Evaluates the ratio of error correction unused Criterion C : SC ≥ 40 %
Description D : SC ≥ 20 %
F : SC ≤ 20 %
UEC = 1.0 – ((e + 2t) / ( d – p))
e : Number of codewords that cannot be
Calculation read Axial Nonuniformity AN (Axial Nonuniformity)
formula t : Number of error codewords
Evaluate degree of distortion in the vertical
d : Number of error corrected codewords - Description
p : Number of error detected codewords and horizontal size of the code.
A : UEC ≥ 0.62 AN = abs (Xavg – Yavg) / (Xavg + Xavg) / 2)

Calculation
B : UEC ≥ 0.50 Xavg: Average cell size in horizontal direction
formula
Criterion C : UEC ≥ 0.37 Yavg: Average cell size in vertical direction
D : UEC ≥ 0.25 A : less than 0.06
F : UEC < 0.25
B : 0.06 to 0.08
D : 0.10 to 0.12
GS1 DataBar Limited and CC-A/B (GS1 DataBar Limited) F : more than 0.12
GS1 DataBar Limited (including GS1 DataBar Limited as a part of CC-A/B) is
characterized by being closely similar to some portion of other barcodes in terms UEC
Unused Error Correction
(Unused Error Correction)
of the bar structure.
Accordingly, the standard regarding GS1 DataBar Limited was amended in 2011. Evaluates percentage of error correction not
Description
used during decoding.
The amended standard requires that a trailing space five times the width of the UEC = 1.0 – ((e + 2t) / (d - p))
narrow bar is maintained to the right of GS1 DataBar Limited. e : Number of code words not read
Calculation
formula
d : Number of corrected code words
-
p : Number of code words where error detected
A : more than 0.62
B : 0.50 to 0.62
D : 0.25 to 0.37
F : less than 0.25
A space 5 times the narrow
bar width as shown here
PGH
must be secured. Print Growth (Horizontal)
(Print Growth Horizontal)
Evaluates the growth in horizontal direction
Description
marked cell.
(D – 0.5) / 0.15
Calculation
D : Proportion of number of pixels in marked
formula
cells on horizontal clock pattern
For materials with a dark surface, if the spaces are is printed with a laser marker, A : –0.50 to 0.50
the marker may not comply with the new standard. In this case, the SR-2000 B : –0.70 to –0.50 or 0.50 to 0.70
Series cannot be tuned with the factory default setting. Criterion C : –0.85 to –0.70 or 0.70 to 0.85
D : –1.00 to –0.85 or 0.85 to 1.00
If tuning is not possible with these printed codes, set the Limited right space F : less than –1.00 or more than 1.00
scaling factor to 0 and retry tuning.
PGV
Print Growth Vertical
(Print Growth Vertical)
Evaluates the growth in vertical direction
Description
marked cell.
(D – 0.5) / 0.15
Calculation
D : Proportion of number of pixels in marked
formula
cell on vertical clock pattern
A : –0.50 to 0.50
B : –0.70 to –0.50 or 0.50 to 0.70
Criterion C : –0.85 to –0.70 or 0.70 to 0.85
D : –1.00 to –0.85 or 0.85 to 1.00
F : less than –1.00 or more than 1.00
Precautions
Notes when using the code quality verification function
The code quality verification results may change according to the reading method
and parameter bank.
• If the colors of the code and background change, set the parameter bank used
as standard, and then verify code quality.
67 GB SR-2000 UM
9-8 Matching level 9-9 Preset Data Comparison
Matching level is a reference value for determining how easy it is for the SR-2000
to read the code for successful image reading when the SR-2000 reads the code
successfully. Preset Data Function
It can be used to check the reading allowance or it can also be used as
correlation index of a parameter bank when tuning. This function allows the SR-2000 Series to compare the read code data against
the registered code data (preset data), and output an OK/NG signal to indicate
whether or not they match. This allows the SR-2000 Series to detect different
Reading rate 100% Reading rate 100% codes simply without a trigger sensor or other devices.
One set of preset data can be stored in the SR-2000 Series (maximum 494 digits).
Matching level 75 Matching level 43 The starting digit (starting position) and range (number of digits) for the
comparison can be set in the preset data, so even codes with more than 494
digits can be verified.
Point • The comparison starts at the specified starting position on the preset
data and continues for the specified number of digits. Data cannot be
verified at multiple points.
• You cannot use the preset data comparison function when reading
multiple codes.
You can see that the code on the left has a higher
margin than the code on the right. Registering Preset Data
Use one of the following three methods to register to the SR-2000 Series preset
data for comparison.
Matching level OK/NG judgment function
(1) Use AutoID Network Navigator to register the data.
Matching level OK/NG judgment function notifies about changes in code marking "6-29 Compare the Read Data (Preset Data Comparison)" (page 34)
conditions and changes in read conditions by determining whether the matching
level is high or low against the set threshold. Before a serious problem occurs due (2) Use commands to register the data.
to reduced stability of reading, this function can be used as information to take an Example) Registering "123" as the data
appropriate action. Send the following command.
WP,402,313233[CR]
Criteria for judging matching level
"12-3 SR-2000 Series Configuration Commands" (page 78)
Criteria for judging the matching level is as follows:
High: Matching level >= Threshold (3) Read a code to register the data.
Low: Matching level < Threshold You can read a code to register its read results as the preset data.
• Results output when reading a code to register as the preset data
Functions that use matching level OK/NG judgments PR nn : Result data nn = Preset registration result (00 to 05)
The following 4 types of functions can be used by enabling the matching level OK/
NG judgment function. nn Description Result data
STABLE terminal output, UNSTABLE terminal output 00 Preset registration success Read data
01 Preset read failure Read error data
STABLE terminal output........... Output when the matching level exceeds the threshold.
UNSTABLE terminal output ......Output when the matching level falls below the threshold. 02 The preset effective digit is specified as 0.
( "6-23 Control the I/O Terminals" (page 29)) The number of digits of read data is less
03
than the number of digits for preset start.
Saving unstably read images The preset registration is not possible [null]
When the matching level is lower than the threshold, save it in accordance with the 04 because the operation mode is set to multi
scan image settings (when set to FTP transmission, send to the destination). 2 or multiple read.
( "6-27 Save Captured Images" (page 32)) 05 Two or more "!" exist in preset data.
Silent Mode
When the matching level is higher or lower than the threshold, data Output Terminal Operation
communication can be restrained using silent mode.
( "6-30 Suppress Data Output" (page 34)) When you make a comparison against preset data, the results output from the
output terminal are shown below.
Function to append matching level
Matching level can be appended to read data.
Output terminal operation
( "10-2 Data Communication Format" (page 73)) Reading successful and the read data matches the preset
OK
data
Reading successful and the read data does not match the
NG (Comparison NG)
preset data
Setting the matching level judgment function
Reading error ERROR
"6-20 Check Print Quality" (page 27) To assign the above functions to an output terminal, refer to "6-23 Control the I/
O Terminals" (page 29).
Point The decode time is longer when the matching level judgment function
is enabled. Complete tuning after enabling the function or set the
decode timeout to the value that is required for reading.
Use the read time test mode to confirm there are no problems with the
read time for operation.
GB SR-2000 UM 68
Preset Data Wild Cards 9-10 Scripts
You can use "!" and "?" as wild cards in the preset data.
With the SR-2000 Series, you can use a simple programming language known as
Meanings of "!" and "?" in the preset data "scripts" to operate with a higher degree of freedom than is available with the
setup software (AutoID Network Navigator).
!
This indicates an arbitrary character string. This function is aimed at those who have programming experience.
You can only use this wild card once within the preset data. For details, refer to the separate document "SR-2000/1000/750/700 Series Script
This indicates an arbitrary character. Reference."
?
You can use this wild card multiple times within the preset data.
Examples) What Can Scripts Do?

Preset data Read data Output result (1) Edit data.
1234 OK • Cutting arbitrary locations from the read data
123! 12345 OK • Adding arbitrary character strings to the read data
1111 NG (Comparison NG) • Comparing data and outputting result data
1234 OK • Four arithmetic operations (add, subtract, multiply, and divide)
123? 12345 NG (Comparison NG) • Adding code rotation angles
1111 NG (Comparison NG) (2) Control the output from the output terminals.
1234 OK • Comparing data and generating output from the output terminals
1234 12345 NG (Comparison NG) (3) Edit image file names.
1111 NG (Comparison NG) • Changing the name of the image file to send over FTP
• Adding time stamps to image file names
(4) Control triggers
Reference If no preset data is registered, "!" is automatically registered for the
preset data. • Continuous scanning is possible according to conditions.
Sequence Comparison
This function checks sequencing of numeric values. [1] Creating the script file [2] Changing the script [3] Transferring the script file
You can make comparisons in situations where the numeric values within the code execution setting
change one by one, such as checking serial numbers.
Operation
If the comparison is successful, the numeric value of the comparison data is
incremented (or decremented).
If the comparison is not successful, the numeric value of the comparison data is
not incremented (or decremented) until the correct sequence value is checked.
[1] Creating the script file
The first numeric value registered as a preset after the power is turned on is
Create the script file (FmtSet.Lua) and write the program using a text edi-
treated as the basis for incrementing (or decrementing) in the comparison.
tor such as notepad.exe.
Settings [2] Changing the script execution settings
Using AutoID Network Navigator, enable the script execution setting of
Configure the following settings.
the SR-2000 Series.
Comparison method "Sequential." • Setting locations
Origin Specify the digit at which to start the comparison. (1) Edit data.
Length Specify how many digits to compare starting at the "Origin." On the [Operation] tab, click [Edit Data], and then select the "Use script"
Increment Set the increment (or decrement) of a single operation. check box.
(2) Control the output from the output terminals.
Example) Operation with the following settings On the [Operation] tab, click [Edit Data], and then select the "Use script"
Origin: 3 check box.
Length: 2 * On the [I/O] tab, select the "SCRIPT CONTROL" check box under [OUT1
Increment: 2 Function], [OUT2 Function], or [OUT3 Function].
First reading Reading + Comparison Reading + Comparison Reading + Comparison (3) Edit image file names.
On the [Saving Images] tab, select the "Use script" check box under [Edit
Data A0 96 B A0 98 B A0 96 B A0 00 B Image File Name].
Preset value Comparison Comparison Comparison
Numerical value Numerical value
* You have to configure the FTP transmission settings.
+2
+2 +2 [3] Transferring the script file
Preset value 98 98 00 00
Transfer the script file (FmtSet.Lua) to the SR-2000 Series.
"Comparison "Comparison "Comparison
OK" NG" OK" • Transfer methods
• Use [Send Configuration] in AutoID Network Navigator to transfer the script
Point The following restrictions are placed on the sequence comparison file.
function: • Use the [Terminal] in AutoID Network Navigator to transfer the script file.
• The comparison results in NG when a value other than a numerical • Transfer the script file from "File View."
value is read.
• The preset data cannot be registered through communication.
• Transfer the script file through the FTP interface.
69 GB SR-2000 UM
Script file application timing
Even while the SR-2000 Series is running, you can transfer script files at any time
9-11 Command replacement
through the FTP interface. This function replaces commands (text strings) received by SR-2000 series
In this situation, the script program will be applied after the trigger turns on after devices.
the file is transferred.
Benefits of Command Replacement

Timing input
(1) Execute commands by replacing inbound text strings.
(2) Execute specific commands via IN terminal input.

A B Applicable commands: RESET, BCLR, HCLR, LON, [Bank No.], and LOFF
Script file transfer
Data A A B [1] Create command [2] Change the response [3] Transfer command
Image file name
replacement files. text string configuration. replacement files.
Point • When transferring a script file using "File View" or the FTP interface,
you have to set the file name to "FmtSet.Lua."
• If config.ptc or FmtSet.Lua is transferred to the SR-2000 through the
FTP interface while the SR-2000 is operating, its reading operation
will be canceled.
[1] Create command replacement files.

Use notepad.exe or some other text editor to create COMMAND.CFG
Handling Script Files
command replacement files and corresponding program files.
This section describes how to handle script files when restoring the SR-2000 to its [2] Change the response text string configuration.
factory default configuration or when using the changeover function. Use AutoID Network Navigator to change the [Response Text String
Configuration] setting in the SR-2000 series device to "Command
Operation contents FmtSet.lua
Replacement".
AutoID Network Navigator Receives with the configuration file at the To replace the IN terminal input, change the [IN* Terminal Function] to
"Retrieve Configuration" same time.
[Command Replacement].
AutoID Network Navigator Sends with the configuration file at the
• Setting Navigation
"Send Configuration" same time.
(1) Response Text String Configuration
AutoID Network Navigator "Default Settings" Remains.
[Table] – [Misc] – [Specify command response string] – [Basic command
Send or delete by FileView Transmission and deletion possible from PC.
response string] – [Command replacement]
Reading quick setup codes Remains.
(2) IN* Terminal Settings
SAVE Remains.
[I/O] – [IN* Terminal] – [Function] – [Command replacement]
LOAD Remains. [3] Transfer command replacement files.
Send
DFLT Remains. Send the COMMAND.CFG command replacement file to the SR-2000 series
command
BSAVE Creates backup files. device.
BLOAD Loads backup files. • Send Methods
• Send using the [Send Configuration] option in "AutoID Network Navigator".
Check Information Using Commands • Send from "File View".
• Send via FTP.
Command
Function Parameter Response Creating Command Replacement Files
name
OK,SCPTIME,now=Aus,
maxBus,min=Cus Format
A: The most recent script
Obtaining the script processing time “[Character strings to be replaced]”,”[Command after replacement]”,”[Response
SCPTIME -
processing time*1 B: The maximum processing OK]”,”[Response Error]”
time
C: The minimum processing
time Ex. 1: Replace "ABC" with "LON[CR]".
Script n = 1: Debugging on "ABC","LON\r","OK\r","ER\r"
SCPDBG,n OK,SCPDBG
debug setting*2 0: Debugging off
Obtaining the script OK,SCPERR,m Ex. 2: Assign "RESET[CR]" to the IN 2 terminal.
SCPERR -
error results m: Script error details
"**IN2**","RESET\r","",""
OK,SCPVER,m,n
Obtaining the script
SCPVER - m: Script library version
file version • Configuration File Example
n: Version written in FmtSet.Lua
*1 Returns the processing time of scripts that have been executed since the
power turned on
*2 If you turn debugging on, the "print(str)" commands within the script file will be
executed.
Point Save the character codes of command replacement files in ANSI format.
GB SR-2000 UM 70
Syntax
• Each command replacement is separated with one of the following line break
codes: [CR], [LF], or [CR][LF].
• The [Character strings to be replaced] can be up to a maximum of 128 bytes
in size.
• [STX], [ETX], and [CR] codes cannot be used in the [Character strings to be
replaced].
• The [Character strings to be replaced] has priority if it includes standard SR-
2000 series commands.
• If there two or more [Character strings to be replaced] statements, the top
statement is enabled.
• Use the syntax "**IN[?]**" to assign the [Character strings to be replaced] to
the IN terminal. Enclose the parameter in double asterisks.
• Up to 64 statements can be registered.
• The [Command after replacement] must include termination codes.
• The [Character strings to be replaced] must be defined for suffix matching.
Ex.: The text string "ABC" is the [Character strings to be replaced].
If the text string received is "123ABC", the matching text is "123ABC".
The "123" text is discarded.
• Comments are made by enclosing text between two hyphens and a line break
code.
• [Response OK] and [Response Error] can be disabled by enclosing them in
double quotation marks.
• Adding an asterisk to the end of a statement causes the command function
specified in the [Command after replacement] to operate only for the [Char-
acter strings to be replaced].
Escape Sequence
Pattern Meaning
\r [CR](0x0D)
\n [LF](0x0A)
\a [BEL](0x07)
\b [BS](0x08)
\f [CL](0x0C)
\t [HT](0x09)
\v [HM](0x0B)
\\ \
\" "
Specifies character codes in decimal
\000
numbers
Command Replacement Error Debugging

The "CMDCFG_ERR" message can be sent from the terminal for error confirmation
when command replacement files are not recognized correctly.
Response Meaning
No Error No error
error: file COMMAND.CFG line xxx Error in row xxx
error: file COMMAND.CFG not found File error or no file exists
Command not supported by IN terminal
error: Command not supported.
command replacement was specified.
Point • The changeover function is not supported.

• This function is applicable only to the master when using the master-
slave function.
• The single character recognition setting for the timing of the ON/OFF
command operates exclusively.
• This function is disabled when RS-232C communication is initialized
by pressing the corresponding button on the device.
• This function is disabled by the AutoID Network Navigator terminal.
71 GB SR-2000 UM
10-1 SR-2000 Series FTP
The SR-2000 Series can perform the following operations through the FTP
Communication Types interface.
• Transferring captured images
The SR-2000 Series is equipped with the following three communication paths. • Receiving configuration files and script files
(1) I/O communication • Appending read data to text files on the FTP server
(2) RS-232C Protocol FTP
(3) Ethernet
When using the SR-2000 Series as an FTP server, operate the FTP server in
anonymous mode.
(1) I/O Communication
SNTP
You can perform the operations listed below by assigning functions to the I/O
The SR-2000 Series can obtain time information from SNTP servers and can
terminals.
synchronize its time with that of these servers.
Start reading or tuning by applying signals from an external sensor
Input terminals Protocol SNTP
or switch.
Turn signals on to activate an external buzzer or LED when reading Reference • The following functions use the protocols shown here.
Output terminals
is successful or fails. File View: FTP
MultiMonitor: UDP
Wiring the I/O terminals Master/slave function: UDP
"2-1 Connection and Wiring" (page 5)
Important When you use EtherNet/IP or PROFINET, you cannot use the "master/
slave function's" multi drop link.
Assigning functions to the I/O terminals
"6-23 Control the I/O Terminals" (page 29)
Ethernet Communication Port Numbers

(2) RS-232C
With the RS-232C interface of the SR-2000 Series, you can use the following types Communication
Listen/remote port Protocol Port number
of communication. name
Command
23, 1024 to 65535*1
Serial communication communication
Listen port TCP, UDP
Ethernet data
You can communicate with devices that have RS-232C interfaces. You can Listen port TCP 23, 1024 to 65535*1
(server)
transfer the read data of the SR-2000 Series in a procedureless manner and use
Ethernet data
commands to start reading. Remote port TCP, UDP 1024 to 65535
(client)
"11-1 Serial Communication" (page 75)
PLC link Remote port UDP 1024 to 65535
"12-1 Command Communication" (page 76)
20: FTP data port (ACTIVE
Protocol None, PASS/RTRY, or ACK/NAK FTP communication - FTP mode)
21: FTP service port
PLC link *1 9013, 9014, 9015, 9016, 5900, 5920, and 44818 cannot be set as they are
You can communicate with PLCs that support the "PLC link function." Because the reserved for the reader system.
SR-2000 Series directly controls the memory in the PLC, communication programs
are not necessary. This leads to a reduction in man-hours spent creating
programs.
Protocol KV Studio, MC protocol, or SYSWAY
(3) Ethernet
With the Ethernet interface of the SR-2000 Series, you can use the following types
of communication.
Socket communication (TCP/UDP)

You can use socket communication to transfer the read data of the SR-2000
Series.
You can use commands to control the operations and change the settings of the
SR-2000 Series.
"11-2 Socket Communication (TCP, UDP)" (page 75)
Protocol TCP, UDP
PLC link
You can communicate with PLCs that support the "PLC link function." Because the
SR-2000 Series directly controls the memory in the PLC, communication programs
are not necessary. This leads to a reduction in man-hours spent creating
programs.
Protocol KV Studio, MC protocol, or OMRON PLC Link
EtherNet/IP
"14-1 EtherNet/IP Overview" (page 96)
Protocol EtherNet/IP
PROFINET
"15-1 PROFINET Overview" (page 109)
Protocol PROFINET
GB SR-2000 UM 72
10-2 Data Communication Time
Appends the time the data was output.
Format Appended data range: YYYYMMDDhhmmss
• Data format
The SR-2000 data communication format is common for both RS-232C and YYYYMMDDhhmms : Read data
Ethernet.
Code type
Communication Format for Read Data
You can append the read code type number to the read data.
Read data is sent using the ASCII code with the header and terminator added, as
Number Code type
shown below.
1 QR
Header Read Data Terminator 2 DataMatrix
3 PDF417
Various types of data can be appended to read data. 5 GS1 DataBar(RSS)
Header and terminator can be selected from the following options using AutoID 6 CODE39
Network Navigator. They also can be set to any string up to 5 characters. 7 ITF
8 2of5
z Header
9 NW-7(Codabar)
None/ STX (0x02) / ESC (0x1B)
10 JAN/EAN/UPC
z Terminator 11 CODE128
CR (0x0D) / CR LF (0x0D) (0x0A) / ETX (0x03) 12 COOP 2 of 5
13 CODE93
14 CC-A/B(GS1 DataBar)
Read Error Codes
15 CC-A/B(EAN/UPC)
If the code cannot be read, the SR-2000 Series will send a read error code to the 16 CC-A/B/C(GS1-128)
host device. 17 Postal
Read error code default setting: ERROR 18 Pharmacode
20 DotCode
Header ERROR Terminator
Read error codes can be set to any string of text, up to 8 characters, using AutoID Symbol ID
Network Navigator. Appends the symbology identifier, specified by AIM, before the read data.
Additionally, the device can be set to not send error codes. It is not appended when a reading has failed.
• Data format
Appending Data Symbol ID Read data
Various types of data can be appended to read data.

Code type Detail Symbol ID
Read data format : Model 1 ]Q0

: Model 2, ECI not applied ]Q1
The data format for appending various types of data to read data is shown below: : Model 2, ECI applied ]Q2
Parameter QR : Model 2, ECI not applied, FNC1 (1st) ]Q3
Data Code Symbol Read Scan Region Positioning Code vertex Code center
Time : : : bank : : : : : : : Model 2, ECI applied, FNC1 (1st) ]Q4
size type ID data count number level coordinates coordinates
numbers
: Model 2, ECI not applied, FNC1 (2nd) ]Q5
Unused ISO/IEC 15415 ISO/IEC TR 29158 SAE AS9132 SEMI T10-0701 : Model 2, ECI applied, FNC1 (2nd) ]Q6
Matching
ECC : : verification : (AIM DPM-1-2006) : verification : verification : : ECC 200 ]d1
level
ratio result verification result result result
: ECC 200, FNC1 (1st) ]d2
: ECC 200, FNC1 (2nd) ]d3
ISO/IEC 15416 DataMatrix
(Japanese : ECC 200, ECI applied ]d4
ISO/IEC 16022
pharmaceutical : Image Group Master/ Read Check- : ECC 200, ECI applied, FNC1 (1st) ]d5
: verification : : :
code quality) file name name*1 Slave ID*1 time sum
result : ECC 200, ECI applied, FNC1 (2nd) ]d6
verification
result No check digit validation ]A0
CODE39 Check digit is validated and transmitted. ]A1
*1 When the advanced Multi-head is valid, the order is "Master Slave ID":"Group
name". Check digit is validated but not transmitted. ]A3
No check digit validation ]I0
Delimiter characters ITF Check digit is validated and transmitted. ]I1
• The colon (:) as a delimiting character can be changed via AutoID Network Check digit is validated but not transmitted. ]I3
Navigator (one character). NW-7(Codabar) ]F0
• No delimiter character is inserted after "Data size" and "Symbol ID", and before UPC-A, UPC-E, JAN/EAN13 ]E0
"Checksum".
JAN/EAN8 ]E4
Precautions when appending data JAN/EAN/UPC
UPC-A, UPC-E, JAN/EAN13
• Appended data can be set via a command or from AutoID Network Navigator. ]E3
Addon 2, addon 5
• Only the selected data will be appended to the read data. The data size changes
FNC1 not included. ]C0
because of this.
• Checksum defers by the contents of the appended data. CODE128 FNC1 on the first digit (GS1-128). ]C1
FNC1 on the second digit. ]C2
GS1 Databar ]e0
Details of Appended Data Standard ]L0
PDF417,
Data size MicroPDF417
Extended channel interpretation ]L1
Basic channel interpretation ]L2
The data size is the total size of parts (1), (2), and (3), plus 4 bytes. CODE93 ]G0
(1) (2) (3) 2of5 ]S0
Termi- COOP2of5 ]X0
Header Data size Read data + appended data Checksum
nator
Trioptic CODE39 ]A8
Postal ]X0
73 GB SR-2000 UM
Code type Detail Symbol ID Read data 1 corner Read data 1 center
DotCode Generic Data ]J0 coordinates: coordinates:
Read data 1,
Read data 2 corner Read data 2 center
GS1 format (GS1 DotCode) ]J1 Read data 2,
: coordinates: : coordinates:
…,
Application Specific ]J2 …: …:
Read data n
Generic Data + ECI ]J3 Read data n corner Read data n center
coordinates coordinates
GS1 format (GS1 DotCode) + ECI ]J4
Application Specific + ECI ]J5 Point If the vertex coordinate is out of the capture range, the coordinate
value is minus displayed.
z Data format for composite codes (Even though all vertexes are not in the capture range, reading is
• Composite code (GS1/CODE128 + PDF) possible.)
]e0 Barcode data a 2D code data
• Composite code (JAN/EAN/UPC + PDF)

Unused ECC ratio
Appends the unused error correction ratio.
]Em Barcode data a 2D code data
The average value will be appended when several codes are read for 1 scan
(multi read).
* m= Numeric value It is not appended when a reading fails.
* a= Composite delimiter: Can be changed by way of the settings. • Data format
(Default: Not set. You can use up to 5 characters to set the value.)
Read data : nnn %
Parameter bank number nnn = unused ECC ratio (0 - 100)
Appends the parameter bank number that was read. Matching level
It is not appended when a reading fails.
• Data format Appends the matching level value of the read code.
• Matching levels of each code will be appended for the multi read.
Read data : nn
• Value is not appended when a reading fails.
nn = parameter bank number (01 - 16) • Data format
Scan count Read data : nnn

nnn = matching level value (0 - 100)
Appends the number of reading attempts of the SR-2000 Series while the timing
input is turned ON. Code quality verification results
Failed reading operations are also counted.
• Data format For details on the code quality verification results, refer to "9-7 Code Quality
Verification" (page 58)
Read data : nnnnn
nnnnn = scan count (1 - 65535)
Region number
The region number used for the read can be added.
This information cannot be added if the read fails.
• Data format
Read data : nnn
nnn = 000 - 128

*000: No region specification
Code vertex coordinates/Code center coordinates

Appends the coordinates of the vertexes and center position of the read code.
• Data format
Code vertex coordinates: Read data : X1/Y1 : X2/Y2 : X3/Y3 : X4/Y4
Code center coordinates: Read data : X5/Y5

X1/Y1 to X4/Y4 : Code vertex coordinates (Xn = 0 - 2047, Yn = 0 - 1535)
X5/Y5 : Code center coordinates (X5 = 0 - 2047, Y5 = 0 - 1535)
Coordinates are specified for code positions in an image as below:
(0, 0) (2047/0)
X
X1, Y1 X2, Y2
X5, Y5
Code
X4, Y4 X3, Y3
(Field of view)
(2047/1535)
(0/1535)
Y
Reference Output of the code vertex coordinate when executing multiple

readings of the same code.
When multiple readings are executed for 1 scan, the coordinates are
output in the following order:
• Coordinates with code center coordinates higher in the field of view
(smaller in Y) are prioritized.
• If 2 coordinates have the same Y coordinates, the center
coordinates of the code further to the left in the field of view (smaller
in X) are prioritized.
Output format for multi read is as follows:
GB SR-2000 UM 74
11-1 Serial Communication 11-2 Socket Communication
You can communicate with devices that have RS-232C interfaces. You can transfer (TCP, UDP)
the read data of the SR-2000 Series in a procedureless manner and use commands
to start reading. The SR-2000 Series supports the following types of Ethernet socket
communication.
RS-232C Communication Settings Defaults • TCP
Baud Rate : 115200 bps • UDP
Data Bits : 8 bit
Parity : Even
Stop Bit : 1 bit Ethernet Communication Settings Defaults
Serial Communication (RS-232C) Settings BOOTP state
The following are the default settings when BOOTP is disabled.
1 Open the [RS-232C] tab. IP address : 192.168.100.100
Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.0 (24 bits)
2 Set the following items to match the device that you will connect to.
Default Gateway : 0.0.0.0
• Baud Rate
• Data Bits
• Parity TCP Settings
• Stop Bit
3 Select the communication protocol.
z Communication protocols
2 Enter the [IP address] and [Subnet Mask] settings to assign to the
SR-2000 Series.
Protocol Operation
The read data will be output as-is. 3 Start the [Setup Wizard].

Read data
None 5 STEP 2 Select the device to connect to.
6 STEP 3 Select [TCP].
1. The read data is transferred to the host device.

7 STEP 4 Configure connection destination settings such as the [IP
2. The SR-2000 Series waits for a response from the host device. Address] and the [Port].
(PASS: Normal completion. RTRY: Resend request.)
3. PASS or RTRY is sent from the host.
•PASS: Transmission complete.
8 Exit the [Setup Wizard].
•RTRY: Resend the same read data to the host device and wait for
a PASS response.
PASS/RTRY
Read data UDP Settings
2 Enter the [IP address] and [Subnet Mask] settings to assign to the
*1 SR-2000 Series.
Read data 3 Start the [Setup Wizard].

ACK/NAK
(0x06/0x15) 4 STEP 1 Select the trigger input method.
Response
5 STEP 2 Select the device to connect to.
*1 This protocol uses ACK (0x06) instead of "PASS" and NAK (0x15) instead of 6 STEP 3 Select [UDP].
"RTRY" in the PASS/RTRY protocol. Other than the differences in the character
strings to send, this protocol is identical to the PASS/RTRY protocol. 7 STEP 4 Configure connection destination settings such as the [IP
• PASS/RTRY communication format Address] and the [Port].
PASS[CR] RTRY[CR] 8 Exit the [Setup Wizard].
[STX]PASS[ETX] [STX]RTRY[ETX]
* You can also add [ESC] at the front and [LF] at the end. 9 Click [Send Configuration].
• ACK/NAK communication format
[ACK] [NAK] Settings During Socket Communication
* Do not add headers or terminators.
Continually Send Connection Requests
Point • When you are using PASS/RTRY or ACK/NAK, the SR-2000 Series can
read codes while it is waiting for a response. Data read in this When a connection is not established, the timing with which requests are made to
situation is stored in the send buffer. establish a connection is determined by the "Continually Send Connection
• When you are using PASS/RTRY or ACK/NAK, the SR-2000 Series can
receive commands while it is waiting for a response. Requests" setting.
• When you are using PASS/RTRY or ACK/NAK, a send buffer overflow • Disable: When read data is determined and data output is ready.
will occur if the SR-2000 Series attempts to store more data than its • Enable: When the power is turned on. Also, continuously when a connection is
send buffer can hold.
• Send buffer capacity: 10 KB not established.
Operation when a send buffer overflow occurs
•"E4 BUFFER OVER" is shown on the SR-2000 Series display. Keep Alive
•ERR BUSY is output.
•All data stored in the buffer is discarded. This function checks whether the connection established with a remote device is
Recovering from a send buffer overflow still alive.
•Restart the SR-2000 Series.
•Send the buffer clear command "BCLR" to the SR-2000 Series. z Operating condition
•Send the reset command "RESET" to the SR-2000 Series. This function activates when no communication is made for 60 seconds.
•Send PASS (ACK) to the SR-2000 Series. When PASS (ACK) is sent to
the SR-2000 Series, it outputs the character string "OVER" and
recovers to normal operation.
z Operation details
* If you restart the SR-2000 Series or send the buffer clear or reset
command to it when a buffer overflow has not occurred, all the data in A Keep packet is sent to the remote device and the response is checked.
the send buffer will be cleared. • Response: Keep the connection established.
• No response: Disconnect the connection.
75 GB SR-2000 UM
12-1 Command Communication Error Responses
After receiving a command, if the corresponding processing fails, the SR-2000
Series returns an error in response.
What Is Command Communication? Response format
By sending commands from a PLC or PC, you can start reading and change the
settings of the SR-2000 Series. Header ER, Command name , Error code Terminator
Example) When an undefined command is received.

Command communication interfaces
Command ABCD[CR]
The following two command communication paths are available.
Response ER,ABCD,00[CR]
• RS-232C (serial communication)
• Ethernet (TCP socket communication) Error codes
Types of commands Error Code Explanation
The following two types of commands are available. 00 Undefined command received
• Operation commands : Commands used to control operations such as 01 Mismatched command format (Invalid number of parameters)
reading and tuning. 02 The parameter 1 value exceeds the set value
• Configuration commands: Commands used to change or check the settings. 03 The parameter 2 value exceeds the set value
04 Parameter 2 is not set in HEX (hexadecimal) code
Command Communication Format 05 Parameter 2 set in HEX (hexadecimal) code but exceeds the set value
There are 2 or more ! marks in the preset data
10
Format Preset data is incorrect
11 Area specification data is incorrect
Header Command Terminator 12 Specified file does not exist
13 "mm" for the %Tmm-LON,bb command exceeds the setting range.
14 Communication cannot be checked with the %Tmm-KEYENCE command.
When formatting commands, the following three combinations of headers and
terminators are available. 20 This command is not executable in the current status (execution error)
21 The buffer has overflowed, so commands cannot be executed
Command format Response format
An error occurred while loading or saving parameters, so commands cannot be
22
executed
Commands sent from RS-232C cannot be received because AutoID Network
23
Navigator is being connected.
99 SR-2000 Series may be faulty. Please contact your nearest KEYENCE sales office.
Point • For the following commands, no response is returned when the

Header Terminator Header Terminator
command is received or if an error occurs. Only the reading results
(1) None [CR] None [CR] are output.
(2) None [CR] + [LF] None [CR] "LON," "LOFF," "PRON," and "PROFF"
• If you want to receive responses to the above commands, configure
(3) [STX] [ETX] [STX] [ETX]
the following setting.
Example) Sending the command to turn on the OUT1 terminal (OUTON,1) On the [Table] tab, click [Misc], and then set "Basic command
response string."
Command OUTON,1[CR] • For the following commands, the response is "OK" if the command is
Response OK,OUTON,1[CR] processed successfully and "ERR**" if an error occurs.
"TUNE," "QUIT," "RESET," and "BCLR"
Point • Commands are sent and received in ASCII code.

• If E S C is appended at the beginning of the command, the E S C will
clear the receive buffer of the SR-2000 Series. If communication
cannot be completed correctly due to the presence of unnecessary
characters in the receive buffer of the SR-2000 Series, append E S C to
the command and send it.
12-2 Reading and Tuning
Example) [ESC]LON[CR] Commands
• Set the character interval to less than 10 seconds when sending
commands to the SR-2000 Series. If 10 seconds elapse, the SR-2000
Series will delete all received characters from the buffer.
Operation Commands
Starting/finishing reading
Command Communication Process Function Command name Parameter Response
Start reading LON - -
1 The host (PC or PLC) sends a command to the SR-2000 Series. Start reading (bank specification) LON,b(LONb) b = 01 to 16 -
2 The SR-2000 Series sends a response and operates according to the Finish reading LOFF - -
command. When reading is successful, the read data is output.

When reading fails, "ERROR" is output.
Example 1) Operation command "LON"
(1) Command transmission
Tuning
LON[CR] Function Command name Parameter Response
Focus adjustment FTUNE - OK,FTUNE*1
(2) Response
b = 01 to 16
Start tuning TUNE,b(TUNEb) OK*2
No response Bank number
(3) Read operation Finish tuning TQUIT - OK
(4) Result output *1 When the focus adjustment is complete, the result is output in the following
Read data[CR] formats. The result is saved in the ROM.
Success: Focus Tuning SUCCEEDED
Failure: Focus Tuning FAILED
Example 2) Operation command "RESET"
*2 When the tuning operation is complete, the result is output in the following
formats.
(1) Command transmission When tuning is successful: Tuning SUCCEEDED,tms,00000x00
RESET[CR]
When tuning fails: Tuning FAILED,tms,00000x0y
t: Tuning time
(2) Response x: Advice
OK[CR] 0: None
1: Use an image filter. 2: Consider the installation, lighting, and printing
(3) Reset operations conditions.
4: The brightness is insufficient.
y: Failure factor
1: Code detection impossible. 2:Unstable reading.
GB SR-2000 UM 76
Preset data registration Pointer control
Function Command name Parameter Response Function Command name Parameter Response
Turn the pointer on AMON - OK,AMON
Start reading for preset data
PRON - * Turn the pointer off AMOFF - OK,AMOFF
registration
Finish reading for preset data
PROFF - * Time settings
registration
* For details on responses during preset registration, refer to "9-9 Preset Function Command name Parameter Response
Set the time TMSET,t t* OK,TMSET
Data Comparison" (page 68)
Check the time TMGET - OK,TMGET,t *
Reading quick setup codes * t: YYYY = Year (4 bytes) MM = Month (2 bytes) DD = Day (2 bytes)
hh = Hour (2 bytes) mm = Minute (2 bytes) ss = Second (2 bytes)
Function Command name Parameter Response
Start quick setup code reading RCON - OK,RCON Confirmation during script file execution
Finish quick setup code reading RCOFF - OK,RCOFF Function Command name Parameter Response
Quick setup code reading status OK,SCPTIME,
RCCHK - (Obtained value) now=Aus,
check
max=Bus,
Test mode min=Cus
A: The execution time of
Script processing time SCPTIME - the immediately
Function Command name Parameter Response previous script
Reading rate test TEST1 - OK,TEST1 B: The maximum
processing time
Reading rate test (bank specification) TEST1,b b=01 to 16 OK,TEST1 C: The minimum
Read time test TEST2 - OK,TEST2 processing time
n = 0:
Read time test (bank specification) TEST2,b b=01 to 16 OK,TEST2 Debugging
Quit test mode QUIT - OK,QUIT off
Script debugging SCPDBG,n OK,SCPDBG
1:
Debugging
I/O terminal control on
OK,SCPERR,m
Function Command name Parameter Response Obtain the script error SCPERR -
m: Error character string
OK,INCHK,m OK,SCPVER,m,n
n=1 :IN1
Input terminal status check INCHK,n m = OFF: The terminal is off. m: Script library version
2 :IN2 Obtain the script version SCPVER -
ON: The terminal is on. n: Version written in
n=1 :OUT1 FmtSet.Lua
Turn on an output terminal OUTON,n 2 :OUT2 OK,OUTON
3 :OUT3 Saving/loading settings
n=1 :OUT1 Function Command name Parameter Response
Turn off an output terminal OUTOFF,n 2 :OUT2 OK,OUTOFF Save settings* SAVE - OK,SAVE
3 :OUT3 Load saved settings LOAD - OK,LOAD
Turn on OUT1 to OUT3 ALLON - OK,ALLON Initialize settings DFLT - OK,DFLT
Turn off OUT1 to OUT3 ALLOFF - OK,ALLOFF * If you turn the power off before executing the SAVE command, the settings
that you have configured will be discarded.
Reset
Other commands
Function Command name Parameter Response
Reset RESET - OK Function Command name Parameter Response
Version confirmation KEYENCE - OK,KEYENCE,SR-2000,v
The SR-2000 Series is reset after it outputs a response. v: Version
OK,CMDSTAT,m
Send buffer clear Obtain the command status CMDSTAT -
m = none: No processing
wait: Wait for setting
application
Function Command name Parameter Response update: Updating
Send buffer clear BCLR - OK OK,EMAC,n
Obtain the MAC address EMAC - n = MAC address (12
Clear the send buffer of the SR-2000 Series. bytes)
OK,ERRSTAT,m
Checking the reading history m = none: No error
system: System error
update: Update error
Function Command name Parameter Response cfg: Set value error
ip: IP address
OK,NUM,a,b,c,d,e duplication
a: OK count Obtain the error status ERRSTAT - over: Buffer overflow
b: NG count plc: PLC link error
Check the reading history NUM - c: ERROR count profinet: PROFINET
d: STABLE count error
e: Trigger input count lua: Script error
(0 to 65535) hostconnect:Host
connection error
OK,NUMB,b1,b2,…, OK,BUSYSTAT,m
b16,n m = none: No processing
b1 to b16: Reading count trg: TRG BUSY
Bank usage count history NUMB -
of bank 1 to bank 16 update: Update
Obtain the BUSY status BUSYSTAT -
n: Trigger input count processing
(0 to 4294967295) file: Saving the file
af: Moving the
Acquire the counts corresponding to the time from when the reader turned on to autofocus lens
the present point in time. Clear the PLC link error PCLR - OK,PCLR
Turning the power off or sending a RESET command resets the counts to 0. Clear the FTP communication
HCLR - OK,HCLR
If the trigger input count reaches its upper limit, all values will be reset to 0. error
n:1-8
Image scanning control Save backup settings BSAVE,n (config1.ptc -
config8.ptc)
OK,BSAVE
n:1-8
Function Command name Parameter Response Load backup settings BLOAD,n (config1.ptc - OK,BLOAD
SHOT,b config8.ptc)
b: 01 to 16
Capture execution OK m: Copy
(SHOTb) Bank number
Copy bank configuration BCOPY,m,n source
OK,BCOPY
Capture an image (only one time) for the specified bank. n: Copy
destination
m=1: Polarizing
Forced control of reading and scanning filter
enabled
Function Command name Parameter Response 2: Polarizing
Obtain the calibration brightness VCALIB,m filter OK,VCALIB*1
Cancel operation*1 CANCEL - OK,CANCEL value disabled
Trigger lock*2 LOCK - OK,LOCK 3: All
Lock release*2 UNLOCK - OK,UNLOCK lighting
enabled
OK,RLOCK,m
Obtain the trigger lock status*2 RLOCK - m:LOCK *1 Executing this command will output the result in the following formats.
UNLOCK Success: VCALIB SUCCEEDED,m,n
*1 You will not receive reading error codes when you execute a CANCEL command. Failure: VCALIB FAILED,m,n
*2 If you send the LOCK command, reading operations will be locked until you n: Calibration brightness
send the UNLOCK command.
77 GB SR-2000 UM
12-3 SR-2000 Series Function
Command
Number
Setting
value
Explanation Default
Configuration Commands 1st

filter type
200 0
1
:
:
Disable
Equalize
2nd 2 : Expand
201
filter type 3 : Shrink
0 to 7 0
3rd 4 : Open
Configuration Commands filter type
202 5 : Close
6 : Median
4th 7 : Unsharp Mask
The following six types of configuration commands are available. filter type
203
Filter
• Parameter bank configuration commands (WB/RB)
setting 1st
• Code configuration commands for tuning (WC/RC) 210
filter count
• Region setting commands (WD/RD)
• Operation configuration commands (WP/RP) 2nd
211
• Communication configuration commands (WN/RN) filter count
1 to 7 Specify with count 1
• Batch transmission of setting/confirmation commands (WA/RA) 3rd
212
filter count
4th
Point 213
• Send the SAVE command to save the contents changed by filter count
configuration commands in the memory. If you do not send the SAVE 0 : Disable
command, when the power is turned off or the RESET command is Polarizing
Filter usage 010 0 to 2 1 : Enable 0
received, the settings will return to the state that they were in before filter
2 : Always on
they were changed.
• The setting contents sent during SR-2000 operations are applied
when the current operation finishes, not after the response to the Code settings
command is sent.
Command Setting
Function Explanation Default
Number value
Parameter bank configuration commands (WB/RB) Specify codes using bit
assignment and set as HEX values
1st bit : QR
Parameter bank configuration command is sent in the following format: 2nd bit : Data Matrix
3rd bit : PDF417 (microPDF 417)
z Configuration changes 5th bit : GS1 Data Bar(RSS)
6th bit : CODE 39
Send command WB,bm,n (Trioptic CODE 39)
Successful OK,WB 7th bit: : ITF
Response 8th bit : 2 of 5
Error ER,WB,ee 1 to
Code type 300 9th bit : NW-7 (Code bar) 1FFF7
80000 10th bit : JAN/EAN/UPC
z Settings confirmation 11th bit : CODE 128
12th bit : COOP 2 of 5
Send command RB,bm
13th bit : CODE 93
Successful OK,RB,n 14th bit : CC-A/B (GS1 DataBar)
Response 15th bit : CC-A/B (EAN/UPC)
Error ER,RB,ee
16th bit : CC-A/B/C (GS-128)
b : Parameter bank (01-16) 17th bit : Postal
m : Command number, n: Setting 18th bit : Pharmacode
20th bit : DotCode
ee : Error code
0 : Disable
Output length limitation 306 0, 1 0
1 : Enable
Example) Setting the Exposure of the parameter bank 1 to 300 μs.
0 : Forward
Configuration change Send command WB,011000300
Direction of output 307 0, 1
1 : Backward
0
Response (Normal process) OK,WB Length of output 308 1 to 7089 7089

1 to
Configuration confirmation Send command RB,01100 Starting index of output 309 1
7089
Response (Normal process) OK,RB,0300 0 : Disable
ECI output 310 0, 1 0
1 : Enable
Scan condition setting 321

1 to
Maximum number of read digits 7089
7089
QR code setting
Command Setting 1 to
Function Explanation Default 322 Minimum number of read digits 1
Number value 7089
Internal 0 : Do not use 0000 to Specifies version 1 to 14 with bit
000 0, 1 1 Model 1 400 3FFF
lighting use 1 : Use 3FFF assign and set with HEX.
Lighting
External 0 : Do not use Model 2
004 0, 1 0 00000 to Specifies version 1 to 20 with bit
lighting use 1 : Use (1 - 20) 401 FFFFF
QR code specification FFFFF assign and set with HEX.
Exposure 15 to
100 Exposure time (μs) 15 version
Scanning time 10000
settings Model 2 00000 to Specifies version 21 to 40 with bit
Gain 101 0 to 240 - 0 (21 - 40) 402 FFFFF
FFFFF assign and set with HEX.
0 : Standard specification
Contrast adjustment 1 : HDR Micro QR Specifies version M1 to M4 with bit
108 0 to 3 1 403 0 to F F
method 2 : HDR2 (M1 - M4) assign and set with HEX.
3 : Contrast zoom
1 to
Image reduction 0 : Disable 323 Maximum number of read digits 3116
110 0, 1 0 3116
processing 1 : Enable Data Matrix setting
1 to
0 : Disable 324 Minimum number of read digits 1
3116
Noise reduction 1 : Low
111 0 to 3 0
processing 2 : Medium
3 : High
Contrast threshold 0 : Disable
506 0, 1 0
correction 1 : Enable
GB SR-2000 UM 78
Command Setting Command Setting
Function Explanation Default Function Explanation Default
Number value Number value
Specifies the code size of 335 3 to 50 Maximum number of read digits 50
DataMatrix code with bit assign 336 3 to 50 Minimum number of read digits 4
and set with HEX.
663 2 to 8 Number of decode matches 2
Square
1st bit: 10x10 13th bit: 44x44 685 1 to 11 Quiet zone ratio 7
2nd bit: 12x12 14th bit: 48x48 Send start/stop characters
3rd bit: 14x14 15th bit: 52x52 380 0,1 0 : Disable 1
4th bit: 16x16 16th bit: 64x64 1 : Enable
5th bit: 18x18 17th bit: 72x72 Send start/stop characters letter
6th bit: 20x20 18th bit: 80x80 type
381 0,1 0
7th bit: 22x22 19th bit: 88x88 0 : as lowercase
Specify the reading 0000000
8th bit: 24x24 20th bit: 96x96 1 : as UPPERCASE
target size of 410 to 3FFFFFFF
9th bit: 26x26 21st bit: 104x104 NW-7 (Codabar)
DataMatrix code 3FFFFFFF Inspect check-digit
10th bit: 32x32 22nd bit: 120x120 settings 382 0,1 0 : Disable 0
11th bit: 36x36 23rd bit: 132x132 1 : Enable
12th bit: 40x40 24th bit: 144x144
Send check-digit
383 0,1 0 : Disable 1
Rectangle 1 : Enable
25th bit: 8x18
Check-digit type
26th bit: 8x32
0 : Modulus 16
27th bit: 12x26 1 : Modulus 11
28th bit: 12x36 2 : Modulus 10/Weight 2
384 0 to 6 0
29th bit: 16x36 3 : Modulus 10/Weight 3
30th bit: 16x48 4 : Check DR
327 1 to 77 Maximum number of read digits 77 5 : Modulus 11
6 : Luhn
328 1 to 77 Minimum number of read digits 1
686 1 to 11 Quiet zone ratio 7
681 0 to 11 Limited right space ratio 5
UPC-E reading
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional/ 350 0,1 0 : Disable 1
Truncated 1 : Enable
390 0,1 1
0 : Disable
EAN/JAN 8 digits reading
1 : Enable
351 0,1 0 : Disable 1
GS1 DataBar Stacked/ 1 : Enable
StackedOmnidirectional
391 0,1 1 EAN/JAN 13 digits reading
0 : Disable 352 0,1 1
0 : Disable
1 : Enable
1 : Enable
GS1 DataBar settings GS1 DataBar Limited
UPC-A Output
392 0,1 0 : Disable 1
353 0,1 0 : Output in 13 digits 0
1 : Enable
1 : Output in 12 digits
GS1 DataBar Expanded JAN/EAN/UPC settings Add "number system" to UPC-E
393 0,1 0 : Disable 1
354 0,1 0 : Disable 0
1 : Enable
1 : Enable
GS1 DataBar ExpandedStacked
2-digit supplemental
394 0,1 0 : Disable 1
355 0,1 0 : Disable 1
1 : Enable
1 : Enable
GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked
395 2 to 11 2 5-digit supplemental
(Number of rows) minimum 356 0,1 1
0 : Disable
GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked 1 : Enable
396 2 to 11 11
(Number of rows) maximum Ignore UPC without supplemental
329 3 to 50 Maximum number of read digits 50 357 0,1 0 : Disable 0
330 3 to 50 Minimum number of read digits 3 1 : Enable
660 2 to 8 Number of decode matches 2 GTIN compatible 14-digit output

358 0,1 0 : Disable 0
682 1 to 11 Quiet zone ratio 7 1 : Enable
Send start/stop characters 337 1 to 100 Maximum number of read digits 100
375 0,1 0 : Disable 0
1 : Enable 338 1 to 100 Minimum number of read digits 1
Inspect check-digit 665 2 to 8 Number of decode matches 2

376 0,1 0 CODE128 settings 687 1 to 11 Quiet zone ratio 7
0 : Disable
CODE39 settings 1 : Enable GS1-128
Send check-digit 366 0,1 0 : Disable 1
377 0,1 0 : Disable 1 1 : Enable
1 : Enable 339 1 to 50 Maximum number of read digits 50
Trioptic CODE39 reading 340 1 to 50 Minimum number of read digits 4
378 0,1 0 : Disable 1 COOP 2 of 5 settings
1 : Enable 666 2 to 8 Number of decode matches 3
Full ASCII conversion 688 1 to 11 Quiet zone ratio 7

379 0,1 0 : Disable 0 341 1 to 50 Maximum number of read digits 50
1 : Enable 342 1 to 50 Minimum number of read digits 1
331 2 to 50 Maximum number of read digits 50 CODE 93 settings
332 2 to 50 Minimum number of read digits 6 689 1 to 11 Quiet zone ratio 7
661 2 to 8 Number of decode matches 3 PDF417 read code type settings
683 1 to 11 Quiet zone ratio 7 1: PDF417 only
420 1 to 3 3
ITF settings Inspect check-digit 2: MicroPDF only
3: PDF417 and MicroPDF
385 0,1 0 : Disable 0
1 : Enable PDF417 settings 1 to
325 Maximum number of read digits 2710
Send check-digit 2710
386 0,1 0 : Disable 1 1 to
326 Minimum number of read digits 1
1 : Enable 2710
333 1 to 50 Maximum number of read digits 50 658 2 to 8 Number of decode matches 2
334 1 to 50 Minimum number of read digits 4 GS1 composite CC-A/B 343 1 to 338 Maximum number of read digits 338
2 of 5 settings
662 2 to 8 Number of decode matches 3 (GS1 Data Bar) settings 344 1 to 338 Minimum number of read digits 1
684 1 to 11 Quiet zone ratio 7 GS1 composite CCA/B 345 1 to 338 Maximum number of read digits 338
(EAN/UPC) settings 346 1 to 338 Minimum number of read digits 1
1 to
347 Maximum number of read digits 2361
GS1 composite CC-A/ 2361
B/C (GS1-128) settings 1 to
348 Minimum number of read digits 1
2361
79 GB SR-2000 UM
Function
Command Setting
Explanation Default
Tuning Code Setting Command Format (WC/RC)
Number value
CC-C code reading Send the code setting command for tuning in the following formats.
CC-A/B/C (GS1-128)
437 0,1 0 : Disable 1
reading
1 : Enable z Configuration changes
447 1 to 31 Maximum read length 31
Send command WC,m,n
448 1 to 31 Minimum read length 1
Successful OK,WC
Japan Postal code reading Response
Error ER,WC,ee
Postal settings 446 0,1 0 : Disable 1
1 : Enable z Settings confirmation
Intelligent Mail Barcode reading
443 0,1 0 : Disable 1 Send command RC,m
1 : Enable Successful OK,RC,n
Response
Maximum number of Error ER,RC,ee
440 2 to 16 Specified by the number of bars 16
pharmacode bars
m : Command number, n: Setting
Minimum number of
441 2 to 16 Specified by the number of bars 9 ee : Error code
pharmacode bars
Example) Setting the maximum read length to 1000 digits
690 1 to 11 Quiet zone ratio 9 Configuration change Send command WC,0100,1000
Read direction
0 : Left to right Response (Normal process) OK, WC
Pharmacode settings 530 0 to 3 1 : Right to left 0
2 : Downward Configuration confirmation Send command RC,0100
3 : Upward
Response (Normal process) OK,RC,1000
Output in binary format
442 0,1 0 : Disable 0
1 : Enable Tuning target code settings
Command Setting
461 1 to 1124 Minimum read length 1 Function Explanation Default
Number value
462 5 to 124 Number of rows (maximum) 124 0001 to
DotCode 0100 Maximum read length 7089
463 5 to 124 Number of rows (minimum) 6 7089
QR code settings
464 5 to 124 Number of columns (maximum) 124 0001 to
0101 Minimum read length 1
7089
465 5 to 124 Number of columns (minimum) 6
0001 to
0200 Maximum read length 3116
DataMatrix code 3116
Reading operation settings settings
0201
0001 to
Minimum read length 1
3116
Command Setting 1 to
Function Explanation Default 0300 Maximum read length 2710
Number value 2710
1 to
0 : Disable 0301 Minimum read length 1
Alternate 600 0, 1 0 2710
1 : Enable PDF417 settings
Target code
Internal bank retry 1 : PDF417
601 00 to 32 00 0303 1 to 3 3
count 2 : MicroPDF417
Decode timeout 0001 to 3 : PDF417, MicroPDF417
602 Specify in units of 10 ms 0010
duration 1000 0500 01 to 77 Maximum read length 77
Specifies the region number for 0501 01 to 77 Minimum read length 1
Region number decoding GS1 Data Bar Limited right quiet
604 0 to 128 0 0502 0 to 11 5
specification 0 : Entire region zone scale factor setting
1 - 128: Region number GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional/
0 : Disable Truncated
0503 0,1 1
Inverse 605 0 to 2 1 : Enable 0 0 : Disable
2 : Automatic 1 : Enable
0 : Disable GS1 DataBar Stacked/

Reverse 606 0 to 2 1 : Enable 0 StackedOmnidirectional
0504 0,1 1
2 : Automatic 0 : Disable
1 : Enable
Base tilt angle 607 0 to 359 Unit: 1 degree 0 GS1 DataBar settings GS1 DataBar Limited
Unit: 1 degree 0505 0,1 0 : Disable 1
Tilt angle range 608 0 to 180 * Base tilt angle ± Tilt angle range 180 1 : Enable
will be enabled. GS1 DataBar Expanded
0 : Disable 0506 0,1 0 : Disable 1
Grid correction 500 0 to 2 1 : Enable 2 1 : Enable
2 : Automatic GS1 DataBar ExpandedStacked
0507 0,1 0 : Disable 1
Allows reads in the following
1 : Enable
orientations.
0508 2 to 11 2
(Number of rows) minimum
First bit:
0509 2 to 11 11
(Number of rows) maximum
Second bit:
0602 1 to 11 Quiet zone scale factor 7
Code orientation (1D) 613 0 to F Third bit: F Send start/stop characters
0603 0,1 0 : Disable 0
1 : Enable
Inspect check-digit*
0604 0,1 0 : Disable 0
CODE39 settings 1 : Enable
Fourth bit: Send check-digit*
0605 0,1 0 : Disable 1
1 : Enable
Trioptic CODE39 reading
0606 0,1 0 : Disable 1
1 : Enable
Full ASCII conversion*
0607 0,1 0 : Disable 0
1 : Enable
GB SR-2000 UM 80
0700 02 to 50 Maximum read length 50 1800 2 to 16 Maximum number of bars 16
0701 02 to 50 Minimum read length 6 1801 2 to 16 Minimum number of bars 9
0702 1 to 11 Quiet zone scale factor 7 1802 1 to 11 Quiet zone scale factor 9
Inspect check-digit Code direction
ITF settings 0703 0,1 0 : Disable 0 0 : Left → Right
1 : Enable Pharmacode settings 1803 0 to 3 1 : Right → Left 0
Send check-digit 2 : Top → Bottom
0704 0,1 0 : Disable 1 3 : Bottom → Top
1 : Enable Binary output
0900 03 to 50 Maximum read length 50 1805 0,1 0 : Disable 0
1 : Enable
0902 1 to 11 Quiet zone scale factor 7 * With the settings for reading Trioptic CODE39, this setting does not function.
Send start/stop characters
0903 0,1 0 : Disable 1
Important If you set the "Quiet zone scale factor" setting to a value that is smaller
1 : Enable
than the default value, erroneous or poor quality reading may occur.
Send start/stop characters letter Normally use this setting with its default value.
type
0904 0,1 0
0 : as lowercase
1 : as UPPERCASE
NW-7 (Codabar)
0905 0,1
Inspect check-digit
0 : Disable 0
Operation configuration commands (WP/RP)
settings
1 : Enable
Send check-digit Operation configuration command is sent in the following format:
0906 0,1 0 : Disable 1
1 : Enable z Configuration changes
Check-digit type Send command WP,m,n
0 : Modulus 16
1 : Modulus 11 Successful OK,WP
Response
2 : Modulus 10/Weight 2 Error ER,WP,ee
0907 0 to 6 0
3 : Modulus 10/Weight 3
4 : Check DR z Settings confirmation
5 : Modulus 11-A
6 : Luhn Send command RP,m
1002 1 to 11 Quiet zone scale factor 7 Successful OK,RP,n
UPC-E reading Response
Error ER,RP,ee
1003 0,1 0 : Disable 1
1 : Enable m : Command number, n: Setting
EAN/JAN 8 digits reading ee : Error code
1004 0,1 0 : Disable 1
1 : Enable
Example) When setting the timing mode to "One-shot trigger" (one-shot signal
EAN/JAN 13 digits reading
trigger)
1005 0,1 0 : Disable 1
1 : Enable Configuration change Send command WP,101,1
UPC-A Output Response (Normal process) OK,WP
1006 0,1 0 : Output in 13 digits 0
1 : Output in 12 digits Configuration confirmation Send command RP,101
JAN/EAN/UPC settings Add "number system" to UPC-E
1007 0,1 0 : Disable 0 Response (Normal process) OK,RP,1
1 : Enable
2-digit supplemental
1008 0,1 0 : Disable 1 IN terminal settings
1 : Enable
5-digit supplemental Command Setting
1009 0,1 0 : Disable 1 Number value
1 : Enable 0 : Not use
Ignore UPC without supplemental 1 : Trigger input
1010 0,1 0 : Disable 0 2 : Preset Input
1 : Enable IN1 terminal function 000 3 : Start test mode. 1
4 : Capture
GTIN compatible 14-digit output
5 : Clear PLC link error
1011 0,1 0 : Disable 0
6 : Trigger lock
1 : Enable
7 : Read the quick setup code
001 to 8 : Tuning operation
1100 Maximum read length 100
100 9 : Timing input start
001 to 0 to 14 10 : Timing input stop
1101 Minimum read length 1 11 : Encoder input start
100
CODE128 settings 12 : Encoder input stop
13 : Encoder input start and stop
GS1-128 IN2 terminal function 001 14 : Command replacement 0
1103 0,1 0 : Disable 1 15 : Data output
1 : Enable 16 : Encoder (output)
0800 01 to 50 Maximum read length 50 17 : Encoder (start and output)
2 of 5 (Industrial 2of5) 18 : Encoder (stop and output)
settings 19 : Encoder (start and stop and
0802 1 to 11 Quiet zone scale factor 7 output)
1200 01 to 50 Maximum read length 50 IN1 terminal test mode
COOP 2of5 settings 1201 01 to 50 Minimum read length 4 002 1
assignment 1 : Reading rate test
1 to 2
1202 1 to 11 Quiet zone scale factor 7 IN2 terminal test mode 2 : Processing time test
003 1
1300 01 to 50 Maximum read length 50 assignment
CODE93 settings 1301 01 to 50 Minimum read length 1 Bank to assign to the
IN1 terminal captured 004 1
image
1909 1 to 31 Maximum read length 31 1 to 16 Bank number
Bank to assign to the
1910 1 to 31 Minimum read length 1 IN2 terminal captured 005 1
Japan Postal code reading image
Postal settings 1908 0,1 0 : Disable 1 IN1 terminal input at 0 : Not use
1 : Enable 006 0, 1 0
power-on 1 : Enable
Intelligent Mail Barcode reading IN2 terminal input at 0 : Not use
1905 0,1 0 : Disable 1 007 0, 1 0
power-on 1 : Enable
1 : Enable
0 : Normal open point
1920 1 to 1124 Maximum read length 1124 Input polarity 010 0, 1 0
1 : Normal close point
DotCode
1921 1 to 1124 Minimum read length 1 0 : 1 ms
Input pulse width 011 0 to 2 1 : 2 ms 0
2 : 10 ms
1 to
Number of start pulses 012 Number of pulses 1
10000
1 to
Number of stop pulses 013 Number of pulses 1
10000
81 GB SR-2000 UM
Function
Command Setting
Explanation Default
Reading behavior settings
Number value
Number of off state 0 to Command Setting
014 Number of pulses 0 Function Explanation Default
pulses 10000 Number value
0 : Single
OUT terminal settings 1 : Continuous
Reading mode setting 200 0 to 4 0
3 : Burst
Command Setting 4 : Script
Number value 0 : Send after read
Data transmission 201 0, 1 0
OUT1 terminal function 020 0 : Not set 1 1 : Send after timing off
OUT2 terminal function 021 1 : OK 4 Multi read duplicate
000 to
2 : Verification NG reading prevention 202 Specify by the 100 ms 10
255
4 : ERROR interval
8 : STABLE 0 : Order of parameter bank
16 : PRESET_OK Specifying alternate
204 0, 1 number 1
32 : TRG_BUSY order
1 : Begin with successful bank
0 to 64 : LOCK_BUSY
128 : MODE_BUSY Specify a maximum of 8
16384
OUT3 terminal function 022 256 : ERROR_BUSY 480 characters (HEX 16 bytes) with 4552524
Read error character hhhhhhh
512 : EXT.LIGHT *1 205 HEX (0x00 to 0x7F). F52
string h…
1024 : UNSTABLE Set FF if error codes are not (ERROR)
2048 : TUNING OK output.
4096 : SCRIPT CONTROL Matching level OK/NG 0 : Enable
206 0, 1 0
8192 : CONFIG BUSY judgment 1 : Disable
16384 : READY Matching level
207 00 to 99 70
0 : Not use threshold
BUSY output on startup 024 0, 1 1
1 : Enable 0 : Do not light automatically
Output duration 025 1 to 255 Specify in units of 10 ms 50 Automatic pointer 1 : Light automatically
209 0 to 2 1
lighting setting 2 : Only light when capturing
External light output 0 : Norm. open (normally open)
026 0, 1 0 images
polarity 1 : Norm. closed (normally closed)
000 to
Burst interval 208 Specify by the 1 ms 0
255
Timing mode settings 0 : Disable
1 : Enable
Set whether to execute the next
Command Setting Shorten bank transition 214 0, 1 scan without waiting for the 1
Number value decode timeout to elapse
0 : None if it is judged that no code is
Trioptic CODE39
100 0 to 2 1 : Reading rate test 0 present in the scanned image.
reading
2 : Read time test a : 0000-1727
0 : Level trigger b : 0000-1439
Timing mode 101 0, 1 0
1 : One-shot trigger c : 0319-2047
One-shot trigger 0003 to d : 0095-1535
102 Specify in units of 10 ms 100 • Minimum size: 320 dots × 96 dots
duration 2550
• The number of dots in the x
Trigger input ON Specify up to 32 characters (16
hhhhhhh 4C4F4E direction must be a multiple of
command character 103 HEX bytes) from HEX (0x00 to
h··· (LON) 32. The number of dots in the y
string 0xFF). Image capture range
215 abcd direction must be a multiple of 4. 0384025616631279
Trigger input OFF Specify up to 32 characters (16 specification Example)
hhhhhhh 4C4F4646
command character 104 HEX bytes) from HEX (0x00 to If a = 0000 and c = 0319, the
h··· (LOFF)
string 0xFF). number of dots is 320, which is
Trigger input ON/OFF 0 : Not use a multiple of 32.
recognition with one 105 0, 1 1 : Enable 0 (a, b)
character *
Trigger on delay 0 to
106 Specified in increments of 1 ms 0
(x 1 ms) 2550 (c, d)
Trigger off delay 0 to 0 : Disable
107 Specified in increments of 1 ms 0 Code reads per region 241 0, 1 1
(x 1 ms) 2550 1 : Enable
Read multiple of the
0 : Disable
same code/same type 243 0, 1 0
1 : Enable
of code
* When enabled, you can specify the following characters as the trigger on/off
commands.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 NUL DLE SP 0 @ ' ' p
1 SOH DC1 ! 1 a q
2 STX DC2 " 2 b r
3 ETX DC3 3 c s
4 EOT DC4 $ 4 d t
5 ENQ 5 e u
6 SYN & 6 f v
7 BEL ETB 7 g w
8 BS CAN ( 8 h x
9 HT EM ) 9 i y
A SUB * : j z
B VT + ; [ k {
C CL FS , < \ l |
D GS - = ] m }
E SO RS . > ^ n ~
F SI US / ? o del
If you specify STX or ETX, it will no longer be possible to recognize commands
in the <STX> command <ETX> format.
GB SR-2000 UM 82
Code quality verification function Settings for the number of read codes
0 : No selected Codes to read 250 1 to 128 - 1
1 : ISO/IEC 15415
Allow reduced 0: Do not allow
2 : ISO/IEC TR 29158 251 0,1 0
Code quality detection count 1: Allow
(AIM DPM-1-2006)
verification standard 230 0 to F 0
4 : SAE AS9132
selection
8 : SEMI T10-0701 Maximum number of read codes
Specify the setting with HEX using
sum of each item. Command Setting
0 : Disable Number value
1 : D QR 252 1 to 128 - 128
ISO/IEC 15415
231 0 to 4 2 : C 0
verification threshold DataMatrix 253 1 to 128 - 128
3 : B
4 : A PDF417
254 1 to 128 - 128
0 : Disable (micro PDF)
ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM 1 : D GS1 DataBar 255 1 to 128 - 128
DPM-1-2006) 232 0 to 4 2 : C 0
CODE39 256 1 to 128 - 128
verification threshold 3 : B
4 : A ITF 257 1 to 128 - 128
SAE AS9132 0 : Disable 2of5 258 1 to 128 - 128
233 0,1 0
verification threshold 1 : Enable NW-7 (Codabar) 259 1 to 128 - 128
0: Not set JAN/EAN/UPC 260 1 to 128 - 128
1: GS1-128
2: GS1 DataBar Limited CODE128 261 1 to 128 - 128
4: GS1 DataBar Stacked COOP2of5 262 1 to 128 128
Execution of ISO/IEC 8: CC-A(GS1-DataBar Limited)
234 0 to 3F 0 CODE93 263 1 to 128 - 128
15416 verification 16: CC-A(GS1-DataBar Stacked)
32: All code types CC-A/B
264 1 to 64 - 64
This setting is handled as a HEX value. (GS1 DataBar)
Use a HEX value that is the sum of the
CC-A/B
items in order to specify the setting. 265 1 to 64 - 64
(EAN/UPC)
0: Disable
CC-A/B
1: D 266 1 to 64 - 64
Threshold for ISO/IEC (GS1 128)
235 0 to 4 2: C 0
15416 verification result Postal 269 1 to 128 - 128
3: B
4: A Pharmacode 267 1 to 128 128
ISO/IEC 16022 code DotCode 278 1 to 10 - 1
0 : Disable
quality verification 236 0,1 0
1 : Enable
execution
0: Disable Output data order settings
ISO/IEC 16022 code 1: D
quality verification 237 0 to 4 2: C 0
execution 3: B Command Setting
4: A Number value
ISO/IEC 15415 code Code type number

270 1
quality verification 0: Do not append order priority
340 0, 1 0
result appending 1: Append Scanning order priority 271 2
setting
Code center
272 Priority = 1 (high), 3
ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM X coordinate priority 1 to 6
DPM-1-2006) code 0: Do not append priority = 6 (low)*1
341 0, 1 0 Code center
quality verification result 1: Append 273 4
Y coordinate priority
appending setting
Region priority 274 5
SAE AS9132 code
quality verification 0: Do not append Code digits priority 275 6
342 0, 1 0
result appending 1: Append Code type number
setting 280 0
order setting
SEMI T10-0701 code Scanning order setting 281 0
quality verification 0: Do not append
343 0, 1 0 Code center
result appending 1: Append
setting X coordinate order 282 0
setting
Japanese 0: Ascending
pharmaceutical code 0: Do not append Code center 1: Descending
344 0,1 0 Y coordinate order 283 0
quality verification result 1: Append
appending setting setting 0,1
ISO/IEC 16022 code Region sequence

284 0
quality verification 0 : Do not append setting
345 0,1 0
result appending 1 : Append Code digits sequence
setting 285 0
setting
Grade expression 0: Standard
setting when 0 : Alphabet Multiple-code output 1: Per bank
350 0,1 0 290 0
appending values to 1 : Numerical value format 2: Per area
verification result *2
Detailed item addition 01 : QR

setting when 0 : Do not append 02 : DM
351 0,1 0
appending values to 1 : Append 03 : PDF417 (Micro PDF)
verification result 04 : Reserved
Evaluation value 05 : GS1DataBar(RSS)
addition setting when 0 : Do not append 06 : CODE39(Trioptic CODE 39)
352 0,1 0 07 : ITF
appending values to 1 : Append
verification result 08 : 2of5
010203040
09 : NW7(Codebar)
506070809
Code type number 0A : JAN/EAN/UPC
286 - 0A0B0C0D
Code quality verification calibration sequence setting 0B : CODE128
0C : COOP2of5
0E0F1011
121314
0D : CODE93
Command Setting 0E : CC-A/B(GS1 DataBar)
Number value 0F : CC-A/B(EAN/UPC)
10 : CC-A/B/C(GS-128)
0 : Disable
Code quality 11 : Postal
1 : Polarizing filter enabled
verification calibration 890 0 to 3 0 12 : Pharmacode
2 : Polarizing filter disabled
settings 13 : Reserved
3 : Always on
14 : DotCode
Calibration brightness
891 0 to 184 - 80
(Polarizing filter enabled) *1 If priorities are the same, the order will be assigned as follows: code type number
Calibration brightness > scanning order > code center X coordinate > code center Y coordinate >
892 0 to 184 - 80
(Polarizing filter disabled) region > number of code digits.
Calibration brightness *2 Read data is output in ascending order of the bank number or the region
893 0 to 184 - 80
(Always on)
number. Error codes are output for banks that were not read successfully.
83 GB SR-2000 UM
Data appending function setting Function
Command Setting
Explanation Default
Number value
Command Setting 0: Full
Number value 1: 1/4
0 : Do not append Binning 513 1 to 4 2: 1/9 1
Time appending 300 0, 1 0 3: 1/16
1 : Append
4: 1/64
0 : Do not append
Code type appending 301 0, 1 0
1 : Append
0 : Do not append Other settings
Symbol ID appending 302 0, 1 0
1 : Append
Bank number 0 : Do not append Command Setting
303 0, 1 0 Function Explanation Default
appending 1 : Append Number value
0 : Do not append Output data on TEST 0 : Disable
Scan count appending 305 0, 1 0 600 0, 1 1
1 : Append switch 1 : Enable
0 : Do not append Specify 1 character (2 HEX

Read time appending 306 0, 1 0 Delimiter character 601 hh 3A
1 : Append characters) from (0x00 to 0x7F)
0 : Do not append Specify up to 5 characters (10
Code vertex appending 308 0, 1 0 hhhhhhh HEX bytes) from HEX (0x00 to
1 : Append Inter delimiter 602 2C
h··· 0x7F).
0 : Do not append
Code center appending 309 0, 1 0 FF : Not set
1 : Append
000 to
Unused ECC ratio 0 : Do not append Data filling size 603 000
310 0, 1 0 999
appending 1 : Append
Specify 1 character (2 HEX
Matching level 0 : Do not append Data filling character 604 hh 20
312 0, 1 0 characters) from (0x00 to 0x7F)
appending 1 : Append
Specify up to 5 characters (10
File name appending 0 : Do not append hhhhhhh
313 0, 1 0 Composite delimiter 605 HEX bytes) from HEX (0x00 to FF
(full path display) 1 : Append h···
0x7F).
0 : Do not append
Add region number 318 0, 1 0 0 : Not selected
1 : Append
1 : Verification OK, Read OK
Read detailed error 0 : Do not append 2 : Verification NG
319 0, 1 0
code appending 1 : Append 4 : Read ERROR
Setting for Master/Slave 0 : Do not append 8 : Stable reading
320 0, 1 0
group name addition 1 : Append Silent Mode 606 0 to 255 16 : Unstable reading 0
Setting for Master/Slave 0 : Do not append 32 : Preset result
321 0, 1 0 64 : Test Mode
ID addition 1 : Append
128 : Tuning
Data edit function (Data 0 : Disable
360 0, 1 0 Specify the setting by sum of the
edit by script) 1 : Enable
values of the items.
Specify up to 8 characters (16 005200450
Preset data comparison settings Reader name 607 hhhhhhhh…
HEX bytes) from UNICODE (UTF- 041004400
16 BigEndian). 450052
Command Setting FF : Not set (READER)
Number value Specify up to 32 characters with
Number of verification 0001 to ASCII codes
400 0001 Reader description 620 ssssss… (Not set)
start digits 7089 (Characters that can be specified:
0x20 to 0x7E)
Number of verification 000 to Maximum value for sequential
401 494 0 : Not specified
digits 494 value verification = 9
1 : Detailed response
Up to 494 characters (HEX 988 Trigger command
610 0 to 4 2 : User setting 0
bytes) can be specified from HEX response string
Preset data registration 402 hhhhhhhh··· FF 3 : Echo back
(0x00 to 0xFF).
4 : Command replacement
FF : Not set
0 : Disable lock
0 : Normal ENTER button lock 611 0, 1 0
Verification method 403 0, 1 0 1 : Enable lock
1 : Sequential value verification
Trigger command Up to 8 characters can be
Incremental setting for
-9999 to success response 613 hhhh… specified. 4F4B
sequential value 404 -9999 to +9999 +0001
+9999 string Specify characters with HEX (0x00
verification
to 0x7F).
Trigger command
Image saving function settings failure response string
614 hhhh… * This is valid when the trigger 4552
command response setting is
User setting.
Command Setting
Number value 0 : Normal Mode
Rotate display image 615 0, 1 0
Saving destination of 1 : 180 degrees rotation
500 0
read OK images 0 : Disabled
Saving destination of 1 : Polarizing filter enabled
501 1 Light always on 616 0 to 3 0
0 : Disable saving 2 : Polarizing filter disabled
verification NG images
0 to 3 1 : Save to RAM 3 : Always on
Saving destination of
502 3 : FTP transmission 1 0 : Disable
read error images Display LED lighting 721 0, 1 1
1 : Enable
Saving destination of
503 1 0 : Before image filter
unstable images Monitor display image 900 0, 1 1
1 : After image filter
Saving destination of 1 : Saving to RAM
504 1, 3 1 Camera rotation 0 : Normal Mode
capture images 3 : FTP transmission 901 0, 1 0
settings 1 : 180 degrees rotation
0 : Latest bank image
1 : Specified number of images
Image saving mode 505 0 to 2 after trigger input ON 0 Assisted Tuning Settings
2 : Specified number of images
after trigger input OFF
Command Setting
Specify the number of Function Explanation Default
Number value
images to save from 506 1 to 32 32
0 : Disable
trigger input ON/OFF Assisted tuning 870 0,1 0
1 : Enable
Edit image file name Speed (m/min) 871 0 to 600 Specified in m/min 20
0 : Disable
function (Edit image file 510 0, 1 0
1 : Enable 0 to
name by script) Takt time (m/min) 872 Specified in ms 0
10000
Image format 0 : BMP
511 0, 1 1 0 : No movement
specification 1 : JPG 1 : Longitudinal movement
Movement pattern 873 0 to 3 0
Quality (JPEG) 512 1 to 10 "10" gives the highest quality. 5 2 : Lateral movement
3 : Rotational movement
0 to
Tuning distance 874 Specified in mm 0
5000
GB SR-2000 UM 84
Function
Command Setting
Explanation Default
Region Configuration Commands (WD/RD)
Number value
Recommended Send region configuration commands in the following format.
0 to
installation distance 875 Specified in mm 0
5000
(near) z Configuration changes
Recommended
0 to Send command WD,m,n
installation distance 876 Specified in mm 0
5000
(far) Successful OK,WD
Response
Minimum cell size of the 0 to Error ER,WD,ee
877 - 0
code (x 0.01 mm) 10000
Code orientation 0 : Disable z Settings confirmation
878 0,1 0
restriction 1 : Enable
Send command RD,m
0 to
Target speed 881 Specified in rpm 20 Successful OK,RD,n
1000 Response
1 to Error ER,RD,ee
Diameter 882 Specified in mm 100
1000 m : Command number, n: Setting
0 : Horizontal ee : Error code
Reader orientation 883 0,1 0
1 : Vertical
0 : Front Region Configuration Commands
Installation angle type 884 0 to 2 1 : Skew angle 0
2 : Pitch angle
Command Setting
Installation angle (°) 885 0 to 89 Specified in degrees 0 Function Explanation Default
Number value
0 to a : 0000-2024
Code position change 886 Specified in mm 0
2000 b : 0000-1512
50 to c : 0023-2047
Near distance to target 887 Specified in mm 50 d : 0023-1535
5000 001 to
Region abcd Minimum size: 24 dot x 24 dot 0000000000000000
50 to 128 (a, b)
Far distance to target 888 Specified in mm 5000
5000
(c, d)
Tuning options
The command number represents the region number.
Command Setting
Number value Example) Configuring the region corresponding to region number 2 to (a,b)=(0,0)
Brightness adjustment 0 : High quality mode and (c,d)=(239,239):
801 0, 1 0
mode 1 : High speed mode
Configuration change Send command WD,002,00000000002390239
Exposure on high 15 to
802 Exposure time (μs) 1000 Response (Normal process) OK,WD
speed mode 10000
0 : Disable Configuration confirmation
Image filter 805 0, 1 1 Send command RD,002
1 : Enable
Allow reduced Response (Normal process) OK,RD,00000000002390239
0 : Do not allow
detection count while 806 0, 1 1
1 : Allow
tuning
0 : Disable
Polarizing filter 811 0 to 2 1 : Enable 1 Communication configuration commands (WN/RN)
2 : Always on
Auto polarizing filter 0 : Disable*1 Communication configuration command is sent in the following format:
812 0, 1 1
adjustment 1 : Enable
z Configuration changes
0 : Do not limit
Code search 813 0, 1 1
1 : Limit Send command WN,m,n
1 QR : Successful OK,WN
2 DM : Response
4 :
PDF417(microPDF) Error ER,WN,ee
10 :
GS1DataBar
20 :
CODE39 z Settings confirmation
(Trioptic CODE 39)
40 : ITF Send command RN,m
80 : 2of5 Successful OK,RN,n
100 : NW7(Codebar) Response
Error ER,WN,ee
200 : JAN/EAN/UPC
1 to 400 : CODE128 m : Command number, n: Setting
Tuning target code 820 1FFF7
20000 800 : COOP2of5 ee : Error code
1000 : CODE93
2000 : CC-A/B
(GS1 DataBar) Example: Changing SR-2000 Series IP address to "192.168.100.1"
4000 : CC-A/B(EAN/UPC) Configuration change
8000 : CC-A/B/C(GS-128) Send command WN,200,192.168.100.1
20000 : Pharmacode Response (Normal process) OK,WN
80000 : DotCode
Use the sum of the items (in Configuration confirmation
hexadecimal) to specify the Send command RN,200
setting. Response (Normal process) OK,RN,192.168.100.1
0 : Disable
Black/white inversion
823 0 to 2 1 : Enable 2
setting when tuning Important To change and apply the communication configuration, make sure to
2 : Automatic
send a SAVE command.
Internal lighting when 0 : Not used
821 0, 1 1
tuning 1 : Used
External lighting when 0 : Not used
tuning
822 0, 1
1 : Used
0
Common communication settings
0 : Standard
Contrast adjustment 1 : HDR Command Setting
825 0 to 3 1 Function Explanation Default
method 2 : HDR2 Number value
3 : Contrast zoom
0 : Disable
Automatic contrast 0 : Disable Append checksum 003 0, 1 0
826 0, 1 1 1 : Enable
adjustment 1 : Enable
0 : Disable
Append data size 004 0, 1 0
1 : Enable
*1 When "0" is specified, tuning is executed with the conditions set with WRP,811
HEX bytes) from HEX (0x00 to
Header settings 005 hhhh··· FF
0x7F).
FF : Not set
HEX bytes) from HEX (0x00 to
Terminator settings 006 hhhh··· 0D
0x7F).
FF : Not set
85 GB SR-2000 UM
RS-232C communication settings PLC communication settings
0 : 9600 bps a : 0 to 255
1 : 19200 bps b : 0 to 255
Baud rate setting 100 0 to 4 2 : 38400 bps 4 Remote IP address 0.0.0.0
300 a.b.c.d c : 0 to 255
3 : 57600 bps (TCP communication) (Not set)
d : 0 to 255
4 : 115200 bps
Use when the protocol is TCP.
0 : 7 bit
Data length setting 101 0, 1 1 Remote port 1024 to
1 : 8 bit 301 Use only for TPC protocol. 5000
(TCP communication) 65535
0 : Disable
Parity check setting 102 0 to 2 1 : Even 1 Port number setting for 1024 to
302 - 5000
2 : Odd this device 65535
0 : 1 bit 0 : Not used
Stop bit length setting 103 0, 1 0
1 : 2 bit 1 : MC protocol (RS-232C)
0 : No Handshaking 2 : SYSWAY
Communication 3 : KV Studio(RS-232C)
104 0 to 2 1 : PASS/RTRY 0
protocol setting
2 : ACK/NAK Protocol setting 303 0 to 8 4 : MC protocol (Ethernet) 0
RS-232C 0: Not used 5 : OMRON PLC Link
109 0, 1 1 6 : KV Studio
communication 1: Used
7 : EtherNet/IP
8 : PROFINET
Ethernet communication settings MC:
0 to 32767
Command Setting SYSWAY:
Function Explanation Default DM front address 304 0
Number value 0 to 9999
a : 0 to 255 KV:
b : 0 to 255 192.168. 0 to 65534
IP address setting 200 a. b. c. d
c : 0 to 255 100.100 MC:
d : 0 to 255 0 to 7F
Specify with bit length SYSWAY:
Control region address 305 0
Subnet mask setting 201 8 to 30 255.255.255.0 ···24 24 0 to 6143
255.0.0.0 ···8 KV:
a : 0 to 255 1 to 599
b : 0 to 255 0.0.0.0 MC:
Default gateway setting 202 a. b. c. d
c : 0 to 255 (Not set) 0 to 7F
d : 0 to 255
Response region SYSWAY:
0: Not used 306 0
address 0 to 6143
Ethernet command 203 0 to 2 1: TCP 1 KV:
2: UDP 1 to 599
23, 1024 1000
Command standby Output data length 001 to
204 to 65535 - 9004 307 * Set the upper limit of writing 64
port number *1 setting 1000
length.
0 : Disable 0 : Disable
Login authentication 220 0, 1 0 PLC link timing input 308 0, 1 0
1 : Enable 1 : Enable
User name 221 aaaa… ASCII characters (maximum of 32) admin Timing/Data wait 309 00 to 99 by the 10 ms 10
Password 222 aaaa… ASCII characters (maximum of 32) Retry duration (s) 310 1 to 10 by the second 5
Ethernet data 0: Not used EtherNet/IP 0 : Do not handshake
205 0,1 1 321 0, 1 0
(server) setting 1: TCP data handshake setting 1 : Handshake
Ethernet data 23, 1024 EtherNet/IP
(server) standby 206 to 65535 - 9004 0040 to
Input assembly data 322 by 1 500
port number *1 1400
size setting
0: Not used EtherNet/IP
Ethernet data 0004 to
207 0 to 2 1: TCP 0 Output assembly data 323 by 1 500
(client) setting 1400
2: UDP size setting
Ethernet data a : 0 to 255 EtherNet/IP 0 : Disable (ROCKWELL)
b : 0 to 255 324 0, 1 0
(client) 208 a.b.c.d 0.0.0.0 Byte swapping setting 1 : Enable (KEYENCE/OMRON)
c : 0 to 255
remote IP address 1 d : 0 to 255 Up to 240 characters
Specify with ASCII codes
Ethernet data
1024 to * Device naming rule
(client) 209 - 9004
65535 1 : PROFINET device name
remote port number 1
length: 1 to 240 characters
Ethernet data a : 0 to 255 2 : 1 label length: 1 to 63
b : 0 to 255
(client) 210 a.b.c.d 0.0.0.0 characters
c : 0 to 255
remote IP address 2 d : 0 to 255 3 : Only [a to z] (alphabet lower
case), [0 to 9] (numbers), [-]
Ethernet data
1024 to (hyphen), [.] (period) can be
(client) 211 9004
65535 used for a device name.
remote port number 2
4 : [-] (hyphen) cannot be used
Continually send 0: Disable at the beginning of the label.
213 0,1 0
connection requests 1: Enable 5 : [-] (hyphen) cannot be used
PROFINET device
0: Disable 330 nnn… at the end of the label. SR-2000
Keep alive setting 214 0,1 1 name
1: Enable 6 : port-xyz, port-xyz-abcde
0: Disable cannot be the name of the
Host connection error due to
client connection failure
215 0, 1 0 first label.
1: Enable
abcde and xyz mean [0 to 9]
*1 You cannot specify 9013, 9014, 9015, 9016, 5900, 5920, or 44818. (numbers).
7 : Device names cannot be
made in the IP address
format.
(n.n.n.n n=0.….999)
8 : Labels cannot start with xn-.
9 : The first character of labels
cannot be a number.
If these rules are not observed, an
error occurs.
0 : Do not handshake
PROFINET handshake 331 0, 1 0
1 : Handshake
GB SR-2000 UM 86
FTP Communication Settings SNTP settings
• Image transmission
Command Setting
Command Setting Number value
Number value a : 0 to 255
a : 0 to 255 b : 0 to 255
Remote SNTP server c : 0 to 255
b : 0 to 255 520 a. b. c. d 0.0.0.0
IP address of the address d : 0 to 255
c : 0 to 255 0.0.0.0 If 0.0.0.0 is set, the SNTP server is
connection destination 400 a.b.c.d
d : 0 to 255 (Not set) not accessed.
FTP server
For 0.0.0.0., the FTP client does
0 to 32
not operate.
User name of the 0 : GMT-12:00
connection destination 401 aaaa··· ASCII setting (max. 16 characters) admin 1 : GMT-11:00
FTP server 2 : GMT-10:00
3 : GMT-9:00
Password of the 4 : GMT-8:00 PSD
connection destination 402 aaaa··· ASCII setting (max. 16 characters) admin 5 : GMT-7:00
FTP server 6 : GMT-6:00 CST, Mexico City,
Central America
Directory transfer at 0 : Disable
403 0, 1 0 7 : GMT-5:00 EST
connection 1 : Enable 8 : GMT-4:30
Directly name of the 9 : GMT-4:00 AST
404 aaaa··· ASCII setting (max. 32 characters) image 10 : GMT-3:30
transfer destination
11 : GMT-3:00 Brasilia
FTP connection request 12 : GMT-2:00 Central Atlantic
0 : Disable
transmission as 405 0, 1 0 13 : GMT-1:00
1 : Enable
necessary 14 : GMT London, UTC
PASV command 0 : Disable 15 : GMT+1:00 Berlin, Brussels,
408 0, 1 0 Rome, Paris, Berne
transmission 1 : Enable
Time zone 521 0 to 33 16 : GMT+2:00 Athens, 28
Host connection error due to 0 : Disable Jerusalem
409 0, 1 1
client connection failure 1 : Enable 17 : GMT+3:00 Kuwait
18 : GMT+3:30
• FTP transmission of read data 19 : GMT+4:00 Moscow
20 : GMT+4:30
Command Setting 21 : GMT+5:00
Function Explanation Default 22 : GMT+5:30 New Delhi
Number value
23 : GMT+5:45
FTP transmission 0: Disable 24 : GMT+6:00
420 0,1 0
of read data 1: Enable 25 : GMT+6:30
a: 0 to 255 26 : GMT+7:00 Bangkok
b: 0 to 255 27 : GMT+8:00 Kuala Lumpur,
Remote IP address 421 a.b.c.d 0.0.0.0 Singapore, Taipei, Beijing
c: 0 to 255
28 : GMT+9:00 Japan, Seoul
d: 0 to 255 29 : GMT+9:30
User name 422 ASCII (max. 16 characters) admin 30 : GMT+10:00 Canberra,
Sydney
Password 423 ASCII (max. 16 characters) admin
31 : GMT+11:00
Directory transfer at 0: Disable 32 : GMT+12:00
424 0,1 0
connection 1: Enable 33 : GMT+13:00
Name of the directory Update cycle (min) 522 1 to 99 1
425 ASCII (max. 32 characters) data
to transfer to
Send FTP connection 0: Disable
request as necessary
426 0,1
1: Enable
0 Setting/confirmation command batch transmission (WA/RA)
0: Disable The SR-2000 Series has a dedicated command for batch transmission of multiple
Passive mode 429 0,1 0
1: Enable setting/confirmation commands (WB/RB, WC/RC, WD/RD, WP/RP, WN/RN). Use
Append to preceding 0: Disable this to reduce the number of setting commands to send.
430 0,1 1
data 1: Enable
File name 431 File name (max. 128 characters) data.txt Batch transmission command format
0: Disable
Host connection error due to
432 0.1 1 z Configuration changes
client connection failure 1: Enable
Send command WA, command1 , command2 ,...
Master/slave function Successful OK,WA
Response
Error ER,WA,n,ec,ee
Command Setting
Number value z Settings confirmation
0 : Disable
Send command RA, command1 , command2 ,...
Master/Slave operation 1 : Multi drop link
500 0 to 3 0 Successful OK,RA, Response of command1 , Response of command2 ,...
configuration 2 : Multi head
Response
3 : Advanced Multi-head Error ER,RA,n,ec,ee
Master/Slave ID during n : Number of command with error (beginning with 1)
501 0 to 31 If 0 is set, it operates as Master. 0
operation ec : Type of command with error, ee: Error code
Number of read data in
502 1 to 8 1
Multi Head mode
• When using the batch transmission command, the reflecting order of
Up to 16 characters Point
the setting is the same as the sending order of the setting commands.
Master/Slave function Specify with ASCII codes
503 nnnn… GROUP01 • Make sure to send the SAVE command after sending the batch
group name * 0x20 to 0x7E of ASCII codes can transmission command containing the communication setting
be used. command.
• The batch transmission command can send up to 2048 bytes of
Web monitor Setting number of characters (excluding header and terminator).
• The location (n) of the error command returns the location first
Command Setting confirmed from the head of the transmission command.
Number value
0: Disable
Web monitor Access 530 0,1 0
1: Enable
Password 0: Disable
535 0,1 0
authentication 1: Enable
Specify up to 12 characters with
ASCII codes
User name 531 ssssss… user
(Characters that can be specified:
0x20 to 0x7E)
Specify up to 12 characters with
ASCII codes
Password 532 ssssss… pass
(Characters that can be specified:
0x20 to 0x7E)
87 GB SR-2000 UM
Each Setting/Confirmation Command Format
When using the batch transmission command, link each setting/confirmation
command in the following format after deleting W/R from each command.
Parameter bank configuration commands

Send command B,bm,n
z Settings confirmation
Send command B,bm
Response Successful B,bn
b : Parameter bank (01-16)
Tuning configuration command

Send command C,m,n
Send command C,m
Response Successful C,n
Region Configuration Commands

Send command D,m,n
Send command D,m
Response Successful D,n
Operation configuration command

Send command P,m,n
Send command P,m
Response Successful P,n
Communication command
Send command N,m,n
Send command N,m
Response Successful N,n
[Ex.] Sending of WB and WP commands together

Configuration changes
Send command WA,B,01700,2,P,200,0,P,201,1
Successful response OK,WA
Settings confirmation
Send command RA,B,01700,P,200,P,201
Successful response OK,RA,B,2,P,0,P,1
GB SR-2000 UM 88
13-1 PLC Link Overview 13-2 Settings
We have prepared information regarding connecting PLCs to the SR Series.
PLC Link Download the information from the KEYENCE website.
The PLC link enables the SR-2000 Series to directly write data into the internal
memory of the PLC (data memory and data registers) by way of the RS-232C and SR-2000 Series Settings
Ethernet interfaces.
Since the SR-2000 Series directly controls memory in the PLC, it eliminates the RS-232C
need for a communication program. Therefore, man-hours needed to create
programs can be reduced. 1 Open the [RS-232C] tab.
Important The changeover function can be used through the PLC link.
The following restrictions are imposed regarding the use of the PLC
2 Set the [Baud Rate], [Data Bits], [Parity], and [Stop Bit] settings to
link: match the PLC.
• You cannot use the PLC link to change the SR-2000 settings.
• You cannot use the PLC link to activate test modes. 3 Under [PLC link], select [Enable].
• You cannot use the PLC link to send operation commands and
configuration commands. 4 Select the [Protocol].
• Due to long communication time, it is not suitable for a line that
requires high-speed processing.
• The amount of data that can be processed depends on the output
5 Set [PLC link timing input] to "Enable."
data length. A maximum number of digits is 1000. * This is not necessary when you are using the IN1 terminal of the SR-2000
(Default output data length is 64 digits.) Series to apply triggers.
• No header and terminator are output.
List of supported PLCs

RS-232C
KEYENCE
Series name Connection method Model
CPU built-in port KV-7300/3000, KV Nano Series
KV Series KV-L21V/KV-L20V/L20R,
Communication unit
KV-N10L/NC10L/NC20L
Mitsubishi Electric
QJ71C24N/-R2
MELSEC Series Serial communication unit
LJ71C24/-R2
OMRON
CS1 Series
CJ1 Series
Ethernet
CPU built-in port
CJ2 Series*
SYSMAC Series CP1 Series*
Serial option board CP1W-CIF01/11/12 2 Enter the [IP address] and [Subnet Mask] settings to assign to the
Serial communication unit CJ1W-SCU(-V1) SR-2000 Series.
Communication board CS1-SUB-V1
3 Start the [Setup Wizard].
* A serial option board is necessary, depending on the model.
Ethernet Interface 5 STEP 2 Select [Field network/PLC].
KEYENCE
6 STEP 3 Select the communication protocol.
CPU built-in port KV-5000/5500/7500
7 STEP 4 Configure connection destination settings such as the [IP
KV Series Address] and the [Port].
Ethernet unit KV-LE21V/LE20V, KV-NC1EP
8 Exit the [Setup Wizard].
Mitsubishi Electric
Q03UDECPU, Q04/06/10/13/20/26/ Point When you are using the PLC link, you can only use the RS-232C
50/100UDEHCPU interface or the Ethernet interface.
Q03/04/06/13/26UDVCPU
CPU built-in port
MELSEC Series L02CPU/06CPU/26CPU-BT
R04/08/16/32/120CPU
iQ-F FX5U
PLC Settings Examples
Ethernet unit QJ71E71-100/-B5/-B2
KV Series
OMRON z RS-232C
Series name Connection method Model Operation KV BUILDER/KV STUDIO mode
SYSMAC Series CPU built-in port CJ2M-CPU3 Series Interface RS-232C *1
Division 0
Baud rate Automatic *2
Data bit length 8 bits *2
Parity Even (e) *2
Stop bit length 1 bit *2
Checksum None *2
RS/CSFlow control Disable
*1 To use port2, set the interface to "RS-232C".

*2 For KV BUILDER/KV STUDIO mode, a fixed value is used.
89 GB SR-2000 UM
z Ethernet Protocol UDP
IP address 192.168.100.10 Open system MC protocol
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 (default) Port number with Ethernet
232C (hexadecimal number) * Any number
module installed
Port (VT) 8502 (default)
* The port number of the SR-2000 Series must be specified in decimal number
while the Q Series port number with Ethernet module installed is specified in
hexadecimal number.
MELSEC Series Configuration
Example) Hexadecimal number Decimal number
z RS-232C
232C 9004
• QJ71C24N/-R2
Set communication conditions with the GX-Developer.
("I/O assignment configuration" in "PC parameters") • L02CPU/26CPU-BT
Type Intelligent Set communication conditions with the GX-Works2.
("Built-in Ethernet port configuration" in "PC parameters")
Type name Name of the unit to be installed
IP address 192.168.100.10*1
Points 32 points
Subnet mask patterns 255.255.255.0 *1
First XY First output signal of the target unit (hexadecimal number)
Default router IP address 192.168.100.254 *1
("Option configuration" under "I/O assignment settings" in "PC parameters")
Communication data
Unit type Serial communication/modem interface unit Binary code communication
code configuration
Unit type name Name of the unit to be installed Writing permitted during
("Switch configuration" under "I/O assignment configuration" in "PC parameters") RUN Check
(FTP and MC protocol)
Settings Value
*1 Make the configuration appropriate to the network.
Operation configuration Independent ("Built-in Ethernet port configuration" in "PC parameters")
Data bit length 8 bits Protocol UDP
Parity bit Present Open system MC protocol
Odd/even parity Odd (o) Port number with Ethernet
232C (hexadecimal number) * Any number
Stop bit length 1 bit module installed
Checksum code Present * The port number of the SR-2000 Series must be set in decimal numbers.
Writing during RUN Allowed
Configuration change Allowed
SYSMAC Series Configuration
Communication rate
9600 bps
configuration z RS-232C
Communication protocol Set communication conditions with the CX-Programmer.
MC protocol (format 5)
configuration
Division configuration 0 • CPU built-in port
PLC system configuration→Upper link port (serial port)
z Ethernet Communication
User configuration
• QJ71E71-100/-B5/-B2 configuration
Set communication conditions with the GX-Developer. Baud rate 9600 bits/s
("I/O assignment configuration" in "PC parameters") Parameter 7,2,E
Type Intelligent Mode Upper link
Type name Name of the unit to be installed ID No. 0
Points 32 points * When communication configuration is established as a standard, baud rate and
First XY First output signal of the target unit (hexadecimal number) parameters are fixed as above.
(Target unit number for "Ethernet/CC IE/MELSECNET" in "Network parameters")
• Serial communication unit/board
Network type Ethernet I/O table/unit configuration
Number specified in "I/O assignment configuration" in PC
First I/O No. Presence or absence of
parameters Optional configuration
optional configuration
Network No. Any number Communication mode Upper link
Group No. Any number
Data length 7 bits
Division Any number
Stop bit 2 bits
Mode Online
Parity Even
("Operation configuration" for "Ethernet/CC IE/MELSECNET" in "Network Transmission rate 9600 bps
parameters")
CTS control None
Communication data
Binary code communication Upper link ID No 0
code configuration
Initial timing configuration Always waiting for OPEN (Communication possible during STOP)
IP address 192.168.100.10 *1 z Ethernet
Writing permitted during
Check
Set communication conditions with CX-Programmer.
RUN
Send frame configuration Ethernet (V2.0) • CPU built-in port
TCP living confirmation [Rotary switch]
KeepAlive is used.
configuration Unit number 0
*1 Configure so that it matches the network. Node address 1 *1
* The port number is 5000.
[TCP/IP]
• CPU built-in port IP address 192.168.100.10
Set communication conditions with the GX-Developer. Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
("Built-in Ethernet port configuration" in "PC parameters")
[FINS/UDP]
IP address 192.168.100.10 *1
Subnet mask patterns 255.255.255.0 *1 FINS/UDP port 9600 (default)
Default router IP address 192.168.100.254 *1 IP address conversion IP address table method
Communication data Remote IP address

Binary code communication Do not perform dynamic conversion of the remote IP address.
code configuration dynamic conversion
Writing permitted during Destination node address 2

RUN Check IP address 192.168.100.100 *2
(FTP and MC protocol)
*1 Set the node address to a value that is different from that of the SR-2000
*1 Configure so that it matches the network. Series.
("Built-in Ethernet port configuration" in "PC parameters") *2 Specify the IP address of the SR-2000 Series.
GB SR-2000 UM 90
Devices That Can Be Used 13-3 Memory Maps
The devices that can be accessed with the PLC link are shown below.
To use the SR-2000 Series over the PLC link, the functions of the SR-2000 Series
PLC Specified area Device name Available range need to be assigned to the PLC devices. For the SR-2000 Series, assign the front
Control region address of each device to match the target functions.
Input relay, output relay R100 to R59915*1
KV Series Response region
Data region Data memory DM0 to DM65534 Control region Device used to write commands from the PLC
Control region Input device Y0 to Y7FF*2 Response region Device used to write responses from the SR-2000 Series
MELSEC Series Response region Output device X0 to X7FF*2 Data region Device used to write the reading result data of the SR-2000 Series*
Data region Data register 0 to 32737 * It is also used to specify parameter banks.
Control region CIO, internal auxiliary
0 to 6143ch
SYSMAC Series Response region relay
Data region Data memory D0000 to D9999
Assignment of Functions
• The available range indicates the maximum value of the device accessible when Control region
the PLC link function is used. When you set the DM front address, control region When the control region address A is specified, functions are assigned in order as
address, or response region address, do so by taking into account the number shown below starting with the specified beginning address.
of necessary devices.
A+15 A+14 A+13 A+12 A+11 A+10 A+9 A+8 A+7 A+6 A+5 A+4 A+3 A+2 A+1 A+0
• Even with the same PLC model, depending on the specifications and the config-
uration, it may not be possible to specify the maximum value for the device Reserved area
region that can actually be used and there may be regions that cannot be used. SR-2000 PLC
For more information on the available regions, refer to the appropriate PLC man- Address Description Data description
Write Write
ual. 0:Instruction for timing OFF
A+00 PLC timing area 3
*1 In the AutoID Network Navigator entry field, the range is 1 to 599 . 1: Instruction for timing ON
*2 In the AutoID Network Navigator entry field, the range is 0 to 7F . Data write processing 0: Real time processing
A+01 3
method 1: Sequential processing
• Specifying the front addresses of the control region and response region Sequential processing 0: Data write disabled
A+02 3
2 in the AutoID Network Navigator entry field, Data write enabled 1: Data write enabled
If you enter the value
0: -
the shaded area indicated below will be specified. A+03 BLOAD request 3
1: BLOAD start
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0: -
1 A+04 BLOAD Complete Clear 1: BLOAD completed or failed, 3
bit clear
2 ← Front address
3 * Set the Timing Signal Input via PLC Link to On to turn the timing signal on and off
4 using the PLC timing area and BLOAD request.
* Make sure the file number (1 - 8) is added to D+00 Bank/BLOAD File Number
5
before turning A+03 on. The BLOAD process will fail if the number is outside the
range or the corresponding file does not exist.
* B+06 and B+07 are set to 0 when A+04 is turned on.
* BLOAD requests cannot be manually stopped before completion once started.
Response region
When the response region address B is specified, functions are assigned in order
as shown below starting with the specified beginning address.
B+15 B+14 B+13 B+12 B+11 B+10 B+9 B+8 B+7 B+6 B+5 B+4 B+3 B+2 B+1 B+0
Reserved area
SR-2000 PLC
Address Description Data description
Write Write
PLC timing input 0: Timing OFF
B+00 3
response area 1: Instruction for timing ON
B+01 Reserved area - - -
Sequential processing 0: No data
B+02 3
Data write request 1: Data write request
Sequential processing 0: Data write incomplete
B+03 3
Data write complete 1: Data write complete
Real time processing 0: No data being written
B+04 3
Data being written 1: Data being written
0: BLOAD request off
B+05 BLOAD response 3
1: BLOAD request on
0: -
B+06 BLOAD completion 3
1: BLOAD complete
0: -
B+07 BLOAD failure 3
1: BLOAD fail
* Do not use reserved areas.
* Focus will be adjusted when B+06 is turned on. Wait at least 5 seconds after
turning on B+06 before turning on the timing signal input.
* The D+00 Bank/BLOAD File Number remains the same even when B+06 is on.
Set D+00 Bank/BLOAD File Number to 0 when alternating banks.
91 GB SR-2000 UM
Data region (Single/Advanced Multi-head) *3 The order in which data of each PLC is stored is as follows:
KV : High order byte → Low order byte
When the data region address D is specified, functions are assigned in order as SYSMAC : High order byte → Low order byte
shown below starting with the specified beginning address. MELSEC : Low order byte → High order byte
*4 The data length output from the SR-2000 Series depends on the data output
SR-2000 PLC
Address Description Data description
Write Write length set in the SR-2000 Series. (Default value: 64, Maximum of 100 digits)
0 : Do not specify bank 0-byte data is output as data with a length of 0.
Read bank instruction/
(Alternate)
D+00 BLOAD file number 3
1 to 16 : Specify bank n
(single/master only)
1 to 8 : BLOAD file number Device Assignment Function Details
D+01 Reserved area
Length of data (read data + Read trigger area
D+02 Output data length append data) output from the 3
SR-2000 Series This bit is used to start and stop reading.
Read data writing count from Address Description Data description
Data writing process
D+03 the SR-2000 Series to PLC is 3
count 0: Instruction for timing OFF
displayed.*1 A+00 PLC timing area
1: Instruction for timing ON
1st and 2nd digits of
D+04 ASCII code 2 characters*2*3* 3
output data*4 0: Timing OFF
B+00 PLC timing input response area
3rd and 4th digits of 1: Instruction for timing ON
D+05 ASCII code 2 characters*2*3 3
output data*4
A+00: When this bit is set to ON (1), the SR-2000 Series starts reading.
… B+00: When the SR-2000 Series recognizes that A+00 has been set to ON, it
999th and 1000th digits of sets "B+00" to ON.
D+503 ASCII code 2 characters*2*3 3
output data*4
*1 Data write processing method
When the next data reaches at the count of 65535, the value of count returns to 1.
*
2 When the output data length is an odd number, [NUL] (0x00) is written in the You can select from two data writing processing methods: "real time processing"
"Output data length + 1". and "sequential processing." Switch between the processing methods by setting
*3 The order in which data of each PLC is stored is as follows:
the value of [A+01] to "0" and "1."
KV : High order byte → Low order byte
SYSMAC : High order byte → Low order byte z Real time processing
MELSEC : Low order byte → High order byte
*
4 The data length output from the SR-2000 Series depends on the data output Data will be sent immediately after reading.
length set in the SR-2000 Series. (Default: 64 digits, Maximum value with up to Address Description Data description
1,000 digits)
0: Real time processing
0-byte data is output as data with a length of 0. A+01 Data write processing format
1: Sequential processing
Real time processing 0: No data being written
Point
B+04
• If output data cannot fit in the output data region, starting with that Data being written 1: Data being written
digit, the remaining data will be discarded.
• The output data length of SR-2000 is written in the data length of A+01: Set this bit to OFF (0) in advance.
D+02. B+04: While this bit is set to ON, data is being written. It is set to OFF when
writing finishes.
Data region (used with multi-drop and multi-head functions) z Sequential processing
After reading, data is stored in the send buffer of the SR-2000 Series until the
When you use the master/slave function, the following functions are assigned.
writing of data to the PLC is enabled.
SR-2000 PLC
Address Description Data description Address Description Data description
Write Write
0 : Do not specify 0: Real time processing
A+01 Data write processing method
Read bank instruction/ bank (Alternate) 1: Sequential processing
D+00 BLOAD file number 1 to 16: Specify bank n 3 Sequential processing 0: Data write disabled
(master only) 1 to 8 : BLOAD file A+02
Data write enabled 1: Data write enabled
number
Sequential processing 0: No data
Specify the ID that will B+02
Data write request 1: Data write request
supply the trigger input
D+01 Specify ID when you have specified 3 Sequential processing 0: Data write incomplete
B+03
the Multi Drop setting. Data write complete 1: Data write complete
0 to 31: ID A+01: Set this bit to ON (1) in advance.
Length of data (read data A+02: When this bit is set to ON (1), the SR-2000 Series writes read data into
D+02 Output data length + append data) output 3 "D+04 to D+503."
from the SR-2000 Series
When this bit is set to OFF (0), the SR-2000 Series stores data in the
The count of read data
Data writing process send buffer without writing new data.
D+03 written to the PLC from 3
count B+02: This bit is set to ON when read data is present in the send buffer.
the SR-2000 Series. *1
B+03: This bit is set to ON when the writing of data is finished.
D+04 to Digit 1 to digit 100 of the
D+53 output data*4
Read data of ID: 0.*2, 3 3 ID: 0 Reading bank specification
Use this to specify banks of the SR-2000 series.
The ID of the reader to
Address Description Data description Data format
which the most recent
D+54 Data writing ID 3 0: Bank not specified (alternate)
data was written is D+00 Specify read bank Binary code
displayed. 1 to 10: Bank n specified
The trigger input count for D+00: When a bank number has been entered in this address, setting "A+00"
Trigger input count for the to ON (1) starts reading with this bank specified.
D+55 the master unit (ID: 0) is 3
master unit (ID: 0)
displayed.
D+56 to Output data length
Reserved area
D+59
The area is used to write data length output from the SR-2000.
Address Description Data description Data format
D+60 to 1st to 100th digits of
Read data of ID: 1.*2, :3 3 ID: 1
D+109 output data*4 Length of data output from the SR-
D+02 Output data length Binary code
2000 Series
D+110 to 1st to 100th digits of
output data*4
D+159
Output data
...
D+1560 to 1st to 100th digits of Address Description Data description Data format
D+1609 output data*4
D+04 to 2 characters of ASCII code/
* Output data ASCII code
1 When the next data reaches at the count of 65535, the value of count returns to 1. D+503 address*1 *2 *3
*
2 When the output data length is an odd number, [NUL] (0x00) is written in the
"Output data length + 1".
GB SR-2000 UM 92
Point
Example 3) Trigger method: Level trigger. Data writing method: Sequential
• If "A+00" is switched between ON and OFF at high speed, the SR-2000 processing.
Series will miss the changes in "A+00," which will prevent the trigger
input from turning on or off normally. In this situation, write the Memory When reading is
Signal name Address When reading fails
program so that "B+00" is used to check whether the SR-2000 Series layout successful
has recognized the change in "A+00."
Data write
• If the code reading interval is shorter than the PLC link A+01
communication time, data that cannot be written to the PLC will be processing method
Control
stored in the send buffer of the SR-2000 Series. Trigger area A+00
• The SR-2000 Series can hold up to 100 pieces of data. If this limit is region
exceeded, all data in the send buffer is erased and "OVER" is written Data write enabled A+02
into "D+04 to D+503." (This is a send buffer overflow.)
• When a send buffer overflow occurs, the SR-2000 Series stops Read operation (light is lit) OK ERROR
operation, writes "OVER" to the PLC, and then recovers to an
operating state. Trigger response
• When you are using "sequential processing," be sure to set "A+02" to B+00
area
ON (1) after you have prepared the PLC to receive the data. Response
region Data write request B+02
Data write complete B+03
13-4 Operation Examples Data region Output data D+02... Read data ERROR
z When reading is successful

Example 1) Trigger method: Level trigger. Data writing method: Real time 1 "A+00" and "B+00" are set to OFF (0).
processing. 2 "A+01" is set to ON (1).
3 "A+00" is set to ON (1).
Memory When reading is 4 When the SR-2000 Series recognizes that "A+00" has been set to ON (1),
layout successful
"B+00" is set to ON (1) and reading starts.
Data write 5 When a code is read, "B+02" is set to ON (1).
A+01
Control processing method 6 "A+00" is set to OFF (0).
region
Trigger area A+00 7 When "A+02" is set to ON (1), the data is written into "D+04 to D+503."
8 When data writing is complete, "B+03" is set to ON (1).
OK
Read operation (light is lit) ERROR 9 When "A+02" is set to OFF (0), "B+03" is set to OFF (0).
Trigger response
B+00 z When reading fails
Response area
region
1 "A+00" and "B+00" are set to OFF (0).
Writing data B+04 2 "A+01" is set to ON (1).
3 "A+00" is set to ON (1).
Data region Output data D+02... Read data ERROR 4 When the SR-2000 Series recognizes that "A+00" has been set to ON (1),
z When reading is successful 5 "A+00" is set to OFF (0).
1 "A+00," "A+01," and "B+00" are set to OFF (0). 6 When the code cannot be read, "ERROR" is written to the send buffer, so
2 "A+00" is set to ON (1). "B+02" is set to ON (1).
3 When the SR-2000 Series recognizes that "A+00" has been set to ON (1), 7 When "A+02" is set to ON (1), "ERROR" is written into "D+04 to D+503."
"B+00" is set to ON (1) and reading starts. 8 When data writing is complete, "B+03" is set to ON (1).
4 When the code is read, its data is written into "D+04 to D+503." 9 When "A+02" is set to OFF (0), "B+03" is set to OFF (0).
5 "A+00" is set to OFF (0).
6 When the SR-2000 Series recognizes that "A+00" has been set to OFF (0), * Complete processing so that "A+02" is set to ON (1) when "B+03" is set to OFF
"B+00" is set to OFF (0). (0) and "B+02" is set to ON (1). This makes it possible to obtain all the data
even when multiple pieces of data are stored in the send buffer.
z When reading fails
1 "A+00," "A+01," and "B+00" are set to OFF (0).
2 "A+00" is set to ON (1).
Point
3 When the SR-2000 Series recognizes that "A+00" has been set to ON (1), • The read data stored in the "D+04 to D+503" data region is overwritten
"B+00" is set to ON (1) and reading starts. with the new read data.
4 "A+00" is set to OFF (0). • If the number of digits in the read data changes, parts of the previous
5 When the SR-2000 Series recognizes that "A+00" has been set to OFF (0), read data may remain in "D+04 to D+503." If necessary, delete the data
"B+00" is set to OFF (0) and reading stops. stored in "D+04 to D+503" after this data is sent.
• Timing with which to transfer the data stored in "D+04 to D+503" to a
6 The code could not be read, so "ERROR" is written to "D+04 to D+503."
different block of data memory
"Real time processing:" Transfer the data when "B+04" is set to OFF
Example 2) Trigger method: One-shot trigger. Data writing method: Real (0).
time processing. "Sequential processing:" Transfer the data when "B+03" is set to ON
(1).
Memory When reading is
layout successful
Data write
A+01
Control processing method
region
Trigger area A+00
Read operation (light is lit) OK ERROR
Trigger response
B+00
Response area
region
Writing data B+04
Data region Output data D+02... Read data ERROR

2 "A+00" is set to ON (1).
3 When the SR-2000 Series recognizes that "A+00" has been set to ON (1),
5 When the code is read, its data is written into "D+04 to D+503."
6 When the "One-shot trigger duration" elapses, "B+00" is set to OFF (0) and
reading stops.
2 "A+00" is set to ON (1).
3 When the SR-2000 Series recognizes that "A+00" has been set to ON (1),
5 When the "One-shot trigger duration" elapses, "B+00" is set to OFF (0) and
reading stops.
6 The code could not be read, so "ERROR" is written to "D+04 to D+503."
93 GB SR-2000 UM
Example 4) Using the Changeover Function
Configuration
Reference Program
Set the Timing Signal Input via PLC Link to On. This is a reference program for the use of the KV Series. In this program, error
handling is not considered, thus program by taking into account error handling
and test in actual operation.
SR-2000 Series configuration

It is assumed that the SR-2000 Series is configured as follows:
• Timing : Level trigger
• Read mode : Single
• Memory assignment : DM front address: DM1000
Control region address: R100
Response region address: R200
Timing Chart • PLC link timing input : Yes
Memory * To use on a trial basis, specify the PLC communication interface to the SR-2000
Signal name Address BLOAD is successful BLOAD fails
layout Series and configure communication for the KV Series.
BLOAD request A+03
Real time processing
Control BLOAD Complete
A+04
region Clear
Specifying alternate function
PLC timing area A+00 CR2008 #0
Write "0" into DM1000 and set to use the
DW
alternate function.
DM1000
Timing input processing
BLOAD response B+05
R000 R100
Response 5 seconds Input R000 as read timing.
BLOAD completion B+06
region
Data processing
BLOAD failure B+07
R204
Program data to be written into
Data
BLOAD file number D+00 File number 0 File number DM1004 or later.
region
END
z BLOAD Completion
ENDH
1 D+00 describes the file number in binary.
2 A+03 is turned on (1).
3 B+05 is turned on (1) to enable SR-2000 series devices to recognize
Sequential processing
BLOAD requests.
* B+05 remains off (0) when not using BLOAD.
4 B+06 (1) is turned on after the configuration file has been successfully Specifying sequential processing and alternate function
switched. CR2008 R101
5 A+04 is turned on, which turns off B+06 (0). SET Set up the R101 and set it to sequential
6 D+00 is set to 0. processing.
7 B+06 is turned on (1) and then A+00 is turned on (1) after 5 seconds. #0
DW Write "0" into DM1000 and set to use the
DM1000 alternate function.
z BLOAD Failures Timing input processing
1 D+00 describes the file number in binary. R000 R100
2 A+03 is turned on (1). Input R000 as read timing.
3 Turn on B+05 (1) to enable SR-2000 series devices to recognize BLOAD
instructions. Sequential processing
* B+05 remains off (0) when not using BLOAD. R202 R203 R102
4 B+07 is turned on (1) if the configuration file fails to be switched.
Use the data write request flag (R202),
5 A+04 is turned on, which turns off B+07 (0).
data write enabled flag (R102), data
Data processing write complete flag (R203) to execute
Point • Turn on (1) BLOAD request"A+03"when the DATA write request“B+02" sequential processing.
R203
is a state of 0 (a state of no data). Program read data to be written into
• After completion of BLOAD, if the network setting (IP address setting) DM1004 or later.
is edited, Turn off BLOAR completion "B+06" at the same time when
END
BLOAD request "A+03" is turned off.
ENDH
GB SR-2000 UM 94
13-5 PLC Link Error
When a PLC Link Error Occurs

When a PLC link error occurs, the SR-2000 Series exhibits the following behavior:
• "E7 PLC LINK" is shown on the SR-2000 Series display.
• "ERR BUSY" is output from the output terminals.
• The status LED flashes in yellow.
Check Points
When a PLC link error occurs, check the following points:
z Wiring
• Is the cable between the SR-2000 Series and the PLC connected correctly?
• Are there any breaks in the cable?
• If you are communicating via RS-232C, is the wiring correct?
z Settings
• Do the communication settings of the SR-2000 Series match those of the
PLC?
• Are the "memory layout" settings within the range of use of the PLC?
z Operation
• After the PLC settings were configured, was the PLC restarted?
Recovering from PLC Link Errors

• Restart the SR-2000 Series.
• Press the SR-2000 Series [SELECT] button for 3 seconds.
• When "Clear PLC link error" is assigned to IN1 or IN2, turn on IN1 or IN2.
• Send the clear PLC link error command (PCLR) to the SR-2000 Series.
• Send the reset command (RESET) to the SR-2000 Series.
Point
• While a PLC link error is occurring, trigger input signals are not
accepted.
• When PLC link errors are cleared, all the data stored in the send buffer
is cleared.
• When you have specified to use a PLC, this setting may not be applied
until you restart the PLC. After you specify this setting, be sure to
restart the PLC.
95 GB SR-2000 UM
14-1 EtherNet/IP Overview SR-2000 Series EtherNet/IP Communication Specifications
Number of
16*
connections
What Is EtherNet/IP? Cyclic KEYENCE KV Series 4 to 1444 bytes
communication Rockwell Automation
EtherNet/IP is an industrial communications network managed by the ODVA Communication
(Implicit message) ControlLogix 4 to 496 bytes
(Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc.). EtherNet/IP communication can share size
CompactLogix
the network with normal Ethernet communication.
OMRON CJ/CS Series 4 to 1436 bytes
Number of
Message 16*
Cyclic and Message Communication connections
communication
Applicable UCMM (unconnected type), Class 3 (connected
(Explicit message)
In EtherNet/IP, there is cyclic communication (Implicit message) that handles messaging methods type)
periodic sending and receiving of data, and there is also message communication * In total, there are 16 connections in cyclic communication and message com-
(Explicit message) which handles sending and receiving of commands/responses munication.
arbitrarily.
Cyclic communication Usable Functions

In cyclic communication, RPI (communication cycle) can be set according to the The functions that the SR-2000 Series can use with EtherNet/IP are shown below.
priority of data that is sent and received. Overall communication load adjusted
data can be sent and received. Function Description
Begins reading operation.
PLC Reading instruction
Also executes reading end, bank setting reading, etc.
Communication cycle (RPI) setting
EtherNet/IP Records successfully read data as preset data.
SR-2000 (1): 10 ms Preset instructions
SR-2000 (2): 50 ms Also registers or deletes preset data from the PLC.
SR-2000 (3): 1000 ms
Tuning instructions Executes tuning. Can save tuning results in the set bank.
SR-2000 (1) SR-2000 (2) SR-2000 (3) Checks the cause of the error that occurred in the main unit, and
RPI = 10 ms RPI = 50 ms RPI = 1000 ms
Error-handling returns the error.
The communication cycle (RPI) put together in order of priority can be set and network load can be adjusted. (Example: Buffer overflow check/cancellation)
Main unit status
Message communication acquisition
Checks the main unit status (BUSY status).
In message communication, timing is controlled through commands/responses. Operation results Acquires read data.
acquisition When set to silent mode, the read data is not updated.
Terminal status
Command Acquires input terminal and output terminal status.
Send Receive acquisition
Main unit reset
Process, operation Displays the SR-2000 Series software reset.
instructions
Response Send
Receive
Data
About the exclusion process
PLC SR-2000 The SR-2000 Series can simultaneously give control instructions to
multiple interfaces (I/O terminal, RS-232C, Ethernet Communication (TCP/
NOTICE IP), EtherNet/IP communication, test key operation). However, when a
control instruction is being received from one interface, instructions from
List of Supported PLCs other interfaces cannot be received.
PLC manufactured by KEYENCE

EtherNet/IP
PLC model Software used
Communication unit
KV-3000 KV-EP21V
KV-5000 KV-EP21V
KV-7500/5500 -(KV-5500 built-in
KV STUDIO
port or KV-EP21V)
KV-N24/N40/N60/ KV-NC1-EP
NC32T
PLC manufactured by Rockwell Automation

• ControlLogix/Compact Logix category PLC
EtherNet/IP Firmware Version of

Communication unit version software used
1756 ControlLogix 1756-ENBT
1769 - (SR-2000 built-in Ver. 13 or later RsLogix5000 Ver. 13 or later
ConpactLogix port)
• Micro Logix 1100/1400 category PLC
EtherNet/IP Firmware Version of

Communication unit version software used
- (SR-2000 built-in
1761/1766
port)/1761-NET- Series A,
MicroLogix
ENI Revision A, RsLogix500 Ver. 7.10 or later
1762/1763/1764 FRN1
1761-NET-ENI
MicroLogix
PLC manufactured by Omron

EtherNet/IP
Communication unit
- (CJ2 built-in port
SYSMAC CJ2
or CJ1W-EIP21)
CX-One
SYSMAC CJ1 CJ1W-EIP21
SYSMAC CS1 CS1W-EIP21
GB SR-2000 UM 96
14-2 Cyclic Communication PLC Settings
When you use cyclic communication, configure the following settings on the PLC.
(1) Connection settings
Cyclic Communication (2) Settings of the device to communicate with by way of EtherNet/IP
This communication can be used to execute reading or tuning by setting bits to For setting details, refer to the PLC's manual.
ON or OFF.
Connection type
Open a connection from the PLC to the SR-2000 Series during EtherNet/IP cyclic
communication. The types of usable connections vary depending on the device.
The connections that can be used by the SR-2000 Series are shown below.
IN area OUT area Connection type Data type Instance ID Size (byte) RPI (ms)
Reading result Reading result

Result data
Exclusive Owner 0X64(100) 40 to 1400
(Input Assemblies)
Handshake information Handshake information (Data transmission + 10 to 10000
Control data
control) 0X65(101) 8 to 1400
Device status Device status (Output Assemblies)
Busy/error information Busy/error information

Result data
Input Only 0X64(100) 40 to 1400
(Input Assemblies)
Statistical information Statistical information (Data transmission 10 to 10000
Communication cycle (RPI) Control data
Set with PLC
only) 0XFE(254) 0
(Output Assemblies)
OUT area IN area

• SR-2000 → PLC: Data transmission
Reading instruction Reading instruction • PLC → SR-2000: Control instruction
Exclusive Owner Use this connection to send data from the SR-2000 Series and to
Handshake instruction Handshake instruction enable the PLC to send control instructions, such as starting
Tuning Tuning reading, to the SR-2000.
• SR-2000 → PLC: Data transmission
Use this connection to only send data from the SR-2000 Series. You
Input Only
can use multiple connections with a single SR-2000 Series. (To a
• Communication settings such as the communication cycle and data size maximum of 16 connections.)
are set in the PLC.
When there is a large load in the network which connects many devices
including EtherNet/IP devices, delays or packet loss may occur. Perform a Point • When you use "Input Only," you have to set the RPIs of all the devices
NOTICE thorough verification before operation. for "Exclusive Owner" and "Input Only" to the same values.
• When communicating via EtherNet/IP with PLCs (MicroLogix Series • Multiple "Exclusive Owner" connections cannot be used with a single
manufactured by Rockwell, etc.) that do not support cyclic communication, SR-2000 Series unit.
use message communication. • The trigger timing of each connection is executed in a cyclic manner.
• When using the KV series, the connection names are assigned as
shown below.
SR-2000 Series Settings 1: Exclusive Owner → Result data/control data class 1
2: Input Only → Result data class 1 (Input Only)
2 Enter the [IP address] and [Subnet Mask] settings to assign to the KV-5500/7500 Series settings
SR-2000.
We have prepared information regarding connecting the KV-5500/7500 and the
SR Series.
Download the information from the KEYENCE website.
CJ Series settings
We have prepared information regarding connecting the CJ Series and the SR
Series.

1 Set the PLC network communication.
Using the CX-Developper, make the communication settings of PLC's IP
4 STEP 1 Select the trigger input method. address, etc.
5 STEP 2 Select [Field network/PLC]. 2 Set the EtherNet/IP network configuration for PLC and SR-2000.
Using Network Configurator, set the network configuration.
6 STEP 3 Select [EtherNet/IP]. * The EDS file for SR-2000 is in the EDS folder on disc1 of SR-H6W.
7 STEP 4 Configure the detailed EtherNet/IP settings. 3 Register the transmission area tag and the reception area tag for
PLC.
Right-click the PLC icon on Network Configurator, select [Parameter] – [Edit],
enter the [Edit device parameter] setting screen, and edit the tag.
4 Make the setting to relate the PLC tag with the SR-2000 tag.
Register the device on the [Edit device parameter] setting screen and make
the connection assignment setting.
Transfer the configuration parameters to the PLC to complete the setting.
Data handshake Set whether to implement handshake processing.
Input assembly data size

Set this to a value that is the maximum amount of read data + [Setting example]
44 bytes or higher. *1 Connection I/O type: Class1
Output assembly data size Specify a value of 12 bytes or higher.*1
Originator device (PLC) Target device (SR-2000)
You can change the order in which data is stored in memory
(read data or preset data). Input tag set E0_00000 - [500byte] Input_100 -
Byte swapping Output tag set
Disable: Low order to high order Connection type Multi-cast connection [500byte]
Enable: High order to low order
Output tag set D00000 - [500byte] Output_101 -
*1 Increase the value according to the number of digits in the read data or Input tag set
Connection type Point to Point connection [500byte]
preset data.
* For operation details of CX-Developper and Network Configurator, see "SYSMAC
8 Exit the [Setup Wizard]. CS/CJ Series EtherNet/IP Unit User's Manual" published by Omron.
97 GB SR-2000 UM
Control Logix/Compact Logix Series settings Memory Maps
We have prepared information regarding connecting the Control Logix/Compact
Result data (Input Assemblies)
Logix Series and the SR Series.
Input Assemblies write responses from the SR-2000 Series to the PLC. When
using this device, each device function is assigned as follows. Device status,
1 Right-click the EtherNet/IP enabled device on the RSLogix5000 and Result Data, etc. are written to the Input Assemblies.
select New Module.
Input Assemblies memory map (Instance ID: 0x64)
SR-2000 → PLC
Address Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Read
Buffer Read Data
ERR MODE LOCK TRG General Data
0 READY BUSY Overflow Update Error
BUSY BUSY BUSY BUSY Error Update
Error Complete
Available
External External
Preset Data Preset Preset Data Preset
Instruction BLOAD Tuning Reading Instruction BLOAD Tuning Reading
1 Registration Reading Registration Reading
Operation Failure Failure Error Operation Complete Complete Complete
Failure Failure Complete Complete
Failure Complete
ISO/IEC SAE ISO/IEC Matching
AIM DPM OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 IN2 IN1
2 15416 AS9132 15415 Level Unstable
Unstable Status Status Status Status Status
Unstable Unstable Unstable Unstable
3
4 Matching Level
5 ISO/IEC15415 Grade
6 AIM DPM Grade
7 ISO/IEC 15416
2 Click the Communications' [+] button, select ETHERNET-MODULE 8 Reading Error Cause
(Generic Ethernet Module), and click OK. 9 Preset Reading Failure Cause
10 Preset Data Registration Failure Cause
11 Tuning Failure Cause
12 BLOAD Failure Cause
13
14
15 External Instruction Operation Error Cause
16 General Error Cause
17 Slave ID
18 Read Data Ready Count
19 Read Data Update Count
20 Trigger Input Count for Master
21 Read Data Size
22 and
Read Data
above
* Gray parts are reserved areas for the system.
Control data (Output Assemblies)
3 Set the ETHERNET-MODULE as follows: Output Assemblies write instructions from the PLC to the SR-2000 Series. When
using this device, each device function is assigned as follows. Output Assemblies
operate device control instructions, error clear, handshake process, etc.
Output Assemblies memory map (Instance ID: 0x65)

(1) PLC → SR-2000
(4) (5)
Preset Data Preset Error Read
(6) (7) Tuning Reading
BLOAD Registration Reading Clear Data
0 Start Start
(2) Request Start Start Transmission Update
(9) Request
Request Request
Request
Buffer Clear Permitted
(8)
(3) External
Preset Data Preset
Instruction BLOAD Tuning Reading
Registration Reading
1 Operation Complete Complete Complete
Complete Complete
Complete Clear Clear Clear
Clear Clear
Clear
2 Bank Number/BLOAD File Number
3
(1) Name Arbitrary value 4
Arbitrary value 5 Preset Data Size
Data - DINT (double integer, 4 bytes) 6 and
(2) Comm Format Preset Data
Data - INT (integer, 2 bytes) above
Data - SINT (single integer, 1 byte) * Gray parts are reserved areas for the system.
(3) IP Address IP address of the SR-2000 Series
(4) Input Assembly Instance 100
(5) Input Size Input assembly size of the SR-2000 Series*1
(6) Output Assembly Instance 101*2
(7) Output Size Output assembly size of the SR-2000 Series*1
(8) Configuration 1*3
(9) Configuration Size 0*3
*1 In AutoID Network Navigator, the input assembly size and output assembly
size are set with 8 bits, but these are set with 32 bits on the RSLogix5000.
8-bit notation 32-bit notation
100 25
*2 When operating with the "Input Only" connection type, set (6) to 254 and (7) to
0.
*3 The SR-2000 Series does not use the Configuration setting. However, enter
the above value since failing to do so will result in an incomplete input error.
GB SR-2000 UM 98
Details of Result Data (Input Assemblies) Address 1 Bit 8 to Bit 15 Error status
Address 0 Bit 0 to Bit 7 Handshake and error status Address Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
1
Address Bit Name Description Data contents
0
0 : -
This turns ON when reading error
1 8 Reading Error 1 : Reading error,
or comparison NG occurs.
Address Bit Name Description Data contents Comparison NG*
This Bit turns ON when either "6 Preset This turns ON when preset 0 : -
0 : No error 1 9
0 0 Error Buffer Overflow Error" or "7
1 : Error Reading Failure reading fails. 1 : Preset reading failure*
General Error" Bit is ON.
Preset
This Bit is used when using 0 : -
Read Data Data This turns ON when preset data
handshake.* 0 : No read data 1 10 1 : Preset data
Registration registration fails.
0 1 Update
This displays whether read data 1 : Read data available registration failure*
Available Failure
exists or not.
Tuning 0 : -
1 11 This turns ON when tuning fails.
Read Data
This Bit is used when using Failure 1 : Tuning failure*
handshake.* 0→1: Result data update
0 2 Update BLOAD 0 : -
This turns ON when read data complete 1 12 This turns ON when BLOAD fails.
Complete
update is complete. Failure 1 : BLOAD failure*
Buffer Overflow This turns ON when buffer 0 : No error External This turns ON when "Reading",
0 6 0 : -
Error overflow error occurs. 1 : Error Instruction "Preset reading" or "Tuning" is
1 15 1 : External instruction
Operation executed with the IN terminal or
This turns ON when a operation failure*
Failure command and the operation fails.
communication or main unit error
occurs. It does not turn ON when
0 : No error
* If any of the above errors occurs, the error code is output to "Failure cause status
0 7 General Error a buffer overflow error occurs. (Input Assemblies address 8 to 16)".
1 : Error
If this turns ON, the error code is
output to "Address 16 General
Error Cause". Address 2 Bit 0 to Bit 6 Terminal status
* Handshake is a communication procedure to make the permission system for
read data writing. Address Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
* Use handshaking when using the multi-head mode of the master/slave function. 2

Address 0 Bit 8 to Bit 14 BUSY status
This represents IN1 terminal 0 : OFF
2 0 IN1 Status
status. 1 : ON
This represents IN2 terminal 0 : OFF
0 2 1 IN2 Status
status. 1 : ON
This represents OUT1 terminal 0 : OFF
Address Bit Name Description Data contents 2 4 OUT1 Status
status. 1 : ON
This Bit turns ON when any of the This represents OUT2 terminal 0 : OFF
0 : - 2 5 OUT2 Status
0 8 BUSY following BUSY Bits (9 to 13) is status. 1 : ON
1 : BUSY status
ON.
This represents OUT3 terminal 0 : OFF
0 : - 2 6 OUT3 Status
0 9 TRG BUSY TRG BUSY status. 1 : ON
1 : TRG BUSY status
0 : - * The above chart shows the contents when the input polarity setting of the
0 10 LOCK BUSY LOCK BUSY SR-2000 is Norm. open (normally open). For Norm. closed (normally closed), the
1 : LOCK BUSY status
0 : - data is reversed as 0: ON 1: OFF.
0 11 MODE BUSY MODE BUSY
1 : MODE BUSY status * When checking the writing of read data, do not use OUT1 to 3 statuses, but use
0 : - the "Reading Complete" bit or "External Instruction Operation Complete" bit.
0 12 ERR BUSY ERR BUSY
1 : ERR BUSY status Depending on the communication load, the ON statuses of the OUT terminals
READY
0 : -
and reading completion may not be synchronized.
0 14 READY This continues to be ON in non-
1 : READY state
"BUSY” status.
Address 2 Bit 8 to Bit 12 Judgment result status for
matching level and code quality
Address 1 Bit 0 to Bit 7 Completion status verification function
1
2

Reading This turns ON when reading is 0 : -
1 0 This Bit turns ON when any of the
Complete complete.*1 1 : Complete*2 0 : Stable
2 8 Unstable following Unstable Bits (9 to 12) is
1 : Unstable
Preset ON.
This turns ON when preset 0 : -
1 1 Reading
reading is complete. 1 : Complete*2 Matching Level 0 : Stable
Complete 2 9 Matching level judgment result
Unstable 1 : Unstable
Preset
ISO/IEC15415 ISO/IEC 15415 verification 0 : Stable
Data This turns ON when preset data 0 : - 2 10
1 2 Unstable judgment result 1 : Unstable
Registration registration is complete. 1 : Complete*2
Complete AIM DPM ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM DPM-1- 0 : Stable
2 11
Unstable 2006) verification judgment result 1 : Unstable
Tuning This turns ON when tuning is 0 : -
1 3
Complete complete. 1 : Complete*2 2 12
SAE AS9132 SAE AS9132 Unstable verification 0 : Stable
Unstable judgment result 1 : Unstable
BLOAD This turns ON when BLOAD is 0 : -
1 4
Complete complete. 1 : Complete*2 2 13
ISO/IEC 15416
ISO/IEC 15416 stability verification
0 : Stable
Unstable 1 : Unstable
This turns ON when "Reading",
External
"Preset reading" or "Tuning" is * Use this status when the code quality verification function of SR-2000 is
Instruction 0 : -
1 7 executed with the IN terminal or
Operation 1 : Complete*2 enabled.
command and the operation is
Complete For the code quality verification function settings, refer to ""9-7 Code Quality
complete.
Verification" (page 58)".
*1 This Bit also turns ON when the character string of "ERROR" is output when
* In the multi head mode of the master/slave function, the matching level and the
reading error occurs.
status of the code quality verification function cannot be used.
*2 This returns to 0 when the applicable clear bit is set to ON or when the Out-
put Assemblies "Reading Start Request" bit is set to ON.
Point Check that "BUSY" is set to OFF before starting processing such as
reading and tuning. When "BUSY" is set to ON, reading and tuning
processing cannot start even if you provide instructions to do so.
In the multi head mode of the master/slave function, the "Reading
Complete" bit remains OFF.
99 GB SR-2000 UM
Address 4 to 7 Total evaluation grade for Address 21 or above Read data
matching level and code quality
verification function Address Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
21
Address Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 22
…
4
5
6
7 Address Bit Name Description Data contents Data type
21 Read Data Size Read data length 0 and above* UINT
Address Bit Name Description Data contents Data type 22 and
Read Data Read Data Read data* BYTE[]
Matching Level above
4 Matching Level * If multiple codes are read, the 0 to 100*1 UINT
minimum value is output. * When the header, terminator and append data are set to the read data of SR-2000,
4 : A*1
the header, terminator, append data and inter-delimiter are also output. [CR] has
3 : B been set to the terminator as the default setting. Accordingly, [CR] is appended
ISO/IEC15415 Total evaluation grade for ISO/IEC after the read data for output.
5 2 : C UINT
Grade 15415 verification
1 : D * If the silent mode is set for SR-2000, read data is not output.
0 : F * The read data is cleared each time that a code is read.
4 : A*1
3 : B
6
AIM DPM Total evaluation grade for ISO/IEC
2 : C UINT
Address 17, 20 Master/slave
Grade TR 29158 (AIM DPM-1-2006)
1 : D
0 : F These are used in the multi head mode of the master/slave function.
4 : A Address Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
3 : B
ISO/IEC 15416 Total evaluation grade for ISO/IEC 17
7 2 : C UINT
grade 15416
1 : D 20
0 : F
Address Bit Name Description Data contents Data type
* Use this status when the code quality verification function of SR-2000 is enabled.
Displays the ID number of the
For the code quality verification function settings, refer to ""9-7 Code Quality 17 Slave ID reader which sent the most recent 0 to 31 UINT
Verification" (page 58)". data.
*1 This returns to 0 when the Output Assemblies "Reading Complete Clear" bit is set Trigger input The trigger input count for the
to ON. 20 0 to 65535* UINT
count for master master unit (ID: 0) is displayed.
Address 8 to 16 Failure cause status * If the count is 65535, it will be reset to 0 when the next read data arrives.
Address Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Details of Control Data (Output Assemblies)
8
9
Address 0 Bit 1 to Bit 7 Handshake/Clear bit
10
11
12
0
15
16
This Bit is used when using
Address Bit Name Description Data contents Data type Read Data 0→1: Writing read data is
handshake.
Reading Error 0 1 Update permitted.
8 UINT This displays whether read data
Permitted 1→0: -
Cause exists or not.
Preset Reading The following Bits of Input
9 UINT
Failure Cause Assemblies are cleared.
Preset Data • Buffer Overflow Error
10 Registration UINT Error Clear • General Error
0→1: Clear
Failure Cause When any of the error statuses 0 7 Transmission • Read Result Ready Count
1→0: -
(Input Assemblies Address 1, Bit 8 Buffer Clear • Result Data Update Count
Tuning • Read data stored in the
11 to Bit 15) turns on, the error code Error code* UINT
Failure Cause transmission buffer of the
is output to the applicable
BLOAD location. SR-2000 Series
12 UINT
Failure Cause
External Instruction Address 0 Bit 8 to Bit 12 Reading start request/Each
15 Operation UINT
Error Cause operation instruction
General Error
16 UINT
Cause
* For error codes, refer to " List of error codes" (page 101). 0
Address 18 to 19 Read data status Address Bit Name Description Data contents
Reading Start The SR-2000 Series starts reading. 0→1: Reading start
0 8 *1
Request 1→0: Reading stop
Preset Reading 0→1: Preset reading start
18 0 9 Preset reading starts.
Start Request 1→0: Preset reading stop
19 Preset Data 0→1: Preset data
Specified preset data is registered
0 10 Registration registration start
to Address 5, 6 and above.*2
Address Bit Name Description Data contents Data type Start Request 1→0: -
Tuning Start 0→1: Tuning start
18
Read Data
Read Data Ready Count 0 to 65535* UINT 0 11 Tuning starts.*3
Ready Count Request 1→0: Tuning stop
0→1: BLOAD start
Read Data 0 12 BLOAD Request BLOAD starts.*4
19 Read Data Update Count 0 to 65535* UINT 1→0: -
Update Count
* When the count number reaches 65535 and the next data arrives, the count *1 When specifying a bank, specify "Address 2 Bank number"
*2 Preset data can be deleted by setting "1" for Address 5, setting "0xFF" for
number returns to 0.
Address 6 and then registering the preset data.
*3 Before starting tuning, specify "Address 2 Bank number".
If the bank number is illegal, a tuning error occurs.
*4 Before starting BLOAD, enter the file number (1 to 8) in "Address 2 Bank
number."
Point Exclusive control of reading Start/each operation instruction

For reading Start/each operation instruction, priority is given to the
operation executed first. An error will occur if another operation is
executed during operation.
GB SR-2000 UM 100
Address 1 Bit 0 to Bit 7 Completion bit clear Operation Examples
Address Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Example 1) Trigger method: Level trigger. Handshaking: Disabled.
1 Input
: PLC←SR-2000
←
Output
→ : PLC→SR-2000
Direction Signal name When reading successful When reading fails
Reading
"Reading Complete" Bit of Input Output
Read Request
1 0 Complete 0→1: Bit clear →
Assemblies is cleared.*
Clear Input
TRG BUSY
←
Preset Reading "Preset Reading Complete" Bit of Barcode/2D code
1 1 0→1: Bit clear
Complete Clear Input Assemblies is cleared.* Read Complete
Input
← Read Complete
Preset Data "Preset Data Registration
1 2 Registration Complete" Bit of Input Assemblies 0→1: Bit clear Output
→ Read Complete Clear
Complete Clear is cleared.* Input
← Reading Error
Tuning "Tuning Complete" Bit of Input
1 3 0→1: Bit clear Input
Complete Clear Assemblies is cleared.* ← Reading Error Cause 0 201
Input
BLOAD "BLOAD Complete" Bit of Input ← OUT1 Status (OK)*1
1 4 0→1: Bit clear
Complete Clear Assemblies is cleared.* Input
← OUT2 Status (ERROR)*1
External Input
"External Instruction Operation ← Read Data Ready Count*2
Instruction m m+1 m m+1
1 7 Complete" Bit of Input Assemblies 0→1: Bit clear
Operation Input
is cleared.* ← Read Data Update Count*2 m m+1 m m+1
Complete Clear Input
← Read Data and Data Size Read data ERROR
* When Complete Bits are cleared, Error/Failure Bits of each operation are also
cleared. z When reading is successful
1 "Read Request" is set to ON (1).
Address 2 Bank number/BLOAD file number 2 When "Read Request" is set to ON (1), the SR-2000 Series starts reading,
and then "TRG BUSY" is set to ON (1).
3 When the code is read, its data is written into "Read data." "TRG BUSY" is
set to OFF (0), and "Read Complete" is set to ON (1).
2 4 "Read Request" is set to OFF (0).
5 It is confirmed that "Read Complete" is ON (1), and then "Read Complete
Address Bit Name Description Data contents Data type Clear" is set to ON (1).
Input a bank number here and 6 When "Read Complete Clear" is set to ON (1), "Read Complete" is set to
then start reading. Then, reading OFF (0).
Parameter 7 It is confirmed that "Read Complete" is OFF (0), and then "Read Complete
is completed with the parameter
bank Clear" is set to OFF (0).
bank specified.
Bank number/ number:
2 BLOAD file
Input a bank number here and
1 to 16* UINT z When reading fails
then start tuning. Then, the tuning
number
result is stored to the specified
BLOAD file 1 "Read Request" is set to ON (1).
parameter bank.
number: 2 When "Read Request" is set to ON (1), the SR-2000 Series starts reading,
1 to 8* and then "TRG BUSY" is set to ON (1).
Input a file number here and then
start BLOAD to switch the settings. 3 "Read Request" is set to OFF (0).
4 The code could not be read, so "ERROR" is written to "Read data." "201" is
* If inputting a parameter bank number other than 1 to 16 to start reading, then the written to "Reading Error Cause." "TRG BUSY" is set to OFF (0), and "Read
alternate reading function operates. Complete" is set to ON (1).
* If inputting a parameter bank number other than 1 to 16 to start tuning, then an 5 It is confirmed that "Read Complete" is ON (1), and then "Read Complete
error occurs. Clear" is set to ON (1).
6 When "Read Complete Clear" is set to ON (1), "Read Complete" and
"Reading Error" are set to OFF (0).
Address 5 and above Preset data 7 It is confirmed that "Read Complete" is OFF (0), and then "Read Complete
Clear" is set to OFF (0).
Example 2) Trigger method: One-shot trigger. Handshaking: Enabled.
5
6
Output
→ Read Request
…
Input
← TRG BUSY
Barcode/2D code The code could not be The code could be read
read during the one-shot during the one-shot
Read Complete trigger duration. trigger duration.
Address Bit Name Description Data contents Data type Input
← Read Complete
5 Preset Data Size Preset data length 0 and above UINT Output
Read Complete Clear
→
6 and Preset data is specified. Input
Reading Error
Preset Data Preset data BYTE[] ←
above (Terminator is not necessary.) Input
← Reading Error Cause 0 201
Input
← OUT1 Status (OK)*1
List of error codes Input

← OUT2 Status (ERROR/NG)*1
Input
← Read Data Ready Count*2 m m+1 m m+1
Error code Type of error Error description Input

Read Data Update Count*2 m m+1 m m+1
←
0 No error - Input
Read Data and Data Size Read data ERROR
←
Values with 100 added to the "Error codes" (page 76) are
100 to 199 Command error
applicable. z When reading is successful
201 Reading error Reading failed.
2 When "Read Request" is set to ON (1), the SR-2000 Series starts reading,
202 Comparison error The read data did not match the preset data. and then "TRG BUSY" is set to ON (1).
The code could not be found within the field of view while 3 When the code is read, its data is written into "Read data." "TRG BUSY" is
210 Tuning failure
tuning. set to OFF (0), and "Read Complete" is set to ON (1).
213 Tuning failure Tuning was aborted. 4 "Read Request" is set to OFF (0).
Another operation instruction was received during Clear" is set to ON (1).
Operation
120 operation. In this case, the incoming instruction is not 6 When "Read Complete Clear" is set to ON (1), "Read Complete" is set to
instruction error
completed.
OFF (0).
Bank number
The parameter bank number specification is invalid. 7 It is confirmed that "Read Complete" is OFF (0), and then "Read Complete
102 Example: A number other than 01 to 16 is specified in Clear" is set to OFF (0).
error
tuning operation.
The preset data specification is invalid.
220 Preset data error Example: The specified preset data size is invalid when
preset data is registered.
EIP data update Read data larger than the specified size in the cyclic 3 When the "One-shot trigger duration" elapses, reading stops.
230
error communication was received. 4 The code could not be read, so "ERROR" is written to "Read data." "201" is
written to "Reading Error Cause." "TRG BUSY" is set to OFF (0), and "Read
Complete" is set to ON (1).
Clear" is set to ON (1).
6 When "Read Complete Clear" is set to ON (1), "Read Complete" and
"Reading Error" are set to OFF (0).
7 It is confirmed that "Read Complete" is OFF (0), and then "Read Complete
101 GB SR-2000 UM
Example 3) Trigger method: Level trigger. Handshaking: Enabled. Example 5) Reading with the IN terminal. IN1: Trigger input. Trigger method:
Level trigger. Handshaking: Disabled.
Direction Signal name When reading successful When reading failed
Output
→ Read Request Direction Signal name When reading successful When reading failed
Input IN1
← TRG BUSY
Barcode/2D code Input
← TRG BUSY
Read Complete
Input Barcode/2D code
← Read Complete Read Complete
Output Input External Instruction
→ Read Complete Clear ← Operation Complete
Input Output External Instruction
← Reading Error → Operation Complete Clear
Input Input External Instruction
← Reading Error Cause 0 201 ← Operation Failure
Input Input External Instruction
Read Data Update Available ← Operation Error Cause 0 201
←
Output Input Read Data and Data Size
Read Data Update Permitted ← Read data ERROR
→
Input Read Data Update Complete
←
Input OUT1 Status (OK)*1
←
Input OUT2 Status (ERROR NG)*1
1 The signal of the IN terminal is set to ON.
←
Input
2 When the signal of the IN terminal is set to ON, the SR-2000 Series starts
Read Data Ready Count*2
← m m+1 m m+1
reading, and then "TRG BUSY" is set to ON (1).
Input
←
Read Data Update Count*2 m m+1 m m+1 3 When the code is read, the data is written to "Read data." Then "TRG BUSY"
Input Read Data and Data Size Read data ERROR
is set to OFF (0), and "External Instruction Operation Complete" is set to
←
ON (1).
z When reading is successful 4 The signal of the IN terminal is set to OFF.
5 It is confirmed that "External Instruction Operation Complete" is ON (1),
1 "Read Request" is set to ON (1). and then "External Instruction Operation Complete Clear" is set to ON (1).
2 When "Read Request" is set to ON (1), the SR-2000 Series starts reading, 6 When "External Instruction Operation Complete Clear" is set to ON (1),
and then "TRG BUSY" is set to ON (1). "External Instruction Operation Complete" is set to OFF (0).
3 When the code is read, "TRG BUSY" is set to OFF (0), and "Read Complete" 7 It is confirmed that "External Instruction Operation Complete" is OFF (0),
and "Read Data Update Available" are set to ON (1). and then "External Instruction Operation Complete Clear" is set to OFF (0).
4 "Read Request" is set to OFF (0).
5 It is confirmed that "Read Complete" is ON (1), and then "Read Complete z When reading fails
Clear" is set to ON (1). 1 The signal of the IN terminal is set to ON.
6 When "Read Complete Clear" is set to ON (1), "Read Complete" is set to 2 When the signal of the IN terminal is set to ON, the SR-2000 Series starts
OFF (0). reading, and then "TRG BUSY" is set to ON (1).
7 It is confirmed that "Read Complete" is OFF (0), and then "Read Complete 3 The signal of the IN terminal is set to OFF (0).
Clear" is set to OFF (0). 4 The code could not be read, so "ERROR" is written to "Read data." "201" is
8 It is confirmed that "Read Data Update Available" is ON (1), and then written to "External Instruction Operation Error Cause" Then "TRG BUSY" is
"Read Data Update Permitted" is set to ON (1). set to OFF (0), and "External Instruction Operation Complete” is set to ON
9 When "Read Data Update Permitted" is set to ON (1), the data is written (1).
into "Read data." "Read Data Update Complete" is set to ON (1). 5 It is confirmed that "External Instruction Operation Complete" is ON (1),
10 It is confirmed that "Read Data Update Complete" is ON (1), and then and then "External Instruction Operation Complete Clear" is set to ON (1).
"Read Data Update Permitted" is set to OFF (0). 6 When "External Instruction Operation Complete Clear" is set to ON (1),
11 When "Read Data Update Permitted" is set to OFF (0), "Read Data Update "External Instruction Operation Complete" and "External Instruction
Available" and "Read Data Update Complete" are set to OFF (0). Operation Failure" are set to OFF (0).
z When reading fails 7 It is confirmed that "External Instruction Operation Complete" is OFF (0),
and then "External Instruction Operation Complete Clear" is set to OFF (0).
and then "TRG BUSY" is set to ON (1). Point • The signal directions are indicated as shown below.
3 "Read Request" is set to OFF (0). Input
4 When the code cannot be read, "ERROR" is written to the send buffer, so ← : PLC ← SR-2000
"Read Complete" and "Read Data Update Available" are set to ON (1). Output
: PLC → SR-2000
"201" is written to "Reading Error Cause." "TRG BUSY" is set to OFF (0). →
5 It is confirmed that "Read Complete" is ON (1), and then "Read Complete • The OUT1 and OUT2 operations are described using the factory
Clear" is set to ON (1). default configurations of the SR-2000 Series operation settings and
6 When "Read Complete Clear" is set to ON (1), "Read Complete" is set to multi I/O settings.
OFF (0). • The "Read Data Ready Count" and "Read Data Update Count" values
7 It is confirmed that "Read Complete" is OFF (0), and then "Read Complete may differ depending on the operation status and communication
Clear" is set to OFF (0). frequency.
8 It is confirmed that "Read Data Update Available" is ON (1), and then For example, when a code is read and then the reading of the next
code finishes before the updating of the PLC data finishes, the result
"Read Data Update Permitted" is set to ON (1).
data ready count will be larger than the expected value by one.
9 When "Read Data Update Permitted" is set to ON (1), "ERROR" is written
into "Read data." "Read Data Update Complete" is set to ON (1).
10 It is confirmed that "Read Data Update Complete" is ON (1), and then
"Read Data Update Permitted" is set to OFF (0). • If "Read Request" is set to ON/OFF at high speed while the EtherNet/IP
11 When "Read Data Update Permitted" is set to OFF (0), "Read Data Update cyclic cycle (RPI) is slow, the SR-2000 Series may not be able to detect the
change between the rising and falling edge of "Read Request."
Available" and "Read Data Update Complete" are set to OFF (0).
• The SR-2000 Series is equipped with a 10 KB send buffer.
• Because a send buffer is present, even if the data processing on the PLC is
Example 4) Using the Changeover Function unfinished during handshake processing, the next reading operation can
be completed.
Direction Signal name • When read data is still present in the SR-2000 Series during handshake
Output Bank/ 1-8 0 NOTICE processing, even if "Read Data Update Permitted" of the PLC is OFF (0),
→ BLOAD file number
Output BLOAD Request
"Read Data Update Available" of the SR-2000 Series remains in the ON (1)
→
state.
Input BLOAD Complete
← Until "Read Data Update Available" is set to OFF (0), repeatedly switch
Output BLOAD Complete Clear "Read Data Update Permitted" of the PLC between ON (1) and OFF (0).
→
Input
• If the data stored on the SR-2000 Series is unnecessary during handshake
READY
← processing, you can delete all the data from the send buffer by sending the
Output
→
Read request send buffer clear command (BCLR) from the command port.
1 The file number is added to "Bank/BLOAD File Number".

2 "BLOAD Request" is turned on (1), which changes the file number setting
and turns on "BLOAD Complete".
3 It is confirmed that "BLOAD Complete" is on (1), and then "BLOAD
Complete Clear" is turned on (1).
4 "BLOAD Complete Clear" is turned on (1), which turns off (0) "BLOAD
Complete".
5 It is confirmed that "BLOAD Complete" is off (0), and then "BLOAD
Request" is turned off (0).
6 "Bank/BLOAD File Number" is set to 0.
7 It is confirmed that "READY" is on (1), and then "Read Request" is turned on
(1).
GB SR-2000 UM 102
14-3 Message Communication SR-2000 Series Settings

Message Communication 2 Enter the [IP address] and [Subnet Mask] settings to assign to the SR-2000.
Message communication is a function that uses objects and services (Service

Code) prepared in the EtherNet/IP device and then issues and transmits
commands arbitrarily. Message communication is used for applications such as
reading and writing adaptor device settings.
There are established standard items, as well as device specific items in the
objects and services in message communication.
The SR-2000 Series uses specific objects and services and can perform
operations such as parameter reading/writing and resetting.
Reference The SR-2000 Series message communication function is compatible

with UCMM (unconnected type) and CLASS 3 (connected type).
Objects and services
In message communication, data are sent and received using objects and
services. 5 STEP 2 Select [Field network/PLC].
When services for SR-2000 Series objects are executed, data output, settings
reading, and specified operations are executed.
6 STEP 3 Select [EtherNet/IP].
7 STEP 4 Configure the detailed EtherNet/IP settings.

Message communication basic format
During message communication, the PLC and the SR-2000 Series communicate
by sending and receiving Explicit messages. When an Explicit message
command is sent from the PLC, the SR-2000 Series sends a response to the PLC.
z Commands
Item Description
Service code Specifies the Service.
Data handshake Set whether to implement handshake processing.
Class ID Specifies the Class ID according to service.
Set this to a value that is the maximum amount of read data +
Instance ID Specifies the Instance ID according to service. Input assembly data size
44 bytes or higher. *1
Attribute ID Specifies the Attribute ID according to service.
Output assembly data size Specify a value of 6 bytes or higher. *1
Service data Specifies the Service Data according to service.
You can change the order in which data is stored in memory.
z Responses Byte swapping Disable: Low order to high order
Enable: High order to low order
Item Description
*1 Increase the value according to the number of digits in the read data or pre-
General status Returns the General Status in response to the command. set data.
(1 byte) Returns 00H when operation is successful.
Additional status 8 Exit the [Setup Wizard].
Returns Additional Status.
(2 bytes)
Service response Returns the result data in response to the command.
Message communication operation Service Objects

Object configuration
Send the command.
Class ID Object name Description
105 SR AutoID Reader Object which delivers the SR-2000 Series status and
Send the response. (0x69) Object* parameter writing/reading.
1 Object which delivers general information, main unit
Identity Object
(0x01) reset, etc.
Commands are sent from the PLC to execute services on the SR-2000 Series. The * The [SR AutoID Reader Object] is not an object within EtherNet/IP standards but
SR-2000 Series sends back responses as service execution results. The service rather it is an object that KEYENCE developed to make the SR-2000 Series
code, class ID, instance ID, and attribute ID are specified in the commands that easier to operate.
are sent. The setting value (service data) is necessary when writing parameters.
Reading the object table
Command Response
Service code General status z Attribute
Class ID Additional status
Instance ID Service response data (1) (2) (3) (4)
Attribute ID
Response parameter
Service data Instance Attribute
Name Data
ID ID Description
* The attribute ID and service data may not be necessary depending on the Type
command used. bit0: IN1 Status
Service response data may not be generated depending on the command used. bit1: IN2 Status
1 108 IN/OUT
UINT bit4: OUT1 Status
(0x01) (0x6C) Status
bit5: OUT2 Status
bit6: OUT3 Status
Item Description
(1) Instance ID The instance ID is shown in decimal (hexadecimal).
(2) Attribute ID The attribute ID is shown in decimal (hexadecimal).
(3) Name Denotes the attribute name.
(4) Response Displays the receiving parameter's data type and each parameters
parameter description.
103 GB SR-2000 UM
z Service Object details
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
SR AutoID Reader Object Class ID: 105 (0x69)
Service data
Instance Service
Name Description
ID code Data
Data z Attributes
type
1 Bank Read Instance Attribute Response parameter
0x4B UINT Starts reading. Name
(0x01) Number Start ID ID Data Description
bit0 : Error
Item Description bit1 : Result Data Available
(1) Instance ID The instance ID is shown in decimal (hexadecimal). bit2 : Result Data Strobe
bit3 to 5 : Reserved
(2) Service code The service code is shown in decimal (hexadecimal).
bit6 : Buffer Overflow Error
(3) Service data Displays the type of the service data and service data description. bit7 : General Error
(4) Name Displays the service name. bit8 : BUSY
UINT
(5) Description Displays the service function description. bit9 : TRG BUSY
bit10 : LOCK BUSY
bit11 : MODE BUSY
z Data type bit12 : ERR BUSY
The data types are defined as follows. 100 bit13 : Reserved
Read Status
(0x64) bit14 : READY
Range
Data type Description bit15 : Reserved
Min. Max.
bit0 : Read Complete
BOOL Boolean 0: FALSE 1: TRUE UINT
bit1 : Read Failure
SINT Short integer -128 127 bit0 : Unstable
INT Integer -32768 32767 bit1 : Matching Level Unstable
DINT Double precision integer -231 231-1 bit2 : ISO/IEC 15415 Unstable
UINT
bit3 : AIM DPM Unstable
LINT Long integer -263 263-1
bit4 : SAE AS9132 Unstable
USINT Unsigned short integer 0 255 bit5 : ISO/IEC 15416 Unstable
UINT Unsigned integer 0 65535 UINT Read Result Code
UDINT Unsigned double precision integer 0 232-1 bit0 : Error
ULINT Unsigned long integer 0 264-1 bit1 : Result Data Available
String String (1 byte/character) - - bit2 : Result Data Strobe
SSTRING String (1 byte/character) - -
BYTE Bit sequence: 8-bit - - bit7 : General Error
WORD Bit sequence: 16-bit - - bit8 : BUSY
UINT
DWORD Bit sequence: 32-bit - - bit9 : TRG BUSY
bit10 : LOCK BUSY
LWORD Bit sequence: 64-bit - - 101 bit11 : MODE BUSY
Preset Status
(0x65) bit12 : ERR BUSY
bit13 : Reserved
bit14 : READY
bit15 : Reserved
bit0 : Preset Complete
UINT bit1 : Preset Failure
1
UINT Reserved
(0x01)
UINT Preset Result Code
bit0 : Error
bit1 : Result Data Available
bit2 : Result Data Strobe
bit7 : General Error
bit8 : BUSY
UINT
bit9 : TRG BUSY
bit10 : LOCK BUSY
102 Register Preset bit11 : MODE BUSY
(0x66) Data Status bit12 : ERR BUSY
bit13 : Reserved
bit14 : READY
bit15 : Reserved
bit0 : Register Preset Data Complete
UINT bit1 : Register Preset Data Failure
UINT Reserved
UINT Register Preset Data Result Code
bit0 : Error
bit2 : Result Data Strobe
bit7 : General Error
bit8 : BUSY
UINT
bit9 : TRG BUSY
bit10 : LOCK BUSY
103 bit11 : MODE BUSY
Tune Status
(0x67) bit12 : ERR BUSY
bit13 : Reserved
bit14 : READY
bit15 : Reserved
bit0 : Tune Complete
UINT bit1 : Tune Failure
UINT Reserved
UINT Tune Result Code
GB SR-2000 UM 104
Instance Attribute Response parameter z Service
Name
ID ID Data Description
Instance Service Service data
bit0 : Error Name Description
ID code Data type: Data
14 Get_Attribute_
bit2 : Result Data Strobe - Obtains the attribute's one item.
(0x0E) Single
bit6 : Buffer Overflow Error 16 Set_Attribute_
- Obtains the attribute's one item.
bit7 : General Error (0x10) Single
bit8 : BUSY 75 UINT: Bank
UINT Read Start Starts reading.
bit9 : TRG BUSY (0x4B) Number
bit10 : LOCK BUSY 76
bit11 : MODE BUSY - Read Stop Stops reading.
(0x4C)
bit12 : ERR BUSY
77
bit13 : Reserved - Preset Start Starts preset data reading.
107 EXT. Request (0x4D)
bit14 : READY
(0x6B) Status
bit15 : Reserved 78
- Preset Stop Stops preset data reading.
(0x4E)
bit0 : EXT. Request Complete
UINT bit1 : EXT. Request Failure UINT: Preset
Registers preset data.
bit2 to 15 : Reserved 79 Data Size Register
Preset data can be deleted when Size is
(0x4F) BYTE[]: Preset Data
bit0 : Unstable (1) and Data is (0xFF).
Preset Data
bit1 : Matching Level Unstable
bit2 : ISO/IEC 15415 Unstable 80 UINT: Bank
UINT Tune Start Starts tuning.
bit3 : AIM DPM Unstable (0x50) Number
bit4 : SAE AS9132 Unstable 81
- Tune Stop Stops tuning.
bit5 : ISO/IEC 15416 Unstable (0x51)
UINT EXT. Request Result Code 83
- Error Clear Clears the error.
bit0 : IN1 Status (0x53)
bit1 : IN2 Status EXT. Request
84 Clears the operation status from the
bit2 to 3 : Reserved - Complete
108 (0x54) external command.
1 IN/OUT Status UINT bit4 : OUT1 Status Clear
(0x6C)
(0x01) bit5 : OUT2 Status
1 Acquires read data.
bit6 : OUT3 Status
(0x01) UINT: Result
bit7 to 15 : Reserved 85 Get Result Response data
Data Size
UINT Read (Comparison) OK Count (0x55) Data UINT : Result Data Size
UINT: Offset
UINT Comparison NG Count UINT : Rest Result Data Size
BYTE[] : Result Data
109 UINT Read Error Count
Statistics Clears the following information:
(0x6D) UINT Stable Reading Count
• Result Data Ready Count
UINT Read Input Count 86 Sequence • Result Data Update Count
-
UINT Reserved (0x56) Reset • Main unit statistical information
• Buffering data
110 UINT Result Data Ready Count • Sequence bit
Result Data Count
(0x6E) UINT Result Data Update Count 87
- Lock Sets the operation lock command.
111 (0x57)
General Error Code UINT General Error Code
(0x6F) 88
- Unlock Sets the operation unlock command.
112 Read (Comparison) (0x58)
UINT Read (Comparison) OK Count
(0x70) OK Count Read
90 Clears the Read Complete and Read
113 Comparison NG - Complete
UINT Comparison NG Count (0x5A) Failure bits.
(0x71) Count Clear
114 Preset
Read Error Count UINT Read Error Count 91 Clears the Preset Complete and Preset
(0x72) - Complete
(0x5B) Failure bits.
116 Clear
Read Input Count UINT Read Input Count
(0x74) Register
Clears the Register Preset Data
128 Result Data Ready 92 Preset Data
UINT Result Data Ready Count - Complete and Register Preset Data
(0x80) Count (0x5C) Complete
Failure bits.
129 Result Data Update Clear
UINT Result Data Update Count
(0x81) Count Tune
93 Clears the Tune Complete and Tune
- Complete
(0x5D) Failure bits.
Clear
Instance Service Attribute Response parameter
Name
ID code ID Data Description
bit0 : Matching Level
Inspect Valid
Identity Object Class ID: 1 (0x01)
Get_ bit1 : ISO/IEC 15415
Attribute_ Inspect Valid
144 Unstable Inspect z Service
Single UINT bit2 : AIM DPM
(0x90) Configuration
14 Inspect Valid Service data
(0x0E) bit3 : SAE AS9132 Instance Service
Name Description
ID code Data (Data type)
Inspect Valid
bit4 to 7 : Reserve 5
1 - Reset Executes hardware reset.
145 Matching Level (0x05)
Set_ UINT 99 to 00
(0x91) Threshold
1 Attribute_
146 ISO/IEC 15415 0: Disabled
(0x01) Single UINT
(0x92) Threshold 1(D) to A(4)
16
(0x10) 147 AIM DPM 0: Disabled
UINT
(0x93) Threshold 1(D) to A(4)
152
Matching Level UINT 100 to 00
(0x98)
Get_ 153 ISO/IEC 15415
Attribute_ UINT 4(A) to 0(F)
(0x99) Grade
Single
154
14 AIM DPM Grade UINT 4(A) to 0(F)
(0x9A)
(0x0E)
155 ISO/IEC 15416
UINT 4(A) to 0(F)
(0x9B) Grade
105 GB SR-2000 UM
Operation Examples 14-4 Reference Programs
(1) Start reading (Read Start)
• Command • Response
Class ID 105 (0x69) General response - For the KV Series
Instance ID 1 Additional status -
Cyclic communication
Service code 75 (0x4B) Service data -
Attribute ID z Without handshaking
UINT: Bank number
Service data
(O) : Output Assemblies
(2) Stop reading (Read Stop) (I) : Input Assemblies
• Command • Response REQ

(O) Read Request
Row 1
Class ID 105 (0x69) General response -
Instance ID 1 Additional status - BMOV
(I) Read Complete
Service code 76 (0x4C) Service data - Row 2 ↑
W12 DM1000 #100
Result Data
Attribute ID
-
Service data
(3) Preset reading start (Preset Start)
(I) Read Complete
• Command • Response (O) Read Complete Clear
Row 3
Service code 77 (0x4D) Service data - Row 1 : This starts Read Request and starts reading.
Attribute ID Row 2 : When Result Complete is ON, the data written to Result Data are cop-
-
Service data ied to DM1000.
(4) Preset reading stop (Preset Stop) Row 3 : When Read Complete is ON, Read Complete Clear turns ON.
Class ID 105 (0x69) General response - z With handshaking
Instance ID 1 Additional status - (O) : Output Assemblies
Service code 78 (0x4E) Service data - (I) : Input Assemblies
Attribute ID REQ (I) Read Request

-
Service data Row 1
(5) Preset data registration

• Command • Response (I) Read Data Update Available (I) Read Data Update Complete (O) Read Data Update Permitted
Class ID 105 (0x69) General response - Row 2

Service code 79 (0x4F) Service data - (O) Read Data Update Permitted
Attribute ID -
UINT: Data size
Service data
BYTE[494]: Data (I) Read Data Update Complete BMOV
W12 DM1000 #100
(6) Tuning instructions Row 3 ↑
Class ID 105 (0x69) General response - (I) Read Complete
(O) Read Complete Clear
Instance ID 1 Additional status - Row 4
Service code 80 (0x50) Service data -
Attribute ID -
Service data UINT: Bank number Row 1: When the trigger (REQ) signal turns ON, Read Request turns ON.
(7) Tuning stop Row 2: When Read Data Update Available turns ON and Read Data Update
• Command • Response Complete turns OFF, Read Data Update Permitted turns ON.
Class ID 105 (0x69) General response - Read Data Update Permitted is self-retained.
Instance ID 1 Additional status - * Read Data Update Available turns ON when read data is buffered in
Service code 81 (0x51) Service data -
the SR-2000.
Row 3: When Read Data Reception Complete turns ON, the data for the spec-
Attribute ID -
ified bytes are transferred from the read data to DM1000.
Service data -
* Read Data Update Complete turns ON when the writing of read data
(8) Get result data from the SR-2000 to the PLC is complete.
• Command • Response Row 4 : When Read Complete turns ON, Read Complete Clear turns ON.
Service code 85 (0x55)
UINT: Result Data
Attribute ID - Size
UINT: Data size Service data UINT: Rest Result
Service data
UINT: Offset Data Size
BYTE[]:Result Data
(9) Get attribute (Get Attribute Single)

Service code 14 (0x0E)
Service data Attribute parameters
Attribute ID Attribute ID
Service data -
GB SR-2000 UM 106
Message communication Control Logix/Compact Logix (RSLogix 5000)
• Error clear operation
R30700
REQ
Message communication
start request
z Without handshaking
' Data are stored using the box script.
↑ (O) : Output Assemblies
' Data can also be stored with the MOV command.
(I) : Input Assemblies
DM0 = 192 ' IP address the first byte (arbitrary)

DM1 = 168 ' IP address the second byte (arbitrary) REQ
DM2 = 100 ' IP address the third byte (arbitrary) (O) Read Request
Rung1 ( )
DM3 = 100 ' IP address the fourth byte (arbitrary)
DM4 = 83 ' service cord (0x53)
DM5 = 105 ' class ID (0x69) (I) Read Complete
DM6 = 1 ' instance ID (0x01) Source (I)Result Data[0]
DM7 = 0 ' attribute ID (0x00) Rung2 ONS Dest READ_DATA[0]
DM100 = 0 ' Sent data in message communication Length (I)Result Data Size
R30700 R31700 (O) Read Complete

Message communication Message communication (O) Read Complete Clear
REQ start request complete Rung3 ( )
U_MSGTO KV-5500
↑ Message
Unit No. communication
#0 DM0 Rung1 : This starts Read Request and starts reading.
R30700
U_MSGSND KV-5500
Rung2 : With the rising of Result Complete, the data written to Result Data are
Message copied to READ_DATA.
Rung3 : When Read Complete is ON, Read Complete Clear turns ON.
#0 DM100
R30700
start request
z With handshaking
(O) : Output Assemblies
(I) : Input Assemblies
The errors on the SR-2000 Series are cleared. The following items are cleared. REQ
(O) Read Request
• Buffer overflow Rung1 ( )
• General errors
• Result Data Available (I) Read Data Update Available (I) Read Data Update Complete
(O) Read Data Update Permitted
• Read data Rung2 / ( )
(O) Read Data Update Permitted

• Software reset operation
R30700 (I) Read Data Update Complete
start request Source (I) Read Data [0]
REQ Rung3 ONS
Dest READ_DATA[0]
' Data are stored using the box script.
↑ Length (I) Read Data Size
' Data can also be stored with the MOV command.
(I) Read Complete

DM0 = 192 ' IP address the first byte (arbitrary) (O) Read Complete Clear
DM1 = 168 ' IP address the second byte (arbitrary) Rung4 ( )
DM2 = 100 ' IP address the third byte (arbitrary)
DM3 = 100 ' IP address the fourth byte (arbitrary)
DM4 = 5 ' service cord (0x05)
DM5 = 1 ' class ID (0x01)
DM6 = 1 ' instance ID (0x01)
DM7 = 0 ' attribute ID (0x00)
DM100 = 0 ' Sent data in message communication Rung 1: When the trigger (REQ) signal turns ON, Read Request turns ON.
R30700 R31700
Message communication Message communication
Rung 2: When Read Data Update Available turns ON and Read Data Update
REQ start request complete
U_MSGTO KV-5500 Complete turns OFF, Read Data Update Permitted turns ON.
↑ Message Read Data Update Permitted is self-retained.
* Read Data Update Available turns ON when read data is buffered in
#0 DM0
R30700
the SR-2000.
U_MSGSND KV-5500
Rung3: When Read Data Update Complete turns ON, the read data is trans-
Message
Unit No. communication ferred to READ_DATA.
#0 DM100 * Read Data Update Complete turns ON when the writing of read data
R30700 from the SR-2000 to the PLC is complete.
start request Rung 4: When Read Complete turns ON, Read Complete Clear turns ON.
Description of tags used in the sample

Name Data type Description
The SR-2000 Series restarts.
REQ BOOL Bit to order to start/stop reading
READ_DATA SINT[256] Memory to store read data
107 GB SR-2000 UM
• Error clear operation
For the Micro Logix (RSLogix 500)
MSG
Message communication Communication Command
Size in byte(Receive)
CIP Generic
0
ONS ( EN )
Data Table Address(Receive) -
Size in byte(Send) 0
MSG ( DN )
B9:0/0 N25:1/0 N25:1/1 Data Table Address(Send) -
Communication Command CIP Generic Service Custom
Size in byte(Receive) 0
Rung1 ONS / / ( EN ) Service Code 53(Hex) ( ER )
Class 69(Hex)
Data Table Address(Send) N11 ( DN ) Instance 1
Service Custom Attribute 0
Service Code 4b(Hex) ( ER )
Class 69(Hex)
Instance 1
Attribute 0 The errors on the SR-2000 Series are cleared. The following items are cleared.
• Buffer overflow
MSG(MG22)
T10:1/DN Communication Command CIP Generic • General errors
Rung2 ONS Data Table Address(Receive) N25 ( EN ) • Result Data Available
Size in byte(Send)
Data Table Address(Send)
0
- ( DN )
• Read data
Service Get Attribute
Single Service Code ( ER )
E(Hex) • Software reset operation
Class 69(Hex)
Instance 1
MSG
Attribute 64
Communication Command CIP Generic
Timer Size in byte(Receive) 0
( U ) ONS ( EN )
MSG(MG23) Data Table Address(Send) - ( DN )
N25:1/0 Communication Command CIP Generic Service Custom
Size in byte(Receive) 100 Service Code 5(Hex)
Rung3 ONS ( EN ) ( ER )
Data Table Address(Receive) N27 Class 1(Hex)
Size in byte(Send) 4 Instance 1
N25:1/1 Data Table Address(Send) N26 ( DN )
Attribute 0
Service Custom
Service Code 55(Hex) ( ER )
Class 69(Hex)
Instance 1
Attribute 0
The SR-2000 Series restarts.
MSG(MG20)
MG23:0/DN Communication Command CIP Generic
Rung4 ONS Data Table Address(Receive) - ( EN )
Data Table Address(Send) - ( DN )
Service Custom
Service Code 5A(Hex) ( ER )
Class 69(Hex)
Instance 1
Attribute 0
MSG (MG24)
B9:0/1 Communication Command CIP Generic
Rung5 ONS Data Table Address(Receive) - ( EN )
Data Table Address(Send) - ( DN )
Service Custom
Service Code 4C(Hex) ( ER )
Class 69(Hex)
Instance 1
Attribute 0
TON
Rung6 Timer T10:1

Time Base 0.01
Preset 100 ( DN )
Description of the reference program

Rung1 : When Read Complete and Read Failure are OFF, the read start mes-
sage is sent at the rising of B9:0:0.
Rung2 : For each timeout of the timer, Get Attribute Single is performed for
Read Status.
The result is written to Read Status Res.
Rung3 : At the rising of either Result Status Res[1].0(Read Complete) or 1(Read
Failure), Get Result Data is performed.
The result is written to Read Data Res.
Rung4 : Read Complete Clear is performed.
Rung5 : This starts B9:0/1 and sends the read end message.
Rung6 : The timer is being performed to perform Rung2.
Description of tags used in the sample

Name Data type Description
B9:0/0 Binary Bit to order to start/stop reading
T10 Timer Timer
N11 Integer Memory that stores Bank No.
MG20 Message to perform Read Complete Clear
MG21 Message to perform Read Start
Message to perform Get Attribute Single for Read
MG22 Message
Status
MG23 Message to perform Get Result Data
MG24 Message to perform Read Stop
Memory that stores Get Attribute Single result of
N25 Integer
MG22
N26 Integer Message command to receive the result data
N27 Integer Memory that stores Get Result Data result of MG23
RIX30 Extended Routing Information for MG20
RIX31 Extended Extended Routing Information for MG21
RIX32 Routing Extended Routing Information for MG22
RIX33 Information Extended Routing Information for MG23
RIX34 Extended Routing Information for MG24
GB SR-2000 UM 108
15-1 PROFINET Overview SR-2000 Series Settings

What Is PROFINET? 2 Enter the [IP address] and [Subnet Mask] settings to assign to the
SR-2000.
PROFINET is the open communication standard specified by PI (PROFIBUS &
PROFINET International). PROFINET compatible devices can communicate with
each other regardless of vendor. The SR-2000 Series is compliant with
Conformance Class A.
List of Supported PLCs

Siemens PLCs
PLC series Software Version
S7-300/400 STEP 7 V5.5.0.0 and later versions
S7-1200/1500 STEP 7 Professional Version V13
SR-2000 Series PROFINET Communication Specifications 4 STEP 1 Select the trigger input method.
Communication type PROFINET IO 5 STEP 2 Select [Field network/PLC].

Communication cycle 8 ms or more
GSDML file version 2.32
6 STEP 3 Select [PROFINET].
7 STEP 4 Configure the detailed PROFINET settings.

Usable Functions
Function Description
Controls timing input ON/OFF.
Timing input control
Timing input with the parameter bank specified is possible.
Read OK data can be set as preset data.
Preset data control
Also, preset data can be registered or deleted from PLC.
Tuning Tuning can be executed by specifying the parameter bank.
Data handshake Whether to write read data to PLC can be controlled. Data handshake Set whether to implement handshake processing.
Errors that occurred on the main unit can be checked. Device name Set the device name used with PROFINET.
Error handling After eliminating error factors, the SR-2000 Series can be
restored from the error state. 8 Exit the [Setup Wizard].
Statistical information
acquisition
Read count and read data update count can be checked.
Read data can be acquired, and I/O status or marking
Operation status acquisition
verification result can be checked.
PROFINET device name rules
15-2 Cyclic Communication • You cannot use the same device name for multiple devices on the same network.
• Device name length is from 1 to 240 characters.
• Only [a to z] (lowercase alphabet characters) [0 to 9] (numbers), [-] (hyphen), and
[.] (period) can be used for device names.
• You cannot use device names in IP address format. (n.n.n.n, n = 0 to 999)
Cyclic communication is a high-speed communication method in which data is sent • The length of one label is from 1 to 63 characters.
and received periodically at intervals ranging from milliseconds to tens of • The [-] (hyphen) cannot be used at the beginning of labels.
milliseconds. Also, you can control the SR-2000 Series by referencing and updating
• The [-] (hyphen) cannot be used at the end of labels.
variables and devices within the PLC. This makes it easy to write PLC-side
programs. • The first label cannot be named "port-xyz" or "port-xyz-abcde."
When communicating cyclically via PROFINET with the SR-2000 Series, SR-2000 (a, b, c, d, e, x, y, z = [0 to 9] (numbers)).
series functions are assigned to the PLC devices. • You cannot use labels that start with "xn-."
• You cannot use labels that start with a number.
SIMATIC
S7-300
PLC Settings
S7 Series Settings
SR information area SR information area
Reading result Reading result We have prepared information regarding connecting the S7 Series and the SR Series.
Handshake information Handshake information
Device status Device status
Busy/error information Busy/error information
Statistical information Statistical information

Communication cycle
Set with PLC
PLC instruction area PLC instruction area
Reading instruction Reading instruction
Handshake instruction Handshake instruction
Tuning Tuning
Important • Communication settings such as the communication cycle and data

size are set in the PLC. When there is a large load in the network
which connects many devices including PROFINET devices, delays or
packet loss may occur. Perform thorough verification before
operation.
• The maximum read length is 246 digits.
109 GB SR-2000 UM
Module Bit
Memory Maps Slot Size
name address
Name Description Data contents Remarks
Input terminal 1 0 : OFF
0 IN1 Status
I address input address PLC ← SR-2000 status 1 : ON
Input terminal 2 0 : OFF
1 IN2 Status
status 1 : ON
When checking the
z Bit area Output terminal 1 0 : OFF writing of read data,
4 OUT1 Status do not use OUT1 to 3
status 1 : ON
In the following areas, information is divided by bit. statuses, but use the
Terminal "Read Complete" bit
Information is represented with 0 or 1. 5 1 byte
Status Bits or "EXT. Request
Module Bit Output terminal 2 0 : OFF Complete" bit.
Slot Size Name Description Data contents Remarks 5 OUT2 Status
name address status 1 : ON Depending on the
communication load,
0 : No error the ON statuses of
0 Error Error status indication
1 : Error the OUT terminals
Read data Output terminal 3 0 : OFF and reading
0 : No read data Only when data 6 OUT3 Status
Result Data Transmission buffer status 1 : ON completion may not
1 1 : Read data handshake is
Available retention status be synchronized.
available enabled*1
indication Unstable reading
0→1: Read data 0 : Stable
Handshake Read data 0 Unstable status
update 1 : Unstable
and General 2 Result Data Strobe PLC update OR of each Unstable
1 1 byte complete Matching level
Error Status complete flag Matching Level 0 : Stable
1→0: - 1 judgment result
Bits Unstable 1 : Unstable
Buffer overflow error unstable
Buffer Overflow 0 : No error
6 Cleared by Error ISO/IEC 15415
Error 1 : Error ISO/IEC 15415 0 : Stable
Clear Bit 2 verification result
SR operation failure Unstable Unstable 1 : Unstable
unstable
error 0 : No error 6 1 byte Read Status
7 General Error Bits ISO/IEC TR 29158
Cleared by Error Clear 1 : Error AIM DPM (AIM DPM) 0 : Stable
Bit 3
Unstable verification result 1 : Unstable
OR of each BUSY 0 : No BUSY status unstable
0 BUSY
signal 1 : BUSY status SAE AS9132
0 : No TRG BUSY SAE AS9132 0 : Stable
Main unit in TRG 4 verification result
1 TRG BUSY status Unstable 1 : Unstable
BUSY status unstable
1 : TRG BUSY status ISO/IEC 15416 ISO/IEC 15416 0 : Stable
0 : No LOCK BUSY 5
Unstable stability verification 1 : Unstable
Main unit in LOCK status
2 LOCK BUSY
BUSY status 1 : LOCK BUSY *1 Handshake is a communication procedure to make the permission system for
BUSY Status status
2 1 byte
Bits 0 : No MODE BUSY
read data writing.
Main unit in MODE status Use handshaking when using the multi head mode of the master/slave function.
3 MODE BUSY
BUSY status 1 : MODE BUSY *2 In the multi head mode of the master/slave function, the "Read Complete" bit
status
remains OFF.
0 : No ERR BUSY
Main unit in ERR Cancellation is
4 ERR BUSY
BUSY status
status
1 : ERR BUSY status
required. z Word area/byte area
6 READY Device ready state
0 : Not ready In the following areas, information is represented with the following units.
1 : Ready
• Word areas : Areas where 0 to 65535 is represented as a 2-byte unsigned
Read operation
0 Read Complete*2 completion
0 : Incomplete integer
1 : Complete
notification • Byte area : Areas where a character code such as ASCII code is represented
Preset read Module Word
0 : Incomplete Slot Size Name Description Data contents Remarks
1 Preset Complete completion
1 : Complete This is cleared at the name address
notification
start of Clear Bit in 0 Matching Level Matching level 100 to 0*1
Preset data
each status or at the 4 : A*1
Register Preset registration 0 : Incomplete
2 start of the next 3:B
Data Complete completion 1 : Complete ISO/IEC 15415 ISO/IEC 15415 total
operation. 1 2:C
notification Grade evaluation grade
Completion 1:D
3 1 byte Tuning completion 0 : Incomplete
Status Bits 3 Tune Complete Matching 0:F
notification 1 : Complete
Level and 4 : A*1
BLOAD completion 0 : Incomplete If multiple codes are
4 BLOAD Complete Total ISO/IEC TR 29158 3:B
notification 1 : Complete 7 8 byte read, the smallest
Evaluation 2 AIM DPM Grade (AIM DPM) total 2:C value is displayed.
1 is output when Grade evaluation grade 1:D
"Reading", "Preset Status*1 0:F
External instruction reading" and "Tuning" 4:A
EXT. Request 0 : Incomplete
7 operation completion are executed via 15416 3:B
Complete 1 : Complete ISO/IEC 15416
notification external terminals or 3 comprehensive 2:C
commands and Grade
grade 1:D
results are obtained. 0:F
The cause of failure Reading operation
can be checked with 0 Read Result Code Error code
result code
Read Result Code.
Reading error 0: - This is cleared at the Preset Result Preset data read
0 Read Failure 1 Error code
notification 1: Reading error start of Read Code result code
Complete Clear Bit or Preset data
Register Preset
at the start of the next 2 registration result Error code
Data Result Code
operation. code
Refer to List of error
The cause of failure Tuning operation
3 Tune Result Code Error code codes.
can be checked with result code
Operation
Preset Result Code. 8 20 byte BLOAD Result
0: - Result Status 4 BLOAD result code Error code
Preset reading error This is cleared at the Code
1 Preset Failure 1: Preset reading
notification start of Preset EXT. Request External instruction
Error 7 Error code
Complete Clear Bit or Result Code operation result code
at the start of the next
operation. General Error
8 General error code Error code
Code
The cause of failure
The ID of the reader
can be checked with This is only used with
to which the most
Preset Data Result Slave ID 0 to 31 the master/slave
recent data was
Code. function.
Preset data 0: - written is displayed.
Register Preset This is cleared at the
2 registration failure 1: Preset data Result Data Ready Result data reception
Data Failure start of Register 0 The number returns
notification registration failure Count count
Preset Data to 0 if it exceeds
Complete Clear Bit or Result Data Result data update 65535.
1
at the start of the next Update Count count
operation. The trigger input
The cause of failure • Read Data Trigger Input count for the master
2 0 to 65535
can be checked with 32Byte Count for Master unit (ID: 0) is
Error Status Tune Result Code. displayed.
4 1 byte • Read Data
Bits Tuning failure 0: - This is cleared at the Result data size
3 Tune Failure 8+ 64Byte 3 Result Data Size
notification 1: Tuning failure start of Tune (data • Read Data (byte)
Complete Clear Bit or 9
size) 128Byte Byte • When append data
at the start of the next byte • Read Data area has been set, the
operation. 246Byte • 32 append data is
The cause of the * Select one bytes output.
failure can be of them. • 64 • When the silent
checked with BLOAD Result data output
bytes Result Data Result data output mode is set, this
BLOAD failure 0: - Result Code. This is (Array of bytes)
4 BLOAD Failure • 128 area is not
notification 1: BLOAD failure cleared at the start of bytes updated.
BLOAD Complete • 246 • NULL (0x00) is
Clear or at the start of bytes appended after
the next operation. result data.
1 is output when
"Reading", "Preset *1 In the multi head mode of the master/slave function, the matching level and the
reading" and "Tuning" status of the code quality verification function cannot be used.
are executed via
external terminals or
This returns to 0 when the Output Assemblies "Read Complete Clear" bit is set to
commands and the ON.
0: - operation fails. The
External instruction
EXT. Request 1: External cause of failure can
7 operation failure
Failure instruction be checked with
notification
operation failure EXT.Request Result
Code.
This is cleared at the
start of EXT. Request
Complete Clear Bit or
at the start of the next
operation.
GB SR-2000 UM 110
Q address output address PLC → SR-2000
Error List
z Bit area
In the following areas, information is divided by bit. Error code Error Meaning
Information is represented with 0 or 1. 0 No error Reading success/operation success
Module Bit 201 Reading error Reading error
Slot Size Name Description Data contents Remarks
name address The read code does not match the preset
0 (Reserved) Reserved area 202 Comparison error
data.
0→1: Writing to Tuning failure The code could not be found within the field of
result data This functions only 210
1 Result Data Latch
Result data update
device when handshake is (Symbol unclear) view while tuning.
permitted
permitted enabled. Tuning failure
1→0: - 213 Tuning was aborted midway.
(Aborted)
The following error
statuses and data are Another operation instruction was received
Latch and Control instruction reception
cleared. 120 during operation. (Operation instruction is not
10 1 byte Error Clear error
• Buffer Overflow completed.)
Control Bits Error
• General error The bank number specification is invalid
0→1: Error clear 102 Bank No. error
7 Error Clear Error clear • Result data (other than 1 to 16).
1→0: -
acquisition count Preset data specification is invalid.
• Result data update 220 Preset data error
count (Specified size is outside the range.)
• Result data stored Shortage of specified size (Result data and
in the transmission 230 PROFINET data update error
present data size is beyond the limit.)
buffer
When specifying the
0→1: Start reading
0 Read Request Reading start request bank, specify to Bank
1→0: Stop reading
Number module. Operation Examples
0→1: Preset read
Preset reading start start Reading not possible
1 Preset Request Example 1) Trigger method: Level trigger. Handshaking: Disabled.
request 1→0: Preset read in the specified bank
stop
Specify to User Data Input
← : PLC←SR-2000
Size/User Data
Output
Module. → : PLC→SR-2000
0→1: Preset data When deleting preset
Register Preset Preset data Direction Signal name When reading successful When reading fails
Operation 2 registration data, set the user
Data Request registration request Output
11 1 byte instruction 1→0: - data size to 1, set the Read request
Control Bits user data to 0xFF →
and register preset Input
← TRG BUSY
data.
Barcode/2D code
Specify the tuning Read Complete
0→1: Start tuning target bank number Input
3 Tune Request Tuning start request ←
Read Complete
1→0: Stop tuning to Bank Number
module. Output Read Complete Clear
→
Before starting
Input Read Failure
BLOAD, enter the file ←
0→1: Start BLOAD
4 BLOAD Request BLOAD start request number (1 to 8) in the
1→0: - Input Read Result Code
Bank Number ← 0 201
module. Input OUT1 Status(OK)*1
Read completion ←
Read Complete Reading complete 0→1: Complete clear notification and read Input OUT2 Status(ERROR)*2
0 ←
Clear clear 1→0: - failure notification
clear Input Read Data Ready Count *2
← m m+1 m m+1
Preset read Input Read Data Update Count *2 m m+1 m m+1

completion ←
Preset Complete Preset reading 0→1: Complete clear
1 notification and Input
Clear complete clear 1→0: - ←
Result Data Read Data ERROR
preset read failure
notification clear
Preset data z When reading is successful
registration
Register Preset Preset data completion 1 "Read request" is set to ON (1).
0→1: Complete clear
2 Data Complete registration complete
1→0: -
notification and 2 When "Read request" is set to ON (1), the SR-2000 Series starts reading,
Completion Clear clear preset data and then "TRG BUSY" is set to ON (1).
12 1 byte Clear Control registration failure
Bits notification clear 3 When the code is read, its data is written into "Result Data." "TRG BUSY" is
Tuning completion set to OFF (0), and "Read Complete" is set to ON (1).
3
Tune Complete
Clear
Tuning complete
clear
0→1: Complete clear
1→0: -
Notification and
tuning failure
4 "Read request" is set to OFF (0).
notification clear 5 It is confirmed that "Read Complete" is ON (1), and then "Read Complete
BLOAD Complete Clear" is set to ON (1).
BLOAD Complete BLOAD complete 0→1: Complete clear
4
Clear clear 1→0: -
and BLOAD Result 6 When "Read Complete Clear" is set to ON (1), "Read Complete" is set to
Code clear
OFF (0).
operation completion 7 It is confirmed that "Read Complete" is OFF (0), and then "Read Complete
7
EXT. Request
operation complete
0→1: Complete clear and external Clear" is set to OFF (0).
Complete Clear 1→0: - instruction operation
clear
failure notification z When reading fails
clear
1 "Read request" is set to ON (1).
z Word area/byte area 2 When "Read request" is set to ON (1), the SR-2000 Series starts reading,
In the following areas, information is represented with the following units. 3 "Read request" is set to OFF (0).
• Word areas : Areas where 0 to 65535 is represented as a 2-byte unsigned 4 The code could not be read, so "ERROR" is written to "Result Data." "201" is
integer written to "Read Result Code." "TRG BUSY" is set to OFF (0), and "Read
• Byte area : Areas where a character code such as ASCII code is represented Complete" is set to ON (1).
Module Word
Slot Size Name Description Data contents Remarks Clear" is set to ON (1).
name address
Bank Number 6 When "Read Complete Clear" is set to ON (1), "Read Complete" and "Read
• For reading start Failure" are set to OFF (0).
request
1 to 16:
Bank setting read Clear" is set to OFF (0).
Other than 1 to 16:
Alternate read
• For tuning start
request
Parameter Bank Number/ 1 to 16:
Bank Number/
13 2 byte Bank 0 BLOAD File 1 to 16 Tuning result
BLOAD file number
Number Number storage bank
Other than 1 to 16:
Error
BLOAD File Number
• BLOAD
1 to 8:
Specify the BLOAD
file number.
Other than 1 to 8:
Error
• User Data Specify preset data
32 byte 0 User Data Size Preset data size
size.
• User Data
2+ Byte
64 byte
(user area
• User Data
14 data (preset Specify preset data.
128 byte
size) data User Data Preset data (Terminator is not
• User Data
byte size) necessary.)
252 byte
* Select one
of them.
111 GB SR-2000 UM
Example 2) Trigger method: One-shot trigger. Handshaking: Disabled. z When reading fails
Direction Signal name When reading successful When reading fails 1 "Read request" is set to ON (1).
Output
Read request
2 When "Read request" is set to ON (1), the SR-2000 Series starts reading,
→
Input
← TRG BUSY
The code could not be The code could be read
Barcode/2D code
Read Complete
read during the one-shot
trigger duration.
during the one-shot
trigger duration.
4 When the code cannot be read, "ERROR" is written to the send buffer, so
Input Read Complete "Read Complete" and "Result Data Available" are set to ON (1). "201" is
←
Output
written to "Read Result Code." "TRG BUSY" is set to OFF (0).
Read Complete Clear
→ 5 It is confirmed that "Read Complete" is ON (1), and then "Read Complete
Input Read Failure Clear" is set to ON (1).
←
Input Read Result Code 0 201
6 When "Read Complete Clear" is set to ON (1), "Read Complete" is set to
←
Input
OFF (0).
OUT1 Status(OK)*1
← 7 It is confirmed that "Read Complete" is OFF (0), and then "Read Complete
Input
←
OUT2 Status(ERROR)*2 Clear" is set to OFF (0).
Input Read Data Ready Count *2
8 It is confirmed that "Result Data Available" is ON (1), and then "Result Data
← m m+1 m m+1
Input
Latch" is set to ON (1).
Read Data Update Count *2
← m m+1 m m+1
9 When "Result Data Latch" is set to ON (1), "ERROR" is written into "Result
Input
←
Result Data Read Data ERROR Data." "Result Data Strobe" is set to ON (1).
10 It is confirmed that "Result Data Strobe" is ON (1), and then "Result Data
z When reading is successful Latch" is set to OFF (0).
1 "Read request" is set to ON (1). 11 When "Result Data Latch" is set to OFF (0), "Read Complete Clear" and
2 When "Read request" is set to ON (1), the SR-2000 Series starts reading, "Result Data Strobe" are set to OFF (0).
3 When the code is read, its data is written into "Result Data." "TRG BUSY" is Example 4) Using the Changeover Function
set to OFF (0), and "Read Complete" is set to ON (1).
4 "Read request" is set to OFF (0). Direction Signal name
Output Bank/
5 It is confirmed that "Read Complete" is ON (1), and then "Read Complete → BLOAD file number
1-8 0
Clear" is set to ON (1). Output BLOAD Request

→
6 When "Read Complete Clear" is set to ON (1), "Read Complete" is set to Input BLOAD Complete
OFF (0). ←
Output
7 It is confirmed that "Read Complete" is OFF (0), and then "Read Complete →
BLOAD Complete Clear
Clear" is set to OFF (0). Input READY
←
z When reading fails Output Read request
→
1 "Read request" is set to ON (1).
2 When "Read request" is set to ON (1), the SR-2000 Series starts reading, 1 The file number is added to "Bank/BLOAD File Number".
and then "TRG BUSY" is set to ON (1). 2 "BLOAD Request" is turned on (1), which changes the file number setting
3 When the "One-shot trigger duration" elapses, reading stops. and turns on "BLOAD Complete".
4 The code could not be read, so "ERROR" is written to "Result Data." "201" is 3 It is confirmed that "BLOAD Complete" is on (1), and then "BLOAD
written to "Read Result Code." "TRG BUSY" is set to OFF (0), and "Read Complete Clear" is turned on (1).
Complete" is set to ON (1). 4 "BLOAD Complete Clear" is turned on (1), which turns off (0) "BLOAD
5 It is confirmed that "Read Complete" is ON (1), and then "Read Complete Complete".
Clear" is set to ON (1). 5 It is confirmed that "BLOAD Complete" is off (0), and then "BLOAD
6 When "Read Complete Clear" is set to ON (1), "Read Complete" and "Read Request" is turned off (0).
Failure" are set to OFF (0). 6 "Bank/BLOAD File Number" is set to 0.
7 It is confirmed that "Read Complete" is OFF (0), and then "Read Complete 7 It is confirmed that "READY" is on (1), and then "Read Request" is turned on
Clear" is set to OFF (0). (1).
Example 3) Trigger method: Level trigger. Handshaking: Enabled. Example 5) Reading with the IN terminal. IN1: Trigger input. Trigger method:
Level trigger. Handshaking: Disabled.
Output
→ Read request Direction Signal name When reading successful When reading failed
Input IN1
← TRG BUSY
Barcode/2D code Input
← TRG BUSY
Read Complete
Input Barcode/2D code
Read Complete Read Complete
←
Output Input
Read Complete Clear ← EXT. Request Complete
→
Input Output EXT. Request Complete
Read Failure → Clear
←
Input Input
Read Result Code 0 201 ← EXT. Request Failure
←
Input Input
Result Data Available ← EXT. Request Result Code 0 201
←
Output Input
Result Data Latch ← Result Data Read data ERROR
→
Input Result Data Strobe
←
Input OUT1 Status(OK)*1
←
Input OUT2 Status(ERROR)*2
←
Input
Read Data Ready Count *2
← m m+1 m m+1
Input
←
Read Data Update Count *2 m m+1 m m+1 3 When the code is read, the data is written to "Result Data." Then "TRG
Input Result Data Read Data ERROR
BUSY" is set to OFF (0), and " EXT. Request Complete" is set to ON (1).
←
4 The signal of the IN terminal is set to OFF.
z When reading is successful 5 It is confirmed that "EXT. Request Complete" is ON (1), and then "EXT.
Request Complete Clear" is set to ON (1).
1 "Read request" is set to ON (1). 6 When "EXT. Request Complete Clear" is set to ON (1), "EXT. Request
2 When "Read request" is set to ON (1), the SR-2000 Series starts reading, Complete" is set to OFF (0).
and then "TRG BUSY" is set to ON (1). 7 It is confirmed that "EXT. Request Complete" is OFF (0), and then "EXT.
3 When the code is read, "TRG BUSY" is set to OFF (0), and "Read Complete" Request Complete Clear" is set to OFF (0).
and "Result Data Available" are set to ON (1).
Clear" is set to ON (1).
6 When "Read Complete Clear" is set to ON (1), "Read Complete" is set to
OFF (0).
8 It is confirmed that "Result Data Available" is ON (1), and then "Result Data
Latch" is set to ON (1).
9 When "Result Data Latch" is set to ON (1), the data is written into "Result
Data." "Result Data Strobe" is set to ON (1).
10 It is confirmed that "Result Data Strobe" is ON (1), and then "Result Data
Latch" is set to OFF (0).
11 When "Result Data Latch" is set to OFF (0), "Result Data Available" and
"Result Data Strobe" are set to OFF (0).
GB SR-2000 UM 112
3 The signal of the IN terminal is set to OFF (0).
4 The code could not be read, so "ERROR" is written to "Result Data." "201" is
written to "EXT. Request Result Code" Then "TRG BUSY" is set to OFF (0),
and "EXT. Request Complete Clear" is set to ON (1).
5 It is confirmed that "EXT. Request Complete" is ON (1), and then "EXT.
Request Complete Clear" is set to ON (1).
6 When "EXT. Request Complete Clear" is set to ON (1), "EXT. Request
Complete" and "EXT. Request Failure" are set to OFF (0).
7 It is confirmed that "EXT. Request Complete" is OFF (0), and then "EXT.
Request Complete Clear" is set to OFF (0).
Point • The signal directions are indicated as shown below.

Input
← : PLC ← SR-2000
Output
→
: PLC → SR-2000
• The OUT1 and OUT2 operations are described using the factory
default configurations of the SR-2000 Series operation settings and
multi I/O settings.
• The "Read Data Ready Count" and "Read Data Update Count" values
may differ depending on the operation status and communication
frequency.
For example, when a code is read and then the reading of the next
code finishes before the updating of the PLC data finishes, the result
data ready count will be larger than the expected value by one.
113 GB SR-2000 UM
16-1 Reading Operation 16-3 Reading Codes with
Unknown Positions
Host
PC
HUB
Slave unit
PLC
With this operation, you can read codes by bringing them in front of the SR-2000
Slave unit
Series.
The configuration procedure and operations vary depending on whether a trigger Master unit
sensor will be used. The master unit controls the slave units.
When Using a Sensor Use this operation when you do not know the vertical or horizontal position of the
codes but you want to read them with multiple readers.
Configure the settings as shown below to have the SR-2000 Series emit light and Refer to advanced multi-head mode in "6-19 Advanced Multi-head Mode"
scan only when the target is detected by the sensor. (page 26).
Settings
[Operation] tab
[I/O] tab
- [Reading Mode]
- [Input Polarity]
- [IN1 Function]
:
:
:
Single
Norm. open
Timing
16-4 Changeover
- [Power-on trigger] : Disabled
Change to Operating with
configuration B configuration A
When Not Using a Sensor
Refer to "6-7 Read Codes in Always On Mode" (page 19).
16-2 Reading Moving Codes

B B B A A
When the product on the line is switched to a different product, the code type may
also change. The changeover operation changes the reading settings required
when the product is switched.
Configuration File Switch Commands

You can switch the settings that are used to operate the SR-2000 Series (for a
changeover) by sending commands to the SR-2000. This makes it possible to
With this operation, the SR-2000 reads codes that move along the line. operate the SR-2000 Series with settings dedicated for reading the product, to
Refer to "6-13 Reading at a Specific Speed and Depth" (page 22). read using only the required bank, and to match the data format with the product.
Creating changeover configuration files

This command creates the configuration file and script file.
The settings in RAM are saved to a configuration file to be saved in ROM.
Configuration to be
ROM saved with the SAVE
Copy command
RAM
Copy Configuration
file 1
Configuration being
used in operation
Command BSAVE,m
m = 1 to 8
Parameter ROM configuration file number at copy destination (config1.ptc, config2.ptc …)
ROM script file number at copy destination (FmtSet1.Lua, FmtSet2.Lua …)
Response OK,BSAVE
GB SR-2000 UM 114
Loading changeover configuration files
Configuration to be
ROM saved with the SAVE
command
Read
RAM
Read Configuration
file 1
Configuration being
used in operation
Command BLOAD,m
m=1-8
Parameter Configuration file number to read (config1.ptc, config2.ptc …)
Script file number to read (FmtSet1.Lua, FmtSet2.Lua …)
Response OK,BLOAD
Setting procedure
1 Use AutoID Network Navigator to send the first configuration file to

the SR-2000.
2 Use the terminal to send "BSAVE,1."

The files config1.ptc and FmtSet1.Lua (the first configuration file) are created.
3 Use AutoID Network Navigator to send the second configuration file

to the SR-2000.
4 Use the terminal to send "BSAVE,2."

The files config2.ptc and FmtSet2.Lua (the second configuration file) are
created.
5 Repeat the same procedure to create the required number of

configuration files.
6 Send "BLOAD,m" during operation to use the target settings.
Reference • The SR-2000 Series can save up to eight configuration file and
script file pairs.
• A separate focus position is saved for each configuration file.
• EtherNet/IP or PROFINET can be used for the BLOAD operation.
• The BLOAD function can be used in conjunction with PLC links,
Ethernet/IP, and PROFINET.
115 GB SR-2000 UM
17-1 Specifications Setup software (AutoID Network Navigator)
Model SR-H6W
SR-2000 + Windows 10 Professional or later, 32 bit/64 bit

Model SR-2000 SR-2000W Windows 8 Professional or later, 32 bit/64 bit (excluding Windows
SR-20AH Supported operating
RT)
Full range Super wide- High resolution system
Type Windows 7 Professional or later, 32 bit/64 bit
type view type type
Windows Vista Business/Ultimate SP2 or later, 32 bit*
Sensor CMOS Image Sensor
Processor: 2.0 GHz or higher
Receiver Number of pixels 2048 x 1536 pixels Memory: 1 GB for 32 bit and 2 GB for 64 bit
Running environment
Focus adjustment Automatic* DVD-ROM drive: Required for installation
Screen resolution: 1024 × 768 or higher
Light source High-intensity red LED
* The SR-2000/G100 does not support Windows Vista.
Light emitter Pointer light source High-intensity green LED
• NET Framework 3.5 SP1 or later must be installed in advance.
LED class Exempt group (IEC62471) • When installing .NET Framework 3.5 on Windows 8/10, an Internet connection
QR, MicroQR, DataMatrix (ECC200), is necessary.
2D code GS1 DataMatrix, PDF417, MicroPDF417,
• Use Control Panel to install .NET Framework 3.5 on Windows 8/10.
GS1 Composite (CC-A/CC-B/CC-C), DotCode
Supported
CODE39, ITF, 2of5 (Industrial 2of5), COOP Control Cable
2of5, NW-7 (Codabar), CODE128, GS1-128,
symbol GS1 DataBar, CODE93, JAN/EAN/UPC,
OP-87224 OP-87225 OP-87226
Barcode Trioptic CODE39, CODE39 Full ASCII,
OP-87353 OP-87354 OP-87355
Reading Pharmacode, Model OP-87527 OP-87528 OP-87529
specifications Postal (Japan Postal code (Japan Postal), OP-88304 OP-88305 OP-88306
IMB (Intelligent Mail Barcode)) OP-88307 OP-88308 OP-88309
Minimum 2D code 0.040 mm 0.063 mm 0.012 mm Cable length 2m 5m 10 m
resolution Barcode 0.082 mm 0.082 mm 0.082 mm Weight Approx. 250 g Approx. 400 g Approx. 700 g
Reading distance 100 to 2000 mm 50 to 1000 mm 35 to 70 mm
Reading view range

263 mm x 197 mm 707 mm x 530 mm 26 mm x 19 mm Ethernet Cable
(Distance: 800 mm) (Distance: 800 mm) (Distance: 70 mm)
Points 2 OP-87230 OP-87231 OP-87232
Model
OP-87301 OP-87302 OP-87303
Input type Bidirectional voltage input
Cable length 2m 5m 10 m
Maximum
26.4 VDC Weight Approx. 200 g Approx. 350 g Approx. 500 g
Control rating
input
Minimum
15 VDC
ON voltage
Maximum
0.2 mA
OFF current
Points 3
Output type Photo MOS relay output
Maximum
30 VDC
rating
Maximum 1 output: 50 mA or less,
Control load current 3-output total: 100 mA or less
output
Leakage
I/O current 0.1 mA or less
specifications when OFF
Residual
voltage 1 V or less
when ON
Communication
IEEE 802.3 compliant, 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
standard
Ethernet TCP/IP, SNTP, FTP, BOOTP, EtherNet/IP,
Supported
PROFINET, KV STUDIO, MC Protocol,
protocol
OMRON PLC Link
Communication
RS-232C compliant
standard
Serial
Communication
communic 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps
speed
ation
Supported
None, KV STUDIO, MC Protocol, SYSWAY
protocol
Communication
USB USB 2.0 Full Speed compliant
standard
Enclosure rating IP65
Operating ambient
0 to +45°C
temperature
Storage ambient
-10 to +50°C
temperature
Operating ambient
35 to 85%RH (No condensation)
Environmental humidity
resistance Storage ambient humidity 35 to 85%RH (No condensation)
Sunlight: 10000 lux,
Ambient light Incandescent lamp: 6000 lux,
Fluorescent lamp: 2000 lux
Operating environment No dust or corrosive gas present
10 to 55 Hz Double amplitude 0.75 mm,
Vibration
3 hours each in X, Y and Z directions
Power supply voltage 24 VDC±10%
Rating
Current consumption Approx. 1600 mA
Weight Approx. 300 g Approx. 350 g
* The focus position can be automatically adjusted during installation and during
tuning.
Number of ROM-rewrite times: 100,000 times
GB SR-2000 UM 116
17-2 Dimensions When the SR-20AH is used
SR-2000/2000W
28.3
55 55
2×M3 4×M4
27.5 Depth: 4 38.7 4.3 28 Depth: 5
37.3 30.8 33.8 64.3 64.4

8° 59
Center of 88.3
28
scanner
6.6
37.7
137.4 134.4
45
8.3
21.2
56
* Mount with a cable bending radius of the

Unit: mm
following value or greater:
[When not mobile] R = 15 mm
[When mobile] Control cable: R = 20 mm
Ethernet cable: R = 50 mm
Lighting attachment (SR-20AL)
Unit: mm 142.1 77.6
When L-shaped cable connected

2×M3 55 4×M4 142.1
Depth:4 38.7 4.3 28 Depth:5
30.8 33.8
88.3
28
Unit: mm
121.3
132.3
When the lighting attachment (SR-20AL) is used

142.1 113.6
21.2
Unit: mm
56
142.1
When the mounting bracket (OP-87866) is used

56
50.5 57.6
28 Unit: mm
33
4×φ 10°
4.6
5.3
10°
OP-88176/88256
R32 55 10.3
28 47 6.3
7.5
φ5.3
13
2
82.1
(1)
Unit: mm
8.6 Unit: mm
When the adjustable bracket (OP-88002) is used

61.6 89
42 75.5
4×
φ4
.6
47.8
46.5
47
31.6
Unit: mm
117 GB SR-2000 UM
OP-87224/87225/87226/87353/87534/87355 OP-88307/88308/88309
38 L 30
2000
5000
10000 45 26 180
ø15
150
φ15
5 120 120
φ6.7
5 150
42.7
5 180 Unit: mm
OP-87527/87528/87529
36.8
ø7
2000
5000 Thickness:16
Model L (mm)
38 10000 45
180 OP-88307 2000
180 mm Brown, blue, black tube
26 150 OP-88308 5000
150 mm Black, pink, light blue, white
120
120 mm Gray, green, white and blue OP-88309 10000
Unit: mm
φ15
36.8
OP-88301/88302/88303
φ6.7
180 mm Brown, blue, black tube

Thickness: 16 150 mm Black, pink, light blue, white 36.2
44.7 L
120 mm Gray, green, white and blue
ø15
z Rod terminal z Y terminal

6.6
17.1
4.3
1
10
ø6.4
ø1 2
11
Unit: mm
Model L (mm)
OP-87230/87231/87232 OP-88301 2000
OP-88302 5000
φ6.4
OP-88303 10000
17.1
φ14.8
Unit: mm
44.7 L 47.3
Model L (mm)
OP-87230 2000
OP-87231 5000
OP-87232 10000
Unit: mm
OP-88304/88305/88306
L 30
ø15
42.7
ø7
5 120
5 150
Model L (mm)
5 180
OP-88304 2000
OP-88305 5000
OP-88306 10000
Unit: mm
GB SR-2000 UM 118
17-3 Troubleshooting Data is not output through the RS-232C interface
• Communication settings confirmation
Check that the communication settings of the SR-2000 Series match those of the
Error shown on the SR-2000 Series display host device.
"5-3 Communication Settings" (page 13)
Refer to the following table to troubleshoot the error. • Wiring
z List of errors displayed on the reader To communicate via RS-232C, the pin arrangement of the SR-2000 Series must
match that of the host device. Check that a cable correctly matching the pin
Error number/message Remedy
arrangement is being used.
E0 FILE SYSTEM Contact your nearest KEYENCE office. "2-2 Wiring to a PC" (page 6)
E1 FACTPARAM Contact your nearest KEYENCE office. "2-3 Wiring to a PLC or Peripheral" (page 6)
E2 CHECK SUM Contact your nearest KEYENCE office.
E2 CONFIG VER Contact your nearest KEYENCE office.
An error occurred during PROFINET communication. To reconfigure
Data is not output through the Ethernet interface
settings, hold down the [SELECT] button for at least 4 seconds to
E3 PROFINET clear the error. Alternatively, send the DFLT command to initialize the • Communication settings confirmation
settings, and then configure the settings again. Check the Check that the settings for communication between the SR-2000 Series and the
communication between the SR-2000 Series and the PLC.
host device are correct.
An error occurred because the upper limit of the send buffer was "5-3 Communication Settings" (page 13)
exceeded.
E4 BUFFER OVER • Wiring
Cycle power to the SR-2000 Series or hold down the [SELECT]
button for at least 4 seconds to clear the error. If you are using a hub or other intermediary device between the SR-2000 Series
A duplicate IP address is present on the network. and the host device, remove the intermediary device to establish a direct con-
E5 IP DUPLICATE Configure the network settings so that no duplicate IP addresses nection, and then check if it is possible to communicate.
are present.
• Security settings
An error occurred during an SR-2000 Series firmware update.
E6 FW UPDATE Cycle power to the SR-2000 Series, and then execute update Check whether communication is being blocked by the security settings of the
again. network devices.
A PLC link error occurred.
E7 PLC LINK Check the communication between the SR-2000 Series and the
PLC. "ERROR" in the output data
An error occurred during script execution.
E8 SCRIPT A reading error has occurred on the SR-2000 Series. Check the following points.
Check the SR-2000 Series settings and the script file.
E9 DSP PROG Contact your nearest KEYENCE office. • Trigger input time
E10 CMOS Contact your nearest KEYENCE office. If the time for receiving trigger input from a switch or sensor is too short, a read-
Cycle power to the SR-2000 Series. If the error still occurs, contact ing error will occur. Check if making the trigger input time longer improves read-
E11 AUTO FOCUS
your nearest KEYENCE office. ing.
An error occurred during communication with a host device. If you want to start reading on the rising edge of the trigger input for a specific
Check for causes of unstable communication. To reconfigure amount of time, use the "One-shot trigger" setting.
E12 HOST CONNECT
settings, hold down the [SELECT] button for at least 4 seconds to
clear the error. "6-17 Change Reading Behavior" (page 25)
E13 MOTOR Contact your nearest KEYENCE office. • Tuning options
An error occurred with the command replacement.
You have to tune the SR-2000 Series to read codes.
E15 REPLACE FILE Refer to sections on SR-2000 series configuration and command Tuning execution:
replacement files. Using the reader "4-1 Tuning" (page 11)
Using the setup software "5-2 Reading Settings" (page 12)
Unable to install AutoID Network Navigator or the Configuration confirmation: "8-1 Checking SR-2000 Series Settings" (page 44)
• Line speed
SR-2000 Series driver
If the reader cannot read the codes moving on the line, the reading settings may
Check the following points, and then install the software again. not be correct.
• Administrator rights "6-13 Reading at a Specific Speed and Depth" (page 22)
To install the software, log on as a user with Administrator rights.
• Security software
The installation may be impeded by security software. Temporarily disable the "ER,**" in the output data
security software.
This is displayed when the PC or PLC sends a command to the SR-2000 Series
and the processing of the command fails.
Unable to connect to AutoID Network Navigator • Error details
• USB connection
"5-1 Connecting" (page 12)
• Ethernet connection
"6-36 Connect to AutoID Network Navigator over Ethernet" (page 37)
When you click [Send configuration] in AutoID Network Navigator,

the message "Failed executing the command. (20)" is displayed.
An error may have occurred on the SR-2000 Series unit, for example, the IP
address may already be in use. Check the error message shown on the display.
Unable to read codes with the SR-2000 Series

• Tuning options
You have to tune the SR-2000 Series to read codes.
Tuning execution:
Using the reader "4-1 Tuning" (page 11)
Using the setup software "5-2 Reading Settings" (page 12)
Configuration confirmation: "8-1 Checking SR-2000 Series Settings" (page 44)
• Print quality
It may not be possible to read codes that have a large amount of cracks, chips,
stains, or blurring. You may be able to improve the situation by performing main-
tenance on the printer or marker.
• Mounting distance
It may not be possible to read codes that have small cell sizes when the reader
is installed too far away from the codes. Reduce the distance between the
reader and the codes, and then adjust focus and tune the reader again.
119 GB SR-2000 UM
17-4 ASCII Codes KC mark (Republic of Korea)
Class A Equipment
This product is a industrial electromagnetic wave generating device (Class A)
and is intended for use in all establishments other than domestic.
High-order 4 bits
Ͳ 匏͑匶匶͙͑ 櫋怺殯͑愯暧皻柦匶沖沲 ͚
Hexadecimal 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
決͑匶匶垚͑櫋怺殯͙͑Ͳ͑匏͚͑͑洊沖砒洇穯匶匶嵢昢͑砖廪沖͑嬖垚͑斲殯沖垚͑決͑洖汊渂
Binary 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 汞穞柢匶͑愚岂彶͑͑͝儆洛歾汞͑滆櫳櫖昢͑斲殯穞垚͑冉汊͑徯洇求嵢͑穯城埪͑͟
0 0000 DLE (SP) 0 @ P ‘ p FCC Regulations

1 0001 SOH DC1 ! 1 A Q a q This product complies with the following regulations specified by the FCC.
Applicable regulation: FCC Part 15 Subpart B ClassA
2 0010 STX DC2 “ 2 B R b r
3 0011 ETX DC3 # 3 C S c s Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interface, and (2) this device must accept any interference
4 0100 EOT DC4 $ 4 D T d t
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
5 0101 ENQ NAK % 5 E U e u
6 0110 ACK SYN & 6 F V f v
17-6
Low-order 4 bits
7 0111 BEL ETB ‘ 7 G W g w Software License Agreement

8 1000 BS CAN ( 8 H X h x
NOTICE TO USER: PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
9 1001 HT EM ) 9 I Y i y
(THIS “AGREEMENT”) CAREFULLY. BY USING ALL OR ANY PORTION OF THE
A 1010 LF SUB * : J Z j z [SR-H6W] (THIS “SOFTWARE”), YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY ALL
THE TERMS AND CONDITONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE
B 1011 VT ESC + ; K [ k { TO ANY TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, DO NOT USE THIS SOFTWARE.
C 1100 CL FS , < L \ l |
1. Definition
D 1101 CR GS - = M ] m } 1.1 “use” or “using” means to access, install, download, copy or
otherwise benefit from using the functionality of this Software.
E 1110 SO RS . > N ^ n ~
1.2 “This Software” means the software and all associated documentation
F 1111 SI US / ? O _ o del provided by KEYENCE.
2. Grant of License.
17-5 Precautions on Proper Use Conditioned upon compliance with all of the terms and conditions of this
Agreement, KEYENCE grants you a nonexclusive and nontransferable
license to install this Software on all computers used by your entity in order
to use the KEYENCE product. You may make one copy of this Software for
CE Marking backup or archive purposes only.
Keyence Corporation has confirmed that this product complies with the essen-
tial requirements of the applicable EU Directive, based on the following speci- 3. Restrictions.
fications. 3.1 Except for installation of updates or new functions provided by
Be sure to consider the following specifications when using this product in the KEYENCE, you may not modify or add any function to this Software.
Member State of European Union. 3.2 You may not reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble this
Software.
z EMC Directive 3.3 You may not create derivative works based on this Software.
• Applicable standards EMI : EN61326-1, Class A 3.4 Other than expressly stated by KEYENCE, you may not resell,
EMS : EN61326-1 retransfer, rent or otherwise redistribute this Software to any third
• The length of cable connected to the power supply connector must be parties.
less than or equal to 30 m.
• This product is intended to be used in an industrial electromagnetic envi- 4. Intellectual Property Rights.
ronment. Except as expressly stated herein, KEYENCE reserves all right, title and
These specifications do not give any guarantee that the end-product with this interest in this Software, and all associated copyrights, trademarks, and
product incorporated complies with the essential requirements of EMC Direc- other intellectual property rights therein.
tive. The manufacturer of the end-product is solely responsible for the compli-
ance on the end-product itself according to EMC Directive. 5. Disclaimer.
Keyence is licensing this Software to you “AS IS” and without any warranty
CSA Certificate
of any kind. In no event will KEYENCE or its suppliers be liable to you for
This product complies with the following CSA and UL standards and has been any damages, claims, costs or any lost profits caused by using this
certified by CSA. Software.
• Applicable standard : CAN/CSA C22.2 No.61010-1
UL61010-1 6. Termination.
• Be sure to consider the following specifications when using this product as a 6.1 Your license under this Agreement will terminate automatically if you
product certified by CSA. destroy this Software and the copy of this Software in your possession
• Overvoltage category or voluntarily return this Software to us.
• Use this product under pollution degree 2. 6.2 Your license under this Agreement will terminate automatically without
• Use this product at the altitude of 2000 m or less. any notice from KEYENCE if you fail to comply with any of the terms
• Indoor use only. and conditions of this Agreement. Promptly upon termination, you
• When using this product, use the following power supply. shall cease all use of this Software and destroy all copies, full or
CSA or UL certified power supply that provides Class 2 output as defined in partial, of this Software in your possession or control.
the CEC (Canadian Electrical Code) and NEC (National Electrical Code), or 6.3 You will compensate KEYENCE for costs or any lost profits caused by
CSA or UL certified power supply that has been evaluated as a Limited your violation or breach of any term of this Agreement.
Power Source as defined in CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60950-1/UL60950-1.
• Ensure the external circuits to be connected to the SR-2000 Series are SELV 7. Governing Law.
circuits. 7.1 This Agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance
with the substantive laws of Japan without regards to the principles of
conflicts of law.
7.2 If any part of this Agreement is found void and unenforceable, it will
not affect the validity of the balance of this Agreement, which shall
remain valid and enforceable according to its terms and conditions.
GB SR-2000 UM 120
17-7 Copyright indications
TOPPERS/JSP Kernel
Toyohashi Open Platform for Embedded Real-Time Systems/Just Standard
Profile Kernel
Copyright (C) 2000-2003 by Embedded and Real-Time Systems Laboratory

Toyohashi Univ. of Technology, JAPAN
The above copyright holders grant permission gratis to use, duplicate, modify, or
redistribute (hereafter called use) this software (including the one made by
modifying this software), provided that the following four conditions (1) through (4)
are satisfied.
(1) When this software is used in the form of source code, the above copyright
notice, this use conditions, and the disclaimer shown below must be retained
in the source code without modification.
(2) When this software is redistributed in the forms usable for the development of
other software, such as in library form, the above copyright notice, this use
conditions, and the disclaimer shown below must be shown without
modification in the document provided with the redistributed software, such as
the user manual.
(3) When this software is redistributed in the forms unusable for the development
of other software, such as the case when the software is embedded in a piece
of equipment, either of the following two conditions must be satisfied:
(a)The above copyright notice, this use conditions, and the disclaimer shown
below must be shown without modification in the document provided with
the redistributed software, such as the user manual.
(b)How the software is to be redistributed must be reported to the TOPPERS
Project according to the procedure described separately.
(4) The above copyright holders and the TOPPERS Project are exempt from
responsibility for any type of damage directly or indirectly caused from the use
of this software and are indemnified by any users or end users of this software
from any and all causes of action whatsoever.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS." THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
AND THE TOPPERS PROJECT DISCLAIM ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ITS APPLICABILITY TO A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND THE TOPPERS PROJECT BE LIABLE FOR ANY TYPE OF
DAMAGE DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY CAUSED FROM THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE.
This software uses the following libraries:

Lua:
Copyright© 1994 -2017 Lua.org, PUC-Rio.
Revision History
Date of printing Version Revision contents

April 2017 First edition
June 2017 2nd edition
December 2017 3rd edition SR-20AH/OP-88256 are added.
June 2018 4th edition Right angle cable added.
August 2018 5th edition Encoder output added.
March 2019 6th edition DotCode added.
121 GB SR-2000 UM
WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS
(1) KEYENCE warrants the Products to be free of defects in materials and
workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of shipment. If any
models or samples were shown to Buyer, such models or samples were used
merely to illustrate the general type and quality of the Products and not to
represent that the Products would necessarily conform to said models or
samples. Any Products found to be defective must be shipped to KEYENCE
with all shipping costs paid by Buyer or offered to KEYENCE for inspection and
examination. Upon examination by KEYENCE, KEYENCE, at its sole option,
will refund the purchase price of, or repair or replace at no charge any Products
found to be defective. This warranty does not apply to any defects resulting from
any action of Buyer, including but not limited to improper installation, improper
interfacing, improper repair, unauthorized modification, misapplication and
mishandling, such as exposure to excessive current, heat, coldness, moisture,
vibration or outdoors air. Components which wear are not warranted.
(2) KEYENCE is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various Products.
They are only suggestions, and it is Buyer's responsibility to ascertain the
fitness of the Products for Buyer’s intended use. KEYENCE will not be
responsible for any damages that may result from the use of the Products.
(3) The Products and any samples ("Products/Samples") supplied to Buyer are not
to be used internally in humans, for human transportation, as safety devices or
fail-safe systems, unless their written specifications state otherwise. Should any
Products/Samples be used in such a manner or misused in any way, KEYENCE
assumes no responsibility, and additionally Buyer will indemnify KEYENCE and
hold KEYENCE harmless from any liability or damage whatsoever arising out of
any misuse of the Products/Samples.
(4) OTHER THAN AS STATED HEREIN, THE PRODUCTS/SAMPLES ARE
PROVIDED WITH NO OTHER WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. ALL
EXPRESS, IMPLIED, AND STATUTORY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF
PROPRIETARY RIGHTS, ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL KEYENCE AND ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES BE
LIABLE TO ANY PERSON OR ENTITY FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM
LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF INFORMATION,
LOSS OR INACCURACY OF DATA, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF
SAVINGS, THE COST OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTED GOODS,
SERVICES OR TECHNOLOGIES, OR FOR ANY MATTER ARISING OUT OF
OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
PRODUCTS, EVEN IF KEYENCE OR ONE OF ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES
WAS ADVISED OF A POSSIBLE THIRD PARTY’S CLAIM FOR DAMAGES
OR ANY OTHER CLAIM AGAINST BUYER. In some jurisdictions, some of the
foregoing warranty disclaimers or damage limitations may not apply.
BUYER'S TRANSFER OBLIGATIONS:

If the Products/Samples purchased by Buyer are to be resold or delivered to a
third party, Buyer must provide such third party with a copy of this document, all
specifications, manuals, catalogs, leaflets and written information provided to
Buyer pertaining to the Products/Samples.
E 1101-3
BarcodeReader.com
http://www.barcodereader.com/
You can download technical documents useful for BL/SR/RF introduction and
operation.
Download the latest manual from this Web page.
Copyright (c) 2019 KEYENCE CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

193160GB 1039-1 843GB Printed in Japan
GB SR-2000 UM 122

SR-2000 Um 843GB 193160 GB 1039-1 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SR-2000 Um 843GB 193160 GB 1039-1 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

843GB

User's Manual Rev.6.0 Chapter 1 Before Using the Product

Chapter 2 Connection and Wiring

Part 3 Communication Safety Precautions on LED Product

Chapter 10 Communication Types

Chapter 12 Command Communication

Chapter 13 PLC Link

Part 4 Specifications and Application Examples

Chapter 16 Application Examples

OP-88256 Polarization filter Polarization 1

 Symbols Precautions on Regulations and Standards

 General Precautions  CSA Certificate

Model Name Package content Qty. Appearance

OP-87224/ Control cable Cable 1

OP-87353/ Control cable Cable 1

OP-87527/ Control cable Cable 1

OP-88304/ L-shaped control cable Cable 1

OP-88307/ L-shaped control cable Cable 1

OP-51580/86941 USB cable Cable 1

OP-87866 Mounting bracket Mounting 1

OP-88002 Adjustable bracket Mounting 1

OP-88176 Polarizing filter Polarization 1

SR-20AL Lighting attachment Lighting 1

(1) (4)  During setup

* You cannot connect to AutoID Network Navigator through the RS-232C

 When the unit is normally operating "1-1 Checking the Package

 When the unit reads a quick setup code

Configures settings unsuccessfully  Lit red

Unit state LED state

Reads successfully  Lit green Start operation.

 When the unit has an error

* For details of unit errors, refer to "17-3 Troubleshooting" (page 119)

Brown 24 V 24 VDC Input - 26

• Be sure to turn power off before attempting to connect or disconnect the

 Connecting the Ethernet cable

Black tube FG 2 Tighten the connector screw by turning it clockwise.

Black OUT COM

#4-40 screw (male)

 Connecting to the KV Series Photoelectric sensor (NPN)

KV-L21V/NC20L(port1) OP-87527/87528/87529/ Brown (red)

Handheld programmer SR-2000 Series

 Confirm that ambient light is not affecting the reader.

Change sensor position

 Confirm the reader's beam is unobstructed.

Code Change the position of the obstruction

• Mounting screw size : M5

3-2 Mounting Methods

1 Secure the SR-2000 Series unit with screws. 1

* Separately prepare a support pole

• Mounting screw size : M4 Removing the Polarizing Filter (OP-88176/88256)

Follow the steps below to reassemble it before use.

1 Fit the filter into the frame.

Installing the Polarizing Filter (OP-88176/88256)

2 Attach the lighting attachment (SR-20AL).

2 Secure the filter with the 6 included screws

• Mounting screw size : M3

Attaching the SR-20AH

• Supplied screw size: 0.5 N·m

• Mounting screw size : M3

Minimum Resolution (Typical)

800  SR-2000 (Full range type)

 SR-2000 + SR-20AH (High-resolution type)

1 Turn on the SR-2000 Series.

Symbols Precautions on Regulations and Standards

General Precautions CSA Certificate

(1) (4) During setup

When the unit is normally operating "1-1 Checking the Package

When the unit reads a quick setup code

Configures settings unsuccessfully Lit red

Reads successfully Lit green Start operation.

When the unit has an error

Connecting the Ethernet cable

Connecting to the KV Series Photoelectric sensor (NPN)

Confirm that ambient light is not affecting the reader.

Confirm the reader's beam is unobstructed.

800 SR-2000 (Full range type)

SR-2000 + SR-20AH (High-resolution type)

AscendingOrder using Y Descending Order using X